Theory of Machine and Mechanism (4th Sem)

Published by
Foundation Publishing House

An ISO 9001:2015 Certified Company
First Floor, Tulsi Apartment
Govind Mitra Road, Patna - 800 004
Phone : 0612-2300819, Mob.: 9386835571
E-mail: info@fph.co.in, Website: www.fph.co.in
Distributed by
Amit Book Depot
Near SBI ATM, Opp. Patna College,
Ashok Raj Path, Patna - 800 004
Phone : 0612-2372601
DISCLAIMER
All rights reserved with the publishers. Information contained in this book has been obtained by author from sources
believed to be reliable and are correct to the best of his knowledge. Every effort has been made to avoid errors and
omissions and ensure accuracy. Any error or omission noted may be brought to the notice of the publisher which shall
be taken care of in forthcoming edition of this book. However, neither the publisher nor the author guarantee the
accuracy or completeness of any information published herein, and neither the publisher nor author take any responsibility
or liability for any inconvenience, expenses, losses or damage to anyone resulting from contents of this book.
The author of the book has taken all possible care to ensure that the contents of the book do not violate any existing
copyright or other intellectual property right of any person in any manner whatsoever. In the event, the author has been
unable to track any source and in any copyright has been inadvertently, the facts may be brought to the notice of the
publisher in writing for corrective action.
WARNING
No part of this book, including its style and presentation, may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted
in any form or by any means–electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise without the prior written
consent of the publishers. Exclusive publication, promotion and distribution rights reserved with the Publishers. The
doing of an unauthorised act in relation to a copyright work may result in both civil claim for damages and criminal
prosecution. Photocopy or Xeroxing of educational books without the written permission of the publishers is illegal and
against the Copyright Act.
Branches:
 New Delhi: B-3/16, Daryaganj, New Delhi-110002
 Kolkata: 58-D, Netaji Subhas Road, 316, Third Floor, Kolkata-700001
 Bhubaneswar: First Floor, Plot No. 25, Budheswari Colony, Cuttack Road, Bhubaneswar-751006
 Ranchi: Opp. St. Franis School Road, Ranchi-834010
Edition- 2018
ISBN- 978-81-937030-1-4
Photo Typeset
Multi Graphics
Printed at
R.K. Graphics
Preface
I take immense pleasure and happiness in introducing the book "THEORY OF

MACHINES & MACHINERY".
The book caters to the academic needs of B.E/B.Tech & Diploma courses in Mechanical
Engineering. This book will also be helpful for students preparing for various competitive
exams such as GATE, SSC-JE etc. The course content has been planned so as to cover
the syllabi of all major universities in India.
Rather than information, I have tried to impart the knowledge through conceptual insights
into the subject matter so that the reader is invoked of his/her inquisition. Through my
words, I have tried to communicate in a lucid way and the language used is easy to
comprehend by the students with vernacular schooling background as well.
Solved examples at the end of each chapter have been arranged systematically to help
the students understand the concepts. Diagrams have been used wherever necessary to
explain things in a self explanatory way. At the end of the book, I have added a section
with solutions to the previous year questions of SBTE, BIHAR. This will be useful for
students of all universities.
With an ending note, I thank to my colleagues and my friends who have supported and
helped me in the completion of this book. Though I have tried to keep this book out of
errors, some errors might have crept in. Your suggestions are most welcome.
Shishir Kumar
Dedicated to My Parents
My Mother Mrs. Pramila Singh

& My Father Sub L P Singh
Syllabus
THEORY OF MACHINES AND MECHANISMS
Theory No of Period in one session : Credit
Subject Code No. of Periods Per Week Full Marks : 100

1625401 L T P/S ESE : 70
03 — — TA : 10 03
— — — CT : 20
Unit Topic Hrs/Week Marks
1 FUNDAMENTALS AND TYPES OF MECHANISMS 12 14
1.1 Kinematics of Machines: - Definition of Kinematics, Dynamics, Statics,

Kinetics, Kinematic link, Kinematic Pair and its types, constrained motion
and its types, Kinematic chain and its types, Mechanism, inversion,
machine and structure.
1.2 Inversions of Kinematic Chain
1.2.1 Inversion of four bar chain, coupled wheels of Locomotive & Pentograph.
1.2.2 Inversion of Single Slider Crank chain- Rotary I.C. Engines mechanism,
Whitworth quick return mechanism, Crank and Slotted lever quick return
mechanism.
1.3.3 Ackerman's Steering gear mechanism.
1.3.4 Foot operated air pump mechanism.
2 VELOCITY AND ACCELERATION IN MECHANISM 9 9
2.1 Concept of relative velocity and relative acceleration of a point on link,

angular velocity and angular acceleration, inter- relation between linear
and angular velocity and acceleration.
2.2 Drawing of velocity and acceleration diagram of a given configuration,
diagrams of simple mechanisms. Determination of velocity and
acceleration of a point on link by relative velocity method [Excluding
coriollis components of acceleration].
2.3 Analytical method [no derivation] and Klein's construction to determine
velocity and acceleration of different links in single slider crank
mechanism.
3 CAMS AND FOLLOWERS 8 8
3.1 Concept, definition and application of Cams and Followers.

3.2 Classification of Cams and Followers.
3.3 Different follower motions and their displacement diagrams like uniform
velocity, SHM, uniform acceleration and Retardation.
3.4 Drawing of profile of radial cam with knife-edge and roller follower with
and without offset with reciprocating motion (graphical method).
4 POWER TRANSMISSION 14 16
4.1 Types of Drives - Belt, Chain, Rope, Gear drives & their comparison.
4.2 Belt Drives - flat belt, V- belt & its applications, material for flat and V-
belt, angle of lap, belt length. Slip and creep. Determination of velocity
ratio, ratio of tight side and slack side tension, centrifugal tension and initial
tension, condition for maximum power transmission( Simple numericals)
4.3 Chain Drives - Advantages & Disadvantages, Selection of Chain &
Sprocket wheels, methods of lubrication.
4.4 Gear Drives - Spur gear terminology, types of gears and gear trains, their
selection for different application, train value & Velocity ratio for
compound, reverted and simple epicyclic gear train, methods of
lubrication, Law of gearing.
4.5 Rope Drives - Types, applications, advantages & limitations of Steel ropes.
5 FLYWHEEL AND GOVERNORS 6 6
5.1 Flywheel - Concept, function and application of flywheel with the help of
turning moment diagram for single cylinder 4-Stroke I.C. Engine (no
Numericals). Coefficient of fluctuation of energy, coefficient of fluctuation
of speed and its significance.
5.2 Governors - Types, concept, function and application & Terminology of
Governors.
5.3 Comparison between Flywheel and Governor.
6 BRAKES, DYNAMOMETERS, CLUTCHES & BEARINGS 12 14
6.1 Function of brakes and dynamometer, types of brakes and Dynamometers,

comparison between brakes and dynamometer.
6.2 Construction and working of i) shoe brake, ii) Band Brake, iii) Internal
expanding shoe brake iv) Disc Brake.
6.3 Concept of Self Locking & Self energizing brakes.
6.4 Numerical problems to find braking force and braking torque for shoe &
band brake.
6.5 Construction and working of i) Rope Brake Dynamometer, ii) Hydraulic
Dynamometer, iii) Eddy current Dynamometer.
6.6 Clutches- Uniform pressure and Uniform Wear theories.
6.7 Function of Clutch and its application, Construction and working of i) Single
plate clutch, ii) Multiplate clutch, iii) Centrifugal Clutch iv) Cone clutch v)
Diaphragm clutch. (Simple numericals on single and Multiplate clutch).
6.8 Bearings - i) Simple Pivot, ii) Collar Bearing, iii) Conical pivot. Torque &
power lost in friction (no derivation). Simple numerical.
7 BALANCING & VIBRATIONS 3 3
7.1 Concept of balancing. Balancing of single rotating mass. Graphical method

for balancing of several masses revolving in same plane.
7.2 Concept and terminology used in vibration, causes of vibrations in
machines, their harmful effects and remedies.
Total: 64 70
Content
Chapter 1. Fundamentals and Types of Mechanisms 9 — 34
 Introduction #9
 Kinematic Pair According to Nature of Contact as #12
 Kinematic Pair According to Nature of Mechanical Constraint #12
 Kinematic Pair According to Nature of Relative Motion #13
 Kinematic Chain #13
 Grashof’s Law for a Four Bar Mechanism
 Coupling Rod of a Locomotive (Double Crank Mechanism) #16
Watt’s Indicator Mechanism (Double Lever Mechanism) #16
 First Inversion #17
 Second Inversion (Link 2 is fixe [Crank]) #17
 Whitworth Quick-Return Mechanism #18
 Rotary Engine #18
 Third Inversion - Link 3 is Fixed (Connecting Rod) #19
 Fourth Inversion - Link 4 is Fixed (Slider) #19
 Inversion of Double Slider Crank Mechanism #20
 Ackerman Steering Gear Mechanism #20
Chapter 2. Velocity and Acceleration in Mechanism 35 — 62
 Concept of Absolute and Relativer Velocity #35
 Velocity (Motion) of a Link #35
 Angular Velocity of Links #36
 Relation Between Linear velocity and angular velocity #37
 Relation Between Angular Acceleration & Linear Acceleration #38
 Velocity in Slider Crank Mechanism #39
 Acceleration in the Slider (Rank Mechanism) #40
 Klein’s Construction #41
 Slider-Crank Mechanism #41
 Acceleration of the Mid Point of the Connecting Rod #44
 Angular Velocity of Connecting Rod #45
 Angular Acceleration of the Connecting Rod #45
Chapter 3. Cam and Follower 63 — 90
 Introduction #63
 According to Follower Movement #65
 According to Constraint Manner of the Foolower #66
 Types of Follower #66
 According to Movement of the Follower #69
 According to Path of Movement of the Follower #69
 Definitions and Terms of radial cam #69
 Motion of the Follower #70
Chapter 4. Power Transmission 91 — 130
 Types of Belt Drives #91
 Types of Belts #92
 Material used for belts and ropes #93
 Types of Flat Belt Drives #93
 Velocity Ratio #94
 SLIP #95
 Creep of belt #96
 Length of an open belt drive #96
 Length of a Cross Belt Drive #97
 Ratio of tensions in flat belt drive #97
 Power transmitted by a belt #99
 Maximum Tension in the belt #100
 Initial tension #100
 Chain Drive #100
 Advantage and Disadvantage of Chain Drive #101
 Classification of Chains #101
 Lubrication of Chain #101
 Gear drives #101
 Gear Terminology #102
 Material of gear #104
 Types of Gears #104
 According to Peripheral Velocit of Geers #106
 According to Types of Gearing #107
 Gear Train #108
 Law of gearing #111
 Rope drive #112
Chapter 5. Flywheel and Governors 131 — 154
 Iintroduction #131
 Turning Moment Diagram #131
 Turning Moment Diagram for a 4-Stroke Cyle Internal
Combustion Engine (Single Cylinder) #132
 Turning Moment Diagram for a Multi-Cylinder Engine #133
 Coefficient of fluctuation ofo energy #133
 Coefficient of Fluction of Speed #134
 Energy stored in a flywheel #135
 Types of Flywheel #135
 Governor #136
 Centrifugal Governor #137
 Inertia Governor #137
 Comparison between Flywheel and Governor #138
 Terminology of Governor #138
 Watt Governor #139
 Porter Governor #140
 Proell Governor #143
Chapter 6. Brackes, Dynamometers, Clutches and Bearings 155 — 204
 Dynamometer #155
 Types of Brakes #155
 Types of Mechanical Brakes #155
 Pivoted Block Shoe Brake #159
 Disc Brake #167
 Advantage of Disc Brake #168
 Disadvantage of Disc Brake #168
 Dynamometers #168
 Rope Brake dynamometers #168
 Hydraulic Dynamometer #170
 Eddy-Current Dynamometers #171
 Friction Clutches #171
 Diaphragm Clutch #181
 Bearing #182
 Simple Pivot Bearing #183
 Conical pivot bearing #185
 Flat Collar Bearing #186
Chapter 7. Balancing and Vibrations 205 — 216
 Static Balancing #205
 Dynamic Balancing #205
 Balancing of a single rotating mass by a single mass which is
rotatin in some plane #206
 Balancing of several masses rotating in same plane #206
 Vibrations #211
Previous Year Solved Papers and Model Paper 217 — 333
 2013 (Even) #217
 2012 (Even) #231
 2011 (Even) #242
 2010 (Even) #258
 2010 (A) #272
 2009 (A) #287
 2005 (A) #299
 2003 (A) #313
 Model Paper
Fundamental and Types of Mechanisms 9
Fundamentals and
Types of Mechanisms
1
INTRODUCTION
Definition: Theory of Machine (TOM) may be defined as that branch of Engineering Science,
which deals with the study of relative motion between the various parts of a machine, and forces
which act on them.
The knowledge of Theory of Machine is very essential for an engineer in designing the various
parts of a machine.
Machine: In brief, machine is defined as, it is a device which receives energy in some
available form and utilises it to do some particular type of work:
Classification of Theory of Machine:
1. Kinematics 2. Dynamics
3. Kinetics 4. Statics
1. Kinematics: It deals with the relative motions of different parts of a mechanics without
taking in to consideration the forces producing the motion. Thus, it is the study, from a
geometric point of view, to know the displacement, velocity and acceleration of a part
of mechanism.
2. Dynamics: It involves the calculation of forces impressed upon different parts of a
mechanism. The forces can be either static or dynamic. Dynamics is further subdivided
in to kinetics and statics.
3. Kinetics: It is the study of forces when the body is in motion.
4. Statics: It is the study of forces when the body is stationary.
Mechanism: A combination of a number of bodies assembled in such a way that the motion
of one causes constrained and predictable motion to the others is known as a mechanism. Thus, the
function of a mechanism is to transmit and modify a motion.
10 THEORY OF MACHINES AND MECHANISMS
Structure: It is an assemblage of a number of resisant bodies (known as members) having no

relative motion between them and meant for carrying loads having straining action. A railway bridge,
a roof truss, machine frames etc., are the example of a sructure.
Difference between a Machine and a Structure: The following differences between a
machine and a structure are imortant from the subject point of view:
1. The parts of a machine move relative to one another, whereas the members of a strucure
do not move relaive to one another.
2. A machine transforms the available energy to one another.
3. The links of a machine may transmi both power and motion, while the members of a
structure transmit forces only.
Kinematic Link (Element): Each part of a machine, which moves relative to some other
part, is known as kinematic link.
For example: In a reciprocating steam engine Piston, piston Rod and Crosshead constitute one
link; connecting rod with big and small end bearing constitute a second link; Crank, Crankshaft and
flywheel a third link and the cylinder, engine frame and main bearing a fourth link.
A link need not to be a rigid body, but it must be a resistance body.
Rigid Body: A body is said to be rigid if under the action of forces. it does not suffer any
distortion or the distance between any two points on it remains constant.
Resistant Body: Resistant body are those whih are rigid for the purpose they have to serve.
Types of Link
1. Rigid Link: A rigid link is one which does not undergo any deformation while transmitting
motion.
2. Flexible Link: A flexible link is one which is partly deformed in a manner not to affect
the transmission of motion.
3. Fluid Link: A fluid link is one which is formed by having a fluid in a receptacle and the
motion is transmitted through the fluid by pressure or compresion only.
Types of Constrained Motion:
There are three type of constrained motion.
1. Completely Constrained Motion
2. Incompletely Constrained Motion
3. Successfully Constrained Motion
1. Completely Constrained Motion: When the motion between two elements of a pair
is in a definite direction irrespective of the direction of the force applied, it is known as
completely constrained motion.
Ex: Piston and cylinder moition
Square Hole Square Bar

Square bar in a square hole
2. Incompletely Constrained Motion: When the motion between two elements of a

pair is possible in more than one direction and depends upon the direction of the force
applied, it is known as incompletely constrained motion.
Round Hole
Shaft
Shaft in a circular shaft
Example: Figure shown is an example of an incompletely constrained motion as it may

either rotate or slide in a hole. These both motions have no relationship with the other.
3. Successfully Constrained Motion: When the motion between two elements of a
pair is possible in more than one direction but is made to have motion only in one
direction by using some external means, it is successfully constrained motion.
load
Footstep Bearig
A shaft in a footstep bearing may have vertical motion apart from rotary motion. But
due to load applied on a shaft it is constrained to move in that direction and thus is a
successfully constrained motion.
Kinematic Pair: The two link or elements of a machine, when in contact with each other are
said to form a pair. If the relative motion between them in completely or successfully constrained,
the pair is known as kinematic pair.
Types of kinematic pair: Kinematic pairs can be classified according to
1. Nature to contact
2. Naure of mechanical constraint
3. Nature of relative motion
KINEMATIC PAIR ACCORDING TO NATURE OF CONTACT AS

(a) Lower Pair: A pair of link having surface or area contact between the members is
known as a lower pair.
Example- Nut turning on a screw, shaft rotating in a bearing, all pairs of a slider-crank
mechanism, universal joint, etc.
(b) Higher Pair: When a pair has a point or line contact between the links, it is known as
higher pair.
Example- Cam and follower pair, tooth gears, wheel rolling on surface, ball and bearing etc.
KINEMATIC PAIR ACCORDING TO NATURE OF MECHANICAL CONSTRAINT

(a) Closed Pair: When the element of a pair are held together mechanically, it is known as
closed pair. The contact between two can be broken only by destruction of at least one
of the members.
Follower
CAM
(b) Unclosed Pair: When two links of a pair are in contact either due to force of gravity or
some spring action, they constitute an unclosed pair. In this the links are not held together
mechanically.
Follower
Cam
KINEMATIC PAIRS ACCORDING TO NATURE OF RELATIVE MOTION

(a) Sliding Pair: If two links have a sliding moting relative to each other, they form a
sliding pair. Example: A rectangular rod in a rectangular hole.
(b) Turning Pair: When one link has a turning or revolving motion relative to the other,
they constitute a turning or revolving pair. Example: Cycle wheel turning over their
axles, lathe spindle supported in head stock.
(c) Rolling Pair: When the links of a pair have a rolling motion relative to each other, they
form a rolling pair. Example: Ball and bearing, a rolling wheel on a flat surface.
(d) Screw Pair: If two making links have a turning as well as sliding motion between them,
they form a screw pair.
(e) Spherical Pair: When one link in the form of a sphere turns inside a fixed link, it is
spherical pair. Example: The ball and socket joint is a spherical pair.
Kinematic Chain
When the kinematic pairs are arranged in such a way that the last link is joined to the first link
to transmit completely or successfully constrained motion, it is called kinematic chain.
In case the motion of a link or pair results in indefinite motion of other link, then the relation
between the numbers of pair (P) forming a kinematic chain and the number of links (l).
The, l  2P  4
And if numbers of joint be (j) then
3
j l 2
2
 Degees of freedom/mobility of a mechanism: It is the number o inputs (number of

independent coordinates) required to describe the configuration or position of all the
links of the mechanism, with respect to the fixed link at any given instant.
 Grubler’s equation: Number of degees of freedom of a mechanism is given by
n = 3 (l – 1) – 2j – h
Where, n = total degrees of freedom in the mechanism
l = number of links (including the frame)
j = number of equivalent binary joints
h = number of higher pairs (two degrees of freedom)
Grashof’s law for a four bar mechanism
 The Grasof’s condition for a four-bar linkage states that “If the sum of the shortest and
longest link of a planar four bar linkage is less than or equal to the sum of the remaining
two links, then the shortest link can rotate fully with respect to a neighbouring link.
 Condiiton S+LP+Q
where S is the shortest link, L is the longest, and P and Q are the other links.
s
p l
p l
s s p
q q q
Crank-rocker Double-rocker Parallelogram linkage

s+l<p+q s+l>p+q s+l=p+q
(continuous motion) (no continuous motion) (continuous motion)
Types of joints in a Chain
The following types of joints are usually found in a chain:

1. Binary Joint, 2. Ternary Joint, 3. Quaternary Joint
1. Binary Joint: When two links are joined at the same connection, the joint is known as
binary joint.
L1 L2
ref. 2
First order pin joint - one DOF (two links joined)
Ternary joint
 When three links are joined at the same connection, the joint is known as ternary joint.
 It is equivalent to two binary joints as one of the three links joined carry the pin for the
other two links.
L3
3
L2
L1
2
Second order pin joint - one DOF (three links joined)
Quaternary joint:
 When four links are joined at the same connection, the joint is called a quaternary joint.
 It is equivalent to three binary joints.
 In general, when l number of links are joined at the same connection, the joint is equivalent
to (l – 1) binary joints.
T
T
T
Quaternary joint
B T Q B
T T
INVERSION OF FOUR BAR CHAIN

1. Beam Engine (Crank and Lever Mechanism)
It consists of four link. In this mechanism, when the crank rotates about the fixed centre A,
the lever oscillates about a fixed centre D.
Lever (Link 4)
E
D
Piston C
Rod Link 3
Cylinder
A
B
Link 1
Crank (Link 2)
Beam Engine
2. Coupling Rod of a Locomotive (Double Crank Mechanism)
Coupling rod consists of four links, the concept of mechanism as the link DC and AB acts as
cranks and connected to respective wheels. The link BC acts as a couplin g rod and the link AB is
fixed in order to maintain a constant centre to centre distance between them.
Wheels
Link 4
Link 3
C B Link 2
D Link 1 A
Coupling Rod of Locomotive
3. Watt’s Indicator Mechanism (Double Lever Mechanism)
Walt’s Indicator mechanism also consist of four link, A is fixed link, link AC, link CE and link
BFD. Link BF and FD form one link because these two parts have no relative motion between them.
Link 2 C
B D
Link 3
Link 1
A E
F
Link 4
Single Slider Crank Chain:
Guides Connecting Rod

(Link 3) Crank
(Link 2)
Piston
Rod
Frame
(Link 1)
Cylinder
Piston Cross-head
(Link 4)
Single Slider Crank Chain

A single slider crank chain is an advance form of basic four bar chain. It consists of one sliding
pair and three turning pairs. It is generally found in reciprocating steam engine mechanism.
In a single slider crank chain, the link 1 and 2, link 2 and 3, and links 3 and 4 form three turning
pairs and the links 4 and 1 form a sliding pair.
Inversion of Slider-Crank Mechanism:
Different mechanism obtained by fixing differernt links of a kinematic chain are known as its
inversion.
1. First Inversion
This inversion is obtained when link 1 is fixed and link 2 and 4 are made the crank and the
slider respectively.
Application:
1. Reciprocating Engine
2. Reciprocating Compressor
2
3
4
1
1
2. Second Inversion (Link 2 is fixed [Crank])
The second inversion is obntained when the link 2 (crank) is fixed and after that the mechanism
obtained is a kind of second type.
4
4
B
3
3 B
A C 1
A
2 1 2
6
B
B C O C
O (a) 5
C
B
(b)
When the link 2 is fixed instead of the link 1, the link 3 along with the slider at its end B becomes
a crank. This makes the link 1 to rotate about O along with the slider which also reciprocates on it.
Application:
1. Whitworth quick-return Mechanism
2. Rotary Engine
Whitworth Quick-Return Mechanism
It is a mechanism used in workshop to cut metal. The forward stoke takes a little longer and
cuts the metal whereas the return stoke is idle and take a shorter period.
Slider 4 rotates in a circle about A and slides on the link (fig (b)). C is a point on the link 1
extended backward where the link 5 is pivoted. The other end of the link 5 is pivoted to the tool, the
forward stroke of which cuts the metal. The axis of motion of the slider 6 passes through O and is
perpendicular to OA, the fixed link. The crank 3 rotates in the counter-clockwise direction.
Connecting Cutting Stroke
P
Rod Return Stroke
Ram
A2 P1 D P2 A1 Tool
R1 R R2
Slotted Line of Stroke
Bar
(Link 1)
Fixed
(Link 2)
Slider Drinking Time of cutting stroke   360  
(Link 4) Crank   
(Link 3) Time of reurn stroke  360   
A
Rotary Engine
3 4
2
D
In old day, rotary engine were used in aviation. But now a days gas turbine are used in its
place. It consists of seven cylinder in one plane and all revolves about fixed centre D.
3. Third Inversion - Link 3 is Fixed (Connecting Rod)
By fixing the link 3 of the slider crank mechanism, the the third inversion is obtained. Now the
link 2 again acts as a crank and the link 4 oscillates.
3
2
4
O
1
B
Application:
1. Oscillating Cylinder Engine
2. Crank and Slotted-lever Mechanism
4. Fourth Inversion - Link 4 is Fixed (Slider)
If the link 4 of the slider-crank mechanism is fixed, the fourth inversion is obtained. Link 3 can
oscillate about the fixed pivot B on the link 4. This makes the end A of the link 2 to oscillate about B
and the end O to resciprocate along the axis of the fixed link 4.
B 4
Application:
Hand Pump
Inversion of Double Slider Crank Mechanism:
1. First Inversion - link 1 is fixed. Elliptical trammel.

2. Second Inversion - slider 2 is fixed. Scotch yoke mechanism.
3. Third Inversion - link 3 is fixed. Oldham coupling.
Ackerman Steering Gear Mechanism:
In Ackerman steering gear, the mechanism ABCD is a four bar crank chain, shown in fig. The
shorter link BC and AD are of equal length and are connected by hinge joints with front wheel axles.
The longer links AB and CD are of unequal length. The following are the only three position for
correct steering.
a. When the vehicles moves along a straight path, the longer link AB and CD are parallel
and the shorter link BC and AD are equally inclined to the longitudinal axis of the
vehicle, as shown by firm lines.
b. When the vehicle is steering to the left, the position of the gear is shown by dotted lines
in figure. In this position, the lines of the front wheel axle intersect on the back wheel
axle at I. For correct steering.
c. When the vehicle is steering to the right, the similar position may be obtained.
Left Turn
B A
P
 C 
 C D D

I Back Axle
Ackerman Steering Gear

EXERCISE
1. For the kinematic linkages shown in figure, calculate the following:
 the number of binary links (Nb)
 the number of ternary links (Nt)
 the number of other (quaternary, etc.) links (No )
 the number of total links (N)
 the number of loops (L)
 the number of joints or pairs (P1)
 the number of degrees of freedom (F)
6 5
6
4 3
8
5 3 2
4
7
8
7
2
1 1 1
1
(a) (b)
4
7 6
8
10
9
11 2
5
1 1
(c)
Sol. (a) Nb = 4; Nt = 4; No = 0; N = 8; L = 4
P1 = 11 by counting
or, P1 = (N + L – 1) = 11
F = 3(N – 1) – 2P1
= 3 (8 – 1) – 2 × 11 = –1
or, F = N – (2L + 1)
= 8 – (2 × 4 + 1) = – 1
The linkage has negative degree of freedom and thus is a superstructure.
(b) Nb = 4; Nt = 4; No = 0; N = 8; L = 3
P1 = 10 (by counting)
or, P1 = (N + L – 1) = 10
F = N – (2L + 1) = 8 – (2 × 3 + 1) = 1
or, F = 3 (N – 1) – 2P1
= 3(8 – 1) – 2 × 10 = 1
i.e., the linkage has a constrained motion when one of the seven moving links is
driven by an external source.
(c) Nb = 7; Nt = 2; No = 2; N = 11
L = 5; P1 = 15
F = N – (2L + 1) = 11 – (2 × 5 + 1) = 0
Therefore, the linkage is a structure.
2. State whether the linkages shown in figure are mechanisms with one degree of
freedom. If not, make suitable changes. The number of links should not be varied by
more than 1.
2 7 10
4
11
5 3 6 2
4 3
5
1 8
1 9
1
(a)
1
(b)
7
5
4 2
4
2
3
3
8 5
1
(e)
1
(c) 2
12
1
11
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(d)
Sol. (a) The linkage has 2 hoops and 5 links.

F = N – (2L + 1) = 5 – (2 × 2 + 1) = 0
Thus, it is a structure. Referring table, for a 2-loop mechanism, n should be six to
have one degree of freedom. Thus, one more link should be added to the linkage to
make it a mechanism of F = 1. One of the possible solution has been shown in
figure.
5 8
2
5 7
3 2
4 9
4 3
6
6
10
1 1 1
1
(a) 5 (b)
4
3
6
2
7
8
1
(b) The linkage has 4 loops and 11 links. Referring table, it has 2 degrees of freedom.
With 4 loops and 1 degree of freedom, the number of links should be 10 and the
number of joints 13. Three excess joints can be formed by
6 ternary links or
4 ternary links and 1 quanternary link or
2 ternary links, and 2 quanternary links, or
a combination of ternary and quanternary links with double joints.
Figure shows one of the possible solution.
(c) There are 4 loops and 8 links.
F = N – (2L +) = 8 – (4 × 2 + 1) = – 1
It is a superstructure. With 4 loops, the number of links must be 10 to obtain one
degree of freedom. As the number of links is not to be increased by more than one,
the number of loops has to be decreased. With 3 loops, 8 links and 10 joints, the
required linkage can be designed. One of the many solution is shown in figure.
(d) It has 5 loops and 12 links. Referring table, it has 1 degree of freedom and thus is a
mechanism.
(e) The mechanism has a cam pair, therefore, its degree of freedom must be found
from Gruebler’s criterion.
Total number of links = 5
Number of pairs with 1 degree of freedom = 5
Number of pairs with 2 degrees of freedom = 1
F = 3(N – 1) – 2P1 – P2
= 3(5 – 1) – 2 × 5 – 1 = 1
Thus, it is a mechanism with one degree of freedom.
3. Find all the inversion of the chain given in the figure.
12mm
10mm
3mm
8mm
Sol. (a) Length of the longest link = 12 mm

Length of the shortest link = 3 mm
Length of other links = 10mm and 8 mm
Since, 12 + 3 < 10 + 8; it belongs to the class-I mechanism and according to Grashoff’s
law, three distinct inversions are possible.
Shortest link fixed, i.e., when the link with 3-mm length is fixed, the chain will act as
double-crank mechanism in which links with lengths of 12 mm and 8 mm will have
complete revolutions.
Link opposite to the shortest link fixed, i.e., when the link with 10-mm length is
fixed, the chain will act as double-rocker mechanism in which links with lengths of
12mm and 8mm will oscillate.
Link adjacent to the shortest link fixed, i.e., when any of the links adjacent to the
shortest link, i.e., link, i.e., link with a length of 12-m or 8 mm is fixed, the chain will
act as crank-rocker mechanism in which the shortest link of 3-mm length will revolve
and the link with 10-mm length will oscillate.
4. Given figure shows some four-link mechanisms in which the figures indicate the
dimensions in standard units of length. Indicate the type of each mechanism whether
crank-rocker or double-crank or double-rocker.
9 7
9
10 10
7 7
7
6
4
4
5 8
9
(a) (b) (c) (d)
Sol. (a) Length of the longest link = 9

Length of the shortest link = 5
Length of other links = 7 and 6
Since, 9 + 5 > 7 + 6; it does not belongs to the class-I mechanism. Therefore, it is a
double-rocker mechanism.
(b) Length of the longest link = 9

Since, 9 + 4 < 7 + 7; it does not belongs to the class-I mechanism. In this case as the
shortest link is fixed, it is a double-crank mechanism.
(c) Length of the longest link = 10
Since, 10 + 5 < 9 + 7; it belongs to the class-I mechanism. In this case as the link
opposite to the shortest link is fixed, it is a double-rocker mechanism.
(d) Length of the longest link = 10
Since, 10 + 4 < 8 + 7; it belongs to the class-I mechanism. In this case as the link
adjacent to the shortest link is fixed, it is a crank-rocker mechanism.
5. Shows a plane mechanism in which the fiures indicate the dimensions in standard
unit os length. The slider C is the driver. Will the link AG revolve or oscillate?
D
B
10
8
10 6
F
E 6
C 2 A
4
6 8
Sol. The mechanism has three sub-chains:

(i) ABC, a slider-crank chain
(ii) ABDE, a four-bar chain
(iii) AEFG, a four-bar chain
DEF is a locked chain as it has only three links.
 As the length BC is more than the length AB plus the offset of 2 units, AB acts as a
crank and can revolve about A.
 In the chain ABDE,

Length of the longest link = 8
Since, 8 + 4 < 8 + 6; it belongs to the class-I mechanism. In this case as the shortest link
is fixed, it is a double-crank mechanism and thus AB and ED can revolve fully.
 In the chain AEFG,
Length of the longest link = 8
Since, 8 + 4 = 6 + 6; it belongs to the class-I mechanism. As the shortest link is fixed, it
is a double-crank mechanism and thus EF and AG can revolve fully.
As DEF is a locked chain with three links, the link EF revolves with the revolving of
ED. With the revolving of ED, AG also revolves.
6. Figure shows the layout of a quick return mechanism of the oscillating link type, for
a special purpose machine. The driving crank BC is 30mm long and time ratio of the
working stroke to the return stroke is to be 1.7. If the length of the working stroke
of R is 120 mm, determine the dimensions of AC and AP.
Sol. Given : BC = 30 mm; R1R2 = 120 mm; Time ratio of working stroke to the return stroke = 1.7
P
R P2
P1
Q
R1 R2
Line of stroke
B C
C B1  B2
 
 90  
 2
A A
We know that
Time of working stroke 360   360  

 or 1.7 
Time of return stroke  
  = 133.3° or /2 = 66.65°

The extreme positions of the crank are shown in figure. From right angled triangle AB1C. we
find that
BC
1 1BC BC
sin (90° – /2) = AC or AC  sin(90   / 2)  cos  / 2 ...( B1C = BC)
120 = 2AP cos 66.65° = 0.7926 AP

 AP = 120/0.7926 = 151.4 mm
7. A crank and slotted lever mechanism used in a shaper has a centre distance 300 mm
between the centre of oscillation of the slotted lever and the centre of rotatio nof the
crank. The radius of the crank is 120mm. Find the ratio of the time of cutting to the
time of return stroke.
Sol. Given : AC = 300 mm; CB1 = 120 mm
The extreme position of the crank are shown in figure. We know that
sin CAB1 = sin (90° – /2)
C
CB1 120
=   0.4 
AC 300 B1 B2
2
 CAB1 = 90° – /2
= sin–1 0.4 = 23.6°
or, /2 = 90° – 23.6° = 66.4°
or, we know that  
 90  2 
 
Time of cutting stroke 360   360  132.8
   1.72
Time of return stroke  132.8
8. Two shafts have their axes parallel and 2.5 cm apart. One of the shaft drives the
other through an Oldham’s coupling. If the speed of the shaft is 100 r.p.m. what is
the maximum velocity of sliding in cm per minute of the intermediate disc on either
of the side discs?
Sol. Given, The distance between the axes, x = 2.5cm
Speed of the shaft, N = 100 r.p.m.
N
 Angular speed of the shaft, =
60
2 100
or, = = 10.47 rad/sec.
60
Now, maximum velocity of sliding.
 =  × x/s
or,  = 10.47 × 2.5 cm/sec
or,  = 26.18 cm/sec
or,  = 26.18 × 60 = 1570 cm/min,
Hence, maximum velocity of sliding  = 1570 cm/min.
9. The distance between two parallel shafts is 18 mm and they are connected by an
Oldham’s coupling. The driving shaft revolves at 160 rpm. What will be the maximum
speed of sliding of the tongue of the intermediate piece along its groove?
Sol. Given, Distance between parallel shafts,
x = 18 mm = 0.018 m
Speed of the shaft, N = 160 rpm
2N
 Angular speed of the shaft, =
60
2 160
or, = = 16.76 rad/sec.
60
Now, maximum velocity of sliding;  =  × x
  = 16.76 × 0.18 = 0.302 m/s
Hence, maximum velocity of sliding,  = 0.302 m/s
9. A Hook’s joints connects a shaft running at a uniform speed of 1000 rpm to a second
shaft. The angle between their axes being 15 degres. Find, the velocity and
acceleration of the driven shaft at an instant, when the fork of the driving shaft has
turned through an angle of 10° from the plane containing the shaft axes.
Sol. Given, Speed, N1 = 1000 rpm
2N1
 Angular speed, 1 =
60
2 1000
or, 1 = = 104.72 rad/s
60
Now;  = 15° and  = 10°
We know that;
The velocity of the driven shaft is given by;
1  cos 
2 =
1  cos 2   sin 2 
or, 2 = 108.18 rad/s
60  2 60  108 18
Also, N2 =  = 1033 rpm
2 2
N2 = 1033 rpm
12  cos   sin 2   sin 2

Now, angular acceleration, =
(1  cos 2  sin 2  )2
(104.72)2  cos15 sin 2 15 sin 20

or, Angular acceleration =
(1  cos 2 10 sin 2 15)
Hence, angular acceleration = 277.58
10. The distance between the two parallel shafts connected by Oldham’s Coupling is
25mm. the speed of the driving shaft is 250 rpm. Find the maximum speed of sliding
of the tongue of the intermediate piec in the slot in the flange.
2 N
Sol. Angular speed of the shaft, =
60
where, N is the number of revolutions per minute
and,  is the angular velocity of shafts in radians/sec.
Maximum speed of sliding, =d·
where,  is the velocity of sliding, d is the distance between the axes of parallel shafts.
 is the angular velocity of the driving or the driven shaft.
therefore,  = 25 × 26.18
= 654.5 mm/sec = 0.6545 m/sec.
11. A four bar linkage has the following dimensions O 1O2 = 50mm, (distance between
fixed centres of rotation) O1A = 62mm, AB = 37 mm, O2B = 68mm, O1 and O2 are
fixed centres of rotation.
Determine the type of four bar by Grahoff’s criterion.
If the link AB is crank, discuss the Grashoff’s criterion.
If the link AB is fixed, discuss the Grashoof’s criterion.
Sol. Figure is drawn to scale for the problem.
O1O2 = p = 50mm, O1A = q = 62mm
AB = s = 37mm (shortest link)
O2B = l = 68mm (longest link)

And s + l = 37 + 68 = 105 mm; p + q = 50 + 62 = 112 mm. Therefore, s + l < p + q and also the
link opposite to the shortest link is fixed. Thus by Grashoff’s criterion it is a double rocker four
bar mechanism.
37mm B
A
62 mm
O1 O2
50mm
If AB is the crank, the possibilities of fixed links are either BO2 or AO1 i.e., the links adjacent
to the crank. This by Grashoff’s criterion gives crank rocker mechanism.
If AB is a fixed link, i.e., if the shortest link is fixed, it gives double crank mechanism (Drag
link quick return mechanism).
12. Figure shows a plane mechanism with link lengths given in some units. If slider A is
driver, will the link CG revolve or oscillate. Justify the answer.
Sol. The mechanism shown in figure comprises three sub-chains.
B
5
4
3
4.5
2 3
F
1 C D
A
4
(i) A four bar chain CBED in which the shortest link length s = CD = 2 units, and longest
link length = l = BE = 4 units. Thus s + l < sum of the other two lengths i.e., 2 + 4 < 3 +
4. It is a Grashoff’s chain. And the shortest link CD is fixed. Therefore it is a double
crank mechanism. (Drag link quick return mechanism).
(ii) The second sub-chain CDFG is agian a four bar chain with shortest link s = CD = 2
units, and longest link l = FG = 4 units and s + l = 2 + 4 = sum of other links 3 + 3.
Hence this sub-chain satisfied Grashoof’s chain and as shortest link is fixed, this represents
a double crank mechanism. But there would be difficulties of dead centres or changee
points.
Also link DE, EF and DF comprise a three link loop and hence it is a structure and not
a kinematic chain.
(iii) The third sub-chain is the slider-crank chain ABC. Since length AB = 4.5 units > length.
BC (3 units) + off-set 1 unit, the crank CB can revolve fully.
Thus, CDEB and CDFG are both double crank mechanisms, and link BG can have full
revolution when motion is given to slider A.
13. A six links chain shown in figure has 5 binary joints, 1 ternary joint. Prove that it is
constrained kinematic chain.
Sol. The number of joints is, therefore, equal to 7 binary joints. Therefore, J = 7, L = 6 and H = 0
becuase there is not higher pair. Thus we have
2
4
1 3
J+ H= L–2
2 4
3
Therefore, 7+0= ×6–2
4
7=7
Thus, lest-hand side = right-hand side.
Therefore, the chain is constrained and it is a kinematic chain.
14. A kinematic mechanism is to be designed for two degrees of freedom so that two
inputs could be incorporated to determine the relative position of all links. Assume
all the pairs that allow one relative degreee of freedom. Determine:
(a) the minimum number of binary links for the mechanism.
(b) if the minimum number mechanism is not workable what is the fewest
number n the next complicated mechanism.
Sol. (a) By Grubler’s Equation F = 3 (n – 1) – 2f1
And for binary links f1 = n
Thereforece, F = 3(n – 1) – 2n = 2 or n=5
(b) If mechanism with minimum number of binary links does not work, add a group of
2
links with zero degree of freedom. Thus F = 3n – 2f1 = 0, then n = f . But n and
3 1
f1 have to be integers. Therefore, nmain = 2 and f1(min) = 3. Thus total of 5 + 2 = 7
links are the fewest number in the next complicated linkage. It may be concluded
that next higher would have 9 links.
15. Determine if it is possible to have two degree freedom mechanism with 10 links and
all lower pair sof one degree freedom. (a) What is the nearest number of links and
pairs possible, (b) Determine the maximum number of elements that can occur on
one link, (c) determine the number of links which can have the maximum number of
elements.
Sol. With all lower pairs of one degree freedom, Gruebler’s equation is given by F = 3(n – 1) – 2f1
1 1 1
or f1 = [3 (n – 1) – F] = [3(10 – 1) – 2] = 12
2 2 2
And it is not possible being fraciton.
1
(a) Nearest number of links possible is n = 9 and then f1 = [3(9 – 1) – 2] = 111
2
(b) n – f1 = 11 – 9 = 2 and original number of elements of binary link = 2. Therefore
maximum number = 2 + 2 = 4
(c) 11 pairs have 22 elements. If n2 is the number of links with 2 elements and n4 is
thenumber of links with four elements, we have
n2 + n4 = 9 ...(i)
and 2n2 + 4n4 = 22 ...(ii)
or, 4n4 + 2(9 – n4) = 22 or 2n4 = 4 i.e., n4 = 2
Velocity & Acceleration in Mechanism 35
Velocity and
Acceleration in Mechanism
2
CONCEPT OF ABSOLUTE AND RELATIVE VELOCITY

As the Earth is moving, so no any motion is consider as a absolute motion. But if the earth is
taken to be a fixed reference plane and all motion relative to it are termed absolute motion.
If a vehicle (Bus, Train) moves in a particular direction, the motion of the vehicle is referred as
the absolute motion of the train or Bus or motion of the vehicle relative to th earth. Now suppose a
man moves inside a vehicle. Then, the motion of the man will be described as absolute or relative to
earth.
VELOCITY (MOTION) OF A LINK
A
Vao A A
B
r r


b
a O
O
O
(a) (b) (c)
Let a rigid link OA of length r, rotate about a fixed point O with a uniform angular veloocity 
rod’s in the counter clockwise direction.
OA turns through a small angle so in a small interval time. Then A will travel along the arc AA
as shown in figure.
ArcAA
Velocity of A relativre to O =
t
r
or, Vao =
t
when, t  0
d
Va0 = r  r
dt
The direction of Vao is along the displacement of A. Also, t approaches zero (t  0), AA
will be perpendicular to OA. Thus, velocity of A is wr and is perpendicular to OA. This can be
represented by a vector oa (fig c). The fact that the direction of the velocity vector is perpendicicular
to the link also emerges from the fact that A can neither approach nor recede from O and thus the
only possible motion of A relative to O is in a direction perpendicular to OA.
Consider a point B on the link OA.
Velocity B = , OB perpendicular to OB.
If ob represents the velocity of B, it can be observed that
ob OB OB
 
oa OA OA
i.e., b divides the velocity vector in the same ratio as B divides the link. Always remember,
the velocity vector Vao represents the velocity of a at a particular instant. At other instants, when the
link OA assumes another position, the velocity vector will have their directions changed accordingly.
Also the magnitude of the instantaneous linear velocity of a point on a rotating body is proportional
to its distance from the axis of rotation.
Angular Velocity of Links
C
B E vcd c
a, b
 e
vba
A D b
1. Angular velocity of BC.

(a) Velocity of C relative to B, Vcb = bc

Point C relative to B moves in the direction sense given by Vcb (upward). Thus C
moves in counter clockwise direction about B.
Vcb = cb × BC = cb × CB
Vcb
cb =
CB
(b) Velocity of B relative to C,
B relative to C moves in a directon-sense iven by Vbc. (Opposite to bc)
Vbc
bc =
BC
It can be seen that the magnitude of cb = bc as Vcb = Vbc and the direction of
rotation is the same. Therefore, angular velocity of a link about one extremity is the
same as the angular velocity about the other.
2. Angular velocity of CD.
Velocity of C relative to D.
Vcd = dc
It is seen that C relative to D moves in a direction sense given by Vcd or C moves in the
clockwise direction about D.
Vcd
cd =
CD
RELATION BETWEEN LINEAR VELOCITY AND ANGULAR VELOCITY

The rate of change of angular displacement is called the angular velocity of particle. Let d be
the angular displacement made by the particle in time dt, then the angular velocity of the particle is
d
= . Its unit is rad s–1 and dimensional formula is T–1.
dt
Q
P
r
d
A
O
For one complete revolution, the angle swept by the radius vector is 360° or 2 radians. If T
is the time taken for one complete revolution, known as period, then the angular velocity of the
 2
particle is = 
t T
1
If the particle make sn revolutions per second, then  = 2   = 2n
T
1
where n = is the frequency of revolution.
T
Relation: Let us consider a body P is moving along the circumference of a circle of radius r
with linear velocity V and angular velocity w as shown in figure. Let it move from P to Q in time dt
and d be the angle swept by the radius vector.
Let PQ = ds, be the arc length covered by the particle moving along the circle, then the
angualr displacement d is expressed as,
ds
d = . But ds = vdt
r
d u

dt r
Now, ds = vdt
vdt d u
 d = or, 
r dt r
u
i.e., Angular velocity =
r
or v = r
  
In vector notation v   r
RELATION BETWEEN ANGULAR ACCELERATION AND LINEAR ACCELERATION

Linear acceleration: Rate of chang eof linear velocity is known as linear acceleration
dv
a= ...(i)
dt
Angular acceleraton- Rate of change of angular velocity.
d
 ...(ii)
dt
from equation (i) and (ii) we get,
a dv d(r ) d( )
   r ( r is constant)
 d d d
=r.1
 a  r
In vector form,   
a   r
VELOCITY IN SLIDER CRANK MECHANISM
vB = r
B b
E 
vB e
r E1
vAB
A
vA O O vA a
(a) Slider Crank Mechanism (b) Velocity Diagram A1
Above a slider crank is shown in fig. AB is a connecting rod which is connected to the slider
A. Let the radius of crank OB be r and let it rotates in a clockwise direction, about the point O with
uniform angular velocity w rod/s and such that VB is known in magnitude and direction i.e., the
velocity of B.
Point for determining the velocity of slider A (i.e, VA) by relative velocity method.
1. Take any point O, and draw vector ob parallel to the direction of VB (or tr to OB) such
that ob = VB = .r to some suitable scale.
2. Although AB is a rigid link, therefore the velocity of A relative to B is r to AB. Now
draw a vector ba perpendicular to AB to represent the velocity of A with respect to B
i.e., VAB.
3. From point ‘O’ drawn a vector (oa) parallel to the motion of path of AO (i.e., slider A).
The vector ba and oa intersect at a. Now oa represents the velocity of the slider A. i.e.,
VA to the scale.
The angular velocity of connecting rod AB (AB) may be explained as
VBA ab
AB =  (Anticlock wise about A)
AB AB
ACCELERATION IN THE SLIDER CRANK MECHANISM
vB
B
aA a
E  O

 atAB
A O.D.C aB
aAB
I.D.C E c
O
B b r
aAB X
(a) Slider Crank Mechanism (b) Acceleration Diagram
The above fig. (a) shown the slider crank mechanism. let the crank OB makes an angle 
with the inner dead centre (I.D.C.) and rotates in a clockwise direction about point O with uniform
angular velocity BO rad/s.
 Velocity of B with respect to O.
VBO = VB = BO × OB
U 2BO
Now, centripetal or radial acceleration a rBO  a B  BO
2
 OB 
OB
The acceleration diagram (b) fig. can be draw as point discussed below.
1. At some suitable scale, draw vector ob parallel to BO. So that a rBO  a B
2. From point b, draw vector bx parallel to BA. The vector bx represents the radial
component of the acceleration of A w.r.to B so that (magnitude)
a rBO  VAB
2
/ BA
There will be no tangential component of the acceleration, because the point B moves
with constant angular velocity.
3. Draw vector xa perpendicular to bx from point x. The vector xa represents the
tangential component of the acceleration of a with respect to B. i.e., at atAB
4. Since the point A reciprocates along AO. Therefore the acceleration must be parallel to
velocity. Therefore, from O, draw oa parallel to AO, intersecting the vector xa at a.
Now the acceleration of the piston or the slider A(aA) at atAB may be measured to the
scale.
5. The vector ba represents the total acceleration of A with respect to B. i.e, aAB
ba = bx + xa
The vector ba may also represents the accelraton of the connecting rod AB.
6. The acceleration of any other point on AB such as E may be obtainbed as
a e AE

a b AB
7. The angular acceleration of the connecting rod AB may be obtained by dividing the
tangential component of acceleration of A with respect to B (atAB) to the length of AB.
a tAB
So that, AB = (clockwise about B)
AB
KLEIN’S CONSTRUCTION
In Klein’s construction, the velocity and the acceleration diagrams are made on the configuration
diagram itself.
Slider-Crank Mechanism
b A
E E
B
O
C
In the above figure OAB represents the configuration of a slider-crank mechanism. Let r be
the length of crank OA.
Velocity Diagram: Produce BA and draw a line perpendicular to OB through O. The
intersection of the two lines locate the point b. Fig. OAB is the velocity diagram.
Acceleration Diagram:
Let r represtn fao

 OA = 2r
Construction:
1. Draw a circle with AB as a radius and A as the centre.
2. Draw another circale with AB as diameter.
3. Join the points of intersection C and D of the two circles.
Join AC and BC
AEC and ABC are two right-angle triangles in which the angle CAB is common. Therefore,
the triangles are similar.
AE AC

AC AB
(AC) 2
or, AE =
AB
Thus, this accleration diagram has all the sides parallel to that of acceleration diagram.
Question- In a four bar chain ABCD, AD is fixed and is 150mm long. The crank AB is 40mm
long and rotates at 120 r.p.m. Clockwise, while the link CD = 80 mm oscillates about D. BC and AD
are of equal length. Find the angular velocity of link CD when angle BAD = 60°.
Given data-
120
NBA = 120 r.p.m or WBA = 2 × = (2.568 rod)
60
Length of crank AB = 40 mm = 0.04 m
(Velocity of B with respect to A or velocity of B)
VBA = VB = WBA × AB = 12.568 × 0.04 = 0.503 m/s
150 C a,d vCD

B
c
40 80 vB
vCB
60°
A
D
b
(a) Space Diagram (mm) (b) Velocity Diagram
Draw the space diagram to some suitable scale and draw velocity diagram also from the
space diagram.
1. Since, the link AD is fixed, therefore, points a and d are taken as one point in the
velocity diagram. Draw vector ab perpendicular to BA, to some suitable scale, to
represent the elocity of B with respect to A or simply velocity of B.
(i.e., VBA or VB) such that
vecgtor ab = VBA = VB = 0.503 m/s
2. Now from point b, draw vector be perpendiculat to CB to represent the velocity of C
with repsect to B. (i.e., VCB) and from point d, draw vectr dc perpendicular to CD to
represent the velocity of C with respect to D or simply velocity of C (i.e., VCD or VC).
The vectors bc and dc intersect at C.
By measurement, we find that
VCD = VC = vector dc = 0.385 m/s
we know that CD = 80 mm = 0.08 m
 Angular velocity of link CD,
VCD 0.385
CD =  = 4.8 rad/s (clockwise about D)
CD 0.08
Question- The crank of a slider crank mechanism rotates clockwise at a constant speed of
300 r.p.m. The crank is 150mm and the connecting rod is 600m long, Determine (1) linear velocity
and acceleration of them mid-point of the connecting rod, and (2) angular velocity and angular
acceleration of the connecting rod, at a crank angle of 45° from inner dead centre positino.
300
Given, NBO = 300 r.p.m or BO = 2 × = 31.42 rad/s
60
OB = 150mm = 0.15 m, BA = 600mm = 0.6m
We know that linear velocity of B with respect to O or velocity of B.
VBO = VB = BO × OB = 31.42 × 0.15
= 4.713 m/s (r to BO)
aA a
o
vB aD
b
B
vB
t
aAB
D 150 mm d aB
A
45° vD
I.D.C o o a
vA b r X
aAB
(a) Space Diagram (b) Velocity Diagram (c) Acceleration Diagram
Linear velocity of the mid point of the connecting rod.

i. Draw vector ob r to BO, to some suitable scale.
Vector ob = VBO = VB = 4.713 m/s
ii. From point b, draw vector ba r to BA to represent the velocity of A with respect to B.
i..e, VAB and from point O draw vector OA parallel to the motion of A to represent the
velocity of A i.e., VA. The vectors ba and oa intersect at a.
By measurement we found VAB = vector ba = 3.4 m/s
and velocity of A, VA = vector oa = 4 m/s
iii. In order to find the velocity of the midpoint D of the connecting rod. AB, divide the
vector ba at d in the same ratio as D divides AB, in the space diagram.
bd / ba = BD / BA
iv. Join od, now the vector od repreents the velocity of the mid point D of the connecting
rod. i..e, VD
By measurement we find that VD = vector od = 4.1 m/s.
ACCELERATION OF THE MID POINT OF THE CONNECTING ROD
2
VBO (4.719)2
a rBO  a B    148.1 m / s 2
OB 0.15
2
VBO (3.4)2
and a rAB    19.3 m / s 2
BA 0.6
Construction of acceleration diagram:
1. Draw vector ob parallel to BO, to some suitable scale, to represent the radial component
of the acceleration of B with respect to O or simply acceleration of B.
r 2
i.e., vector ob = a BO  a B  148.1 m / s
2. The acceleration of A with respect to B has the following two components.
a. The radial component of the acceleraton of A with respect to B i..e, a rAB
t
b. The tangential component of the acceleration of A with respect B. i.e., a AB .
These two are mutually perpendicular.
Therefore from point b draw vector bx parallel to AB to represent a rAB = 19.3 m/s2 and
from point x draw vector xa perpendicular to vector bx whose magnitude is yet
unknown.
3. Now from o, draw vector oa parallel to the path of motion of A to represent the
acceelration of A. i.e., aA. The vector xa and oa intersect at a. Join ab.
4. In order to find the acceleration of the mid point D of the connecting rod AB, divide the
vector ab at d in the same ratio as D divides AB.
bd BD
So, 
ba  BA
5. Join od. The vector od represents the acceleraton of mid point D of the connecting
rod i.e., aD.
aD = vector od = 117 m/s2
Angular Velocity of Connecting Rod
VAB 3.4
AB =  = 5.67 rad/s2 (Anticlockwise about B)
BA 0.6
Angular Acceleration of the Connecting Rod
As we have found a tAB  103 m/s2
t
a AB 103
so,  AB    171.67 rad/s2 (Clockwise about B)
BA 0.6
EXERCISE
1. In a slider-crank mechanism, the crank is 480 mm long and rotats at 20 rod/s in the
counter-clockwise direction. The length of the connecting rod is 1.6 m. When the
crank turns 60° from the inner-dead centre, determine the
(i) Velocity of the slider
(ii) Velocity of a point E located at a distance 450 mm on the connecting rod
extended.
E
A
O B
60°
(a)
b o, g
(b)
(iii) position and velocity of a point F on the connecting rod having the least absolute
velocity.
(iv) angular velocity of the connecting rod.
(v) velocity of rubbing at the pins of the crankshaft, crank and the cross-head
having diameter 80, 60 and 100 mm respectively.
Sol. Figure (a) shows the configuration diagram to a convenient scale.
vao = ao × OA = 20 × 0.48 = 9.6 m/s
the vector equation is vbo = vba + vao
or, vbg = vba + vao
or, vbg = vao + vba

or, gb = oa + ab
Take the vector vao to a convenient scale in the proper direction and sence.
vba is  AB, draw a line  AB through a;
The slider B has a linear motion relative to the guide G. Draw a line parallel to the direction of
motion of the slider through g (or o). Thus, the point b is located.
(i) Velocity of the slider, vb = ob = 9.7 m/s
(ii) Locate the point e on ba extended such that
ae AE

ba BA
ba = 5.25 m/s on measuring from the diagram
0.45
 ae = 5.25 × = 1.48 m/s
1.60
ve = oe = 10.2 m/s
(iii) To locate a point F on the connecting rod which has the least velocity relative to the
crankshaft or has the least absolute velocity, draw of  ab through o.
AF af
Locate the point F on AB such the 
AB ab
2.76
or, AF = 1.60 × = 0.84 m
5.25
vf = of = 9.4 m/s
vba 5.25
(iv) ba =  = 3.28 rad/s clockwise
AB 1.60
(v) (a) Velocity of rubbing at the pin of the crankshaft (at O)
 80 
= aoro = 20 × 0.04 = 0.8 m/s  ro  40mm 
 2 
(b) oa is counter-clockwise and ba is clockwise.
Velocity of rubbing at the crank pin A = (oa + ba) ra
= (20 + 3.28) × 0.03
= 0.698 m/s
(c) At the cross-head, the slider does not rotate and only the connecting rod
has the angular motion.

Velocity of rubbing at the cross-head pin at B.
= abrb =3.28 × 0.05 = 0.1634 m/s
2. For the position of the mechanism showin in figure, find the velocity of the slider B
for the given configuration if the velocity of the slider A is 3 m/s.
450
3 m/s
A G
O
20° 30°
200 (mm)
(a)
Vao
o,g
Vba
Vbg
(b)
Sol. The velocity vector equation is

vbo = vba + vao
or vbg = vao + vba
or gb = oa + ab
take the vector vao (= 3 m/s) to a convenient scale figure.
vba is AB, draw a line AB through a;
for vbg, draw a line through g parallel to the line of stroke of the slide B on the guide G.
The intersection of the two lines locates the point b.
Velocity of B = gb = 2.67 m/s.

3. Figure shows the link mechanism of a quick return mechanism of the slotted lever
type, the various dimensions of which are
OA = 400 mm, OP = 200 mm, AR = 700 mm, RS = 300 mm
For the configuration shown, determine the velocity of the cutting tool at S and the
angular velocity of the link RS. The crank OP rotates at 210 rpm.
R
P on 
slider
G
Q on AR
O
p
120°
vqp
vpo
1
r
q
vsr
o,a,g
vsg s
A
(a) (b)
2 210
Sol. po = = 22 rad/s
60
Draw the configuration to a suitable scale. The vector equation for the mechanism OPA,
vqa = vpo + vqp or aq = op + pq
In theis equation,
vpo or op = .OP = 22 × 0.2 = 4.4 m/s
Take the vector vpo which is fully known.
vqp is || AR, draw a line || to AR through p;
vqa is || AR, draw a line  AR through a (or o).
The intersection locates the point q. Locate the point r on the vector aq produced such that
ar/aq = AR/AQ
Draw a line through r perpendicular to RS for the vector vsr and a line through g, parallel to the
line of motino of the slide S on the guide G, for the vector vsg. In this way the point s is located.
The velocity of the ram S = os (or gs) = 4.5 m/s
It is towards right for the given position of the crank.
Angular velocity of link RS,
vrs 1.4
rs =  = 4.67 rad/s clockwise.
RS 0.3
4. For the inverted slider-crank mechanism shown in figure. Find the angular velocity
of the link QR and the sliding velocity of the block on the link QR and the sliding
velocity of the block on the link QR. The crank OA is 300 mm long and rotates at 20
rad/s in the clockwise direction. OQ is 650 mm and QOA = 40°.
R
A on slider
B on QR
40°
O Q
650mm
(a)
o,q
vbq
vao
vab
(b)
a
Sol. The velocity vector equation can be written as usual.

vaq = vab + vbq or vbo = vba + vao
vao = vbq + vab vbq = vao + vba
oa = qb + ba qb = oa + ab
vao is fully known and after taking this vector, draw lines for vbq and vab (or vba) and locate the
point b. obviously, the direction-sense of vab is opposite to that of vba. Figure shows the solution
of the first equation.
vqb or v bq
rqr  qb 
BQ
2.55
 (BQ = 0.46 m on measuring)
0.46
= 5.54 rad/s counter – clockwise
Sliding velocity of block = vba or ab = 5.45 m/s
5. In a four bar chain ABCD, AD is fixed and is 150 mm long. The crank AB is 44 mm
long and rotates at 120 r.p.m. clockwise, while the link CD = 80 mm oscillates about
D. BC and AD are of equal length. Find the angular velocity of link CD when angle
BAD = 60°.
Sol. Given : NBA = 120 r.p.m. or BA = 2 × 120/60 = 12.568 rad/s
Since the length of crank AB = 40 mm = 0.04 m, therefore velocity of B with respect to A or
velocity of B, (because A is a fixed point),
vBA = vB = BA × AB = 12.568 × 0.04 = 0.503 m/s
150 a,d
VCD
B c
80
40 VCB
VB
60°
b
A 150 D
(a) Space diagram (All dimensions in mm) (b) Velocity diagram
First of all, draw the space diagram to some suitable scale, as shown in figure (a). Now the
velocity diagram, as shown in figure (b), is drawn as discussed below:
1. Since the link AD is fixed, therefore points a and d are taken as one point in the velocity
diagram. Draw vector ab perpendicular to BA, to some suitable scale, to represent the
velocity of B with respect to A or simply velocity of B (i.e, vBA or vB) such that
vector ab = vBA = vB = 0.503 m/s
2. Now from point, draw vector bc perpendicular to CB to represent the velocity of C with
respect to B (i.e., vCB) and from point d, draw vector dc perpendicular to CD to represent
the velocity of C wit respect to D or simply velocity of C (i.e., vCD or vC). The vectors
bc and dc intersect at c.
By measurement, we find that
vCD = vC = vector dc = 0.385 m/s
we knwo that CD – 80 mm = 0.08 m
 Angular velocity of link CD
v CD 0.385
CD =  = 4.8 rad/s (clockwise about D)
CD 0.08
6. The crank and connecting rod of a theoretical steam engine are 0.5 m and 2 m long
respectively. The crank makes 180 r.p.m. in the clockwise direction. When it has
turned 45° from the inner dead centre positino, determine : 1. velocity of piston, 2.
angular velocity of connecting rod, 3. velocity of point E on the connecting rod 1.5 m
from the gudgeon pin, 4. velocities of rubbing at the pins of the crank shaft, crank
and crosshead when the diameters of their pins are 50 mm, 60 mm and 60 mm
respectively. 5. position and linear velocity of any point G on the connecting rod
which has the least velocity relative to crank shaft.
Sol. Given: NBO = 180 r.p.m. or wBO = 2 × 180/60 = 18.852 rad/s
Since the crank length OB = 0.5 m, thereofore linear velocity of B with respect to O or
velocity of B (because O is a fixed point),
vBO = vB = BO × OB = 18.852 × 0.5 = 9.426 m/s...(Perpendicular to BO)
1. Velocity of piston
First of all, draw the space diagram, to some suitable scale, as shown in figure (a).
Now the velocity diagram, as shown in figure (b), is drawn as discussed below:
a. Draw vector ob perpendiculat to BO, to some suitable scale, to represent the
velocity of B with respect to O or velocity of B such that
vector ob = vBO = vB = 9.426 m/s
b. From point b, draw vecor bp perpendicular to BP to represnt velocity of P with
respect to B (i.e., vPB) and from point o, draw vector op parallel to PO to represent
velocity of P with respect to O (i.e., vPO or simply vP). The vectors bp and op
intersect at point p.
By measurement, we find that velocity of piston P,
vP = vector op = 8.15 m/s
B
E
2m
P G
45°
I.D.C. O O.D.C.
(a) Space Diagram
V BO VE
VG g
p
O
VP
(b) Velocity Diagram
2. Angular velocity of connecting rod

From the velocity diagram, we find that the velocity of P with respect to B,
vPB = vector bp – 6.8 m/s
Since the length of connecting rod PB is 2m, therefore anguar velocity of the connecting
rod,
v PB 6.8
PB =  = 3.4 rad/s (Anticlockwise)
PB 2
3. Velocity of point E on the connecting rod
The velocity of point E on the connecting rod 1.5 m from the gudgeon pin (ie., PE =
1.5m) is determined by dividing the vector bp at e in the same ratio as E divides PB in
figure (a). This is done in the similar way as discussed in Art 7.6. Join oe. The vector oe
represents the velocity of E. By measurement, we find that velocity of point E,
vE = vector oe = 8.5 m/s
Note: The point e on the vector bp may also be obtained as follows:
BE be BE  bp
 or be 
BP bp BP
4. Velocity of rubbing
We know that diameter of crank-shaft pin at O,
dO = 50mm = 0.05 m
7. An engine mechanism is showin in figure. The crank CB = 100 mm and the connecting
rod BA = 300 mm with centre of gravity G, 100mm from B. IN the position shown,
the crankshaft has a speed of 75 rad/s and an angular acceleration of 1200 rad/s 2 .
Find: 1. velocity of G and angular velocity of AB, and 2. acceleration of G and angular
acceleration of AB.
B
G
120° 100 mm
A
C
Sol. Given, BC = 75 rad/s; BC = 1200 rad/s2, CB = 100 mm = 0.1 m; BA = 300 mm = 0.3m
We know that velocity of B with respect to C or velocity of B.
vBC = vB = BC × CB = 75 × 0.1 = 7.5 m/s ...(Perpendicular to BC)
since the angular acceleration of the crankshaft, BC = 1200 rad/s 2, therefore tangential
component of the acceleration of B with respect to C,
a1BC = BC × CB = 1200 × 0.1 = 120 m/s2

Note: When the angular acceleration is not given, then there will be no tangential component
of the acceleration.
1. Velocity of G and angular velocity of AB
First of all, draw the space diagram, to some suitable scale, as shown in figure (a).
Now the velocity diagram, as shown in figure (b), is drawn as discussed below:
a. Draw vector cb perpendicular to B, to some suitable scale, to represent the velocity
of B with respect to C or velocity of B (i.e., vBC or vB), such that
vector cb = vBC = vB = 7.5 m/s
b. From point b, draw vector ba perpendicular to BA to represent the velocity of A
with respect to B i.e., vAB, and from point c, draw vector ca parallel to the path of
motion of A (which is along AC) to represent the velocity of i.e., vA. The vectors
ba and ca intersect at a.
c. Since the point G lies on AB, therefore divide vector ab at g in the same ratio as
G divides AB in the space diagram. In other words,
ag / ab = AG / AB
The vector cg represents the velocity of G.
By measurement, we find that velocity of G,
vG = vector cg = 6.8 m/s
From velocity diagram, we find that velocity of A with respect to B,
vAB = vector ba = 4 m/s
We know that angular velocity of AB,
v AB 4
AB =  = 13.3 rad/s (clockwise)
BA 0.3
G
VB
100 mm
120°
A
C
Fig. (a) Space Diagram
vA
c a
vG vAB
vB g
Fig. (b) Velocity Diagram
2. Acceleration of G and angular acceleration of AB

We know that radial component of the acceleratio of B with respect to C.
r v2BC (7.5) 2
* a BC   = 562.5 m/s2
CB 0.1
and radial component of the acceleration of A with respect to B,
v2BC 42
a rBC   = 53.3 m/s2
BA 0.3
Now the acceleration diagram as shown in figure (c), is drawn as discussed below:
aA
a c
aG
aAB
aBC
g
b
x
b
Fig. (c) Acceleration Diagram
a. Draw vector cb parallel to CB, to some suitable scale, to represent the radial
component of the acceleration of B with respect to C i.e., a tBC , such that
r
vector cb = a BC = 562.5 m/s2
b. From point b, draw vector b b perpendicular to vector c b or CB to represent
t
the tangential component of the acceleration of B with respect to C i.e., a BC ,
such that
t
vector bb = a BC = 120 m/s2 ...(Given)
c. Join cb. The vector cb represents the total acceleration of B with respect to C
i.e., aBC.
d. From pont b, draw vector b x parallel to BA to represent radial component of the
acceleration of A with respect to B i.e., a rAB such that
r
vector bx = a BC = 53.3 m/s2
e. From point x, draw vector xa perpendicular to vector bx or BA to represent

tangential component of the acceleration of A with respect to B i.e., a tAB , whose
magnitude is not yet known.
f. Now draw vector c a parallel to the path of the motion of A (which is along AC)
to represent the acceleration of A i.e., aA. The vector xa and ca intersect at a.
Join b a. The vector b a represents the acceleration of A with respect to B i.e.,
a AB .
8. In order to find the acceleration of G, divide vector ab in g in the same ratio as G
divides BA figure (a). Join c g. The vector c g represnts the acceleration of G.
Sol. By measurement, we find that acceleratin of G,
aG = vector c g = 414 m/s2
From acceleration diagram, we find that tangential component of the acceleratio of A with
respect to B,
a tAB = vector xa = 546 m/s2 ...(By measurement)

 Angular acceleration of AB,
a tAB 546
AB =  = 1820 rad/s2 (Clockwise)
BA 0.3
9. In the slider crank mechanism shown in figure (a) the crank OA rotates with a uniform
speed of 60 r.p.m. Determine the linear velocity of the slider B. Determine also the
linear velocity of point Q located at a distance of 5 cm on the connecting rod extended.
Sol. Angular velocity of the crank OA is given by
2N 2 60
=   6.28 rad / sec.
60 60
Therefore, A/O or A = OA = 6.28 × 7.5 × 47.1 cm/sec.
Scale for velocity polygon : 1 cm = 10 cm/sec.
5 cm
A Q
30cm
B 45° 0
(a)
Figure. (a) Configuration diagram : Scale 1 cm = 5 cm, Velocity polygon : Scale 1 cm = 10 cm/sec
o b
(b)
Figure (b) Configuration diagram : Scale 1 cm = 5 cm, Velocity polygon : Scale 1 cm = 10 cm/sec
Refer to figure (b) from pole o (fixed point in space) draw oa perpendicular to OA representing
A, and its length equal to 4.71 cm representing 47.1 cm/sm. to the chosen scale. From point
a, for B/A draw a line perpendicular to AB. This line will contain point b. From o, for B draw
a line parallel to the path of slider B, which is parallel to BO. This line will also contain point b.
Intersection of these lines give point b on the velocity polygon. Thus the velocity polygon oab
for the slider crank is complete.
Locate point Q on the line AB, on the velocity polygon such that
BQ bq  bq Q/B 
   
BA ba  ba A/B 
Join o to q. Thus oq gives the absolute velocity of point Q in direction and magnitude.
And measured form the velocity polygon.
oq = 5.05 cm
Therefore, Q = 5.05 × 10 = 50.5 cm/sec

 on the velocity polygon represents the absolute velocity of slider B. From the velocity
polygon the length of ob is measured.
ob = 3.9 cm/sec.
Therefore, B = 3.9 × 10 = 39 cm/sec.
10. In figure (a), the angular velocity of the crank OA is 600 r.p.m. Determine the linear
velocity of the slider 6 and the angular velocity of the link 5, when the crank is
inclined at an angle of 75° to the vertical. The dimensions of various links are
OA = 28 mm. AB = 44 mm, BC = 49 mm, BD = 46 mm, and the centre distanc
ebetween the centres of rotation O and C is 65 mm. Path of the travel of slider is 11
mm vertically below fixed point C.

Sol. This problem combines problems 4.1 and 4.2. The mechanism is a combination of a four-bar
chain and a slider crank. CBD is a slider crank with CB acting as the driver with variable
angular velocity.
Angular velocity of the crank OA is given by
2N 2 600

=  = 62.8 rad/sec.
60 60
Therefore, linear velocity of point A, i.e., A is given by
A = . OA = 62.8 × 28 = 1760 mm/sec.
Scale for the velocity polygon:
1 mm = 50 mm/sec
1760
Therefore, A = = 35.2 mm on the velocity polygon.
50
UD
d O,C
O
2
UD
UB
2 mm
/B
A 8
or
75°
UB
UA
/D
b UB
44m
/A or U
3
A /B
65mm
(b)
a
49m
m
mm 4
46
5
C
6 11mm
D
(a)
Configuration diagram : Scale 1 mm = 2 mm; Velocity Polygon : Scale 1 mm = 50 mm/sec
From pole o representing fixed point on machines, draw oa perpendicular to OA in such a way
that the sense of velocity vector A corresponds to the anti-clockwise rotation of the crank
OA and its length is equal to 35.2 mm.
From point a draw a line perpendicular to AB since the direction of A/B is perpendicular to
line will contain point b. From o or c (both coincident) draw a line perpendicular to CB, as the
direction of B is perpendicular to CB. This perpendicular line will contain point b. Intersection
will give point b.
From b, draw a line perpendicular to BD, to represent the direction B/D or D/B, this line will
contain point d. From c or o, (fixed points) draw a line parallel to the path of the slider 6 or
point D, which is horiontal. This line also will contain d. Intersection will give point d on the
polygon.
Thus the velocity polygon for the mechanism is completed.

Velocity of the slider is represented in magnitude and direction by the side od of the polygon.
od = 29.5 mm (scaled off the polygon)
Therefore, linear velocity of the slider
S or D = 29.5 × 50 = 1475 mm/sec. = 1.475 metres/sec.
Angular velocity of the link 5 is given by

D/B bd 32
S =    50 [32 mm scaled off; 1 mm = 50 mm/sec.]
DB BD 46
= 34.8 rad/sec. Clockwise.
11. In the slider crank mechanism is figure, the crank OA rotates with a uniform velocity
of 600 r.p.m. Determine the linear acceleration of the slider B, and also of point Q
located at distance of 5 cm on the connecting rod extended.
Sol. Draw the velocity polygon for the mechanism. Scale of Velocity Polygon 1 cm = 100 cm/sec.

Acceleration Polygon. From o (the pole for acceleration polygon), draw a line oa parallel
to AO representing the centripetal acceleration fcA relatieve to O. Its magnitude is given by
2
 2  600 
fCA = 2 . OA =   × 7.5 = 29,600 cm/sec2 = 296 m/sec2.
 60 
[Scale for acceleration polygon : 1 cm = 50 metres/sec2]
Since OA is rotating with a uniform velocity and A is moving along circle, A has only centripetal
acceleration directed towards O. It dows not havy any tangential acceleration.

From a draw a line ab , parallel to the line AB or perpendicular to the velocity vector ab, to
c
represent the centripetal component of acceleration of B relative to A, i.e., f B/A . Its magnitude
is
5cm
A Q
30 cm
7.
5
cm
B 45° O
(a)
O b
fB
a
t
fA fB/A fB/A
fQ
b
(c) a C
fB/A
O b q
(b)
Configuration diagram : Scale 1 cm = 5 cm; Velocity polygon : Scale 1 m = 100 cm/sec;

Acceleration polygon : Scale 1 cm = 50 m/sec2
c 2
f B/A  AB .AB
2B/A (ab) 2
= 
AB AB
(3.425 100) 2
= [3.425 scaled off the velocity polygon]
30
= 3917 cm/sec2
= 39.17 m/sec
= 0.782 cm
to the chosen scale.
The direction of centripetal acceleration of B relative to A must be in the direction B to A
 
parallel to AB and with proper arrow on the vector must read as ab and not ba . Therefore,
from a, it has to be drawn to the right of point a. Also draw a line perpendicular to vector ab
or perpendicular to the link AB or parallel to velocity vector ab, to represent the direction of th
t
etangential acceleration of B relative to A, i.e., f B/A . This line contains point b. From o, draw
a line parallel to the path of slider B, since the direction of its accelration will be parallel to its
path, being constrained to move along the strainght line path. This line also contains point b.
Intersection gives point b. Join b to a. Thus ab represents the total acceleration of B relative
to A, i.e., fB/A. Locate point a on the acceleration image of AB such that
bq BQ

ba BA
BQ 35
 bq = ba ·  4.15  [4.15 cm scaled off the acc. polygon]
BA 30
= 4.835 cm. [Length on acc. polygon]
Joint q to o. The acceleration diagram is completed.
Linear acceleration of the slider, B is given by
fB = ob = 4.3 cm [Scaled off the acc. polygon]
= 4.3 × 50 [50 m/sec2 = 1 cm]
= 215 m/sec2
Linear acceleration of point Q is given by
fQ = oq = 6.4 cm [Scaled off the acc. polygon]
= 6.4 × 50 = 320 m/sec2
CAM and Follower 63
CAM and Follower

3
INTRODUCTION
A cam is a rotating machine device which gives desired motion to a follower by direct contact.
The Cam’s motion may be rotating or reciprocating where as the follower may be re rotating,
reciprocating or oscillating. The Cam and follower may have the contact of higher pair. The Cam
have the uniform motion according to the shaft, but the motion of the following totally depends upon
the shape of the Cam. The Cams are widely used in automatic machines, Internal Cumbustion
engines, machine tools, printing control mechanism, inlet and exhaust valves of internal combustion
engines. Cam’s are usually manufactured by die-casting, milling or by punch-presses.
 A driver member known as the Cam.
 A driven member called the follower.
Types of Cams:
Cams are classified according to:
(1) Shape
(2) Follower Movement and
(3) Constraint Manner of the Follower
According to Shape:
(1) Wedge and Flat Cams: This tips of Cam has a translational motion. The follower
which is linked to the Cam either translate or oscillate. A spring is usually, used to
maintain the contact between the Cam and follower.
(2) Radial of Disc Cams: In radial Cams, the follower reciprocates or oscillates in a
direction perpendicular to the Cam axis.
Radial Cams are very popular due to their simplicity and compactness.
Cam
(3) Cylinder Cams: In this Cams the follower reciprocates or oscillates in a direction
parallel to the Cam axis. The follower rides in a groove at its cylindrical surface.
CAM and Follower 65
Follower
Cam
Cylindrical Cams are also known as barrel or drum Cames.
(4) Spiral Cams: A Spiral Cam is a Face Cam in which a groove is cut in the form of a
spiral.
(5) Conjugate Cam: A Conjugate Cam is a double disc Cam, the two discs being keyed
together and are in constant touch with the two rollers of the follower.
This Cam is used where their is requirement of law wear, low noise, better control of
the follower, high speed, high dynamic loads.
(6) Globodial Cam: The Global Cam is used where the requirement of moderate speed
and where the angle of oscillation of the follower is large. The Globoidal Cam can have
two types of surfaces, convex and concave.
(7) Spherical Cams: In this Cam, the follower oscillates about an axis perpendicular to the
axis of rotation of the Cam. A spherical Cam is in the form of spherical surface which
transmits motion to the follower.
According to Follower Movement
(1) Rise-Return-Rise (R-R-R)
Rise Return
Follower
360°
Cam angle
(2) Dwell-Rise-Dwell-Return-Dwell (D-R-D-R-D)
Dwell
Rise Return
Follower Disp
Dwell Dwell
Cam Angle
(3) Dwell-Rise-Return-Dwell (D-R-R-D)
Rise Return
Follower Disp
Dwell Dwell
Cam Angle 360°
According to Constraint Manner of the Follower.
(1) Pre-loaded Spring Cam

(2) Positive-drive Cam
(3) Gravity Cam
Types of Follower:
According to the surface in contact:

(1) Knife-edge Follower: When the contacting end (Means the point where Cam and
follower meets), of the follower has a sharp knife edge, it is called a knife edge follower.
CAM and Follower 67
knife Edge
Follower
Cam
Cam with knife edge follower.
(2) Roller Follower: When contacting end of the follower is a roller, then it is called a
roller follower.
In this arrangement the rate of wear is greatly reduced, because the rolling motion
takes place between the contacting surfaces. The roller follower are widely used in
stationary gas and oil engines and aircraft engines.
Roller
Follower
Cam
Cam with Roller Follower.

(3) Spherical Faced Follower: When the contacting end of the follower is of spherical
shape. It is called a spherical faced follower.
At the place of Flat-faced follower the spherical faced follower is used to minimise the
surface stress produced in between the Cam and follower.
Spherical Faced
Follower
Cam
Cam with Spherical Faced Follower
(4) Flat Faced Follower: When the contacting end of the follower is absolutly flat face. It
is called a flat-faced follower. This follower is used where space is limited such as in
Cams which operates the valve of automobile engines.
Flat Faced
Follower
Cam
Cam with flat faced follower

CAM and Follower 69
When flat faced follower is circular. It is then called a mushroom follower.
According to Movement of the Follower.
(1) Reciprocating Follower: As the name specify that the follower movement will be
reciprocating. So in this type, as the Cam rotates, the follower reciprocates or translates
at the provided states.
(2) Oscillating Follower: In this type of follower, the rotary motion of the Cam is converted
in the predetermined oscillatory motion. The follower is pivoted at a suitable point on the
frame and oscillates as the Cam makes the rotary motion.
According to Path of Movement of the Follower.
(1) Radial Follower: If the line of movement of the follower passes through the centre of
the rotating Cam, then it is known as Radial follower.
(2) Offset Follower: If the line of movement of the follower is away from the axis of the
rotating cam centre. It is known as offset follower.
DEFINITIONS AND TERMS OF RADIAL CAM
Pressure Angle (Max)
Follower
Pitch Point
ve
ur
Pitch C
ofil e
e
rcl
Pr
Ci
m
rcle
me
Ci
Ca
Pri
e
s
Ba
Pit
ch Ci
r
cl
e
(1) Base Circle: It is the smallest circle that can be drawn from the centre of rotation of
a radial Cam.
(2) Trace Point: It is a reference point on the follower to trace the Cam profile, and used
to generate the Pitch Curve.
(3) Pitch Curve: It is the curve generated by the trace point, assuming that the Cam is
fixed and the trace point of the follower rotates around the Cam.
(4) Pressure Angle: It is the angle between the normal to the Pitch Curve and direction of
the follower motion. The pressure angle, represents the steepness of the Cam profile,
and it is very important in designing a Cam profile. If the pressure angle is too large, a
reciprocating follower will Jam in its bearings.
(5) Pitch Point: It is a point on the pitch curve having the maximum pressure angle.
(6) Pitch Circle: It is the circle passing through the pitch point and concentric with the
base circle.
(7) Prime Circle: The smallest circle drawn tangent to the pitch curve is known as prime
circle.
(8) Lift or Stroke: It is the maximum travel of the follower from its lowest position to the
top most position.
MOTION OF THE FOLLOWER

Following motions may have the follower during its travel.
(1) Uniform Velocity
(2) Simple Harmonic Motion (S.H.M)
(3) Uniform Acceteration and Retardation
(4) Cycloidal Motion
(1) Uniform Velocity Diagram: We will discuss about the displacement, velocity and
acceleration diagrams when the follower moves with uniform velocity.
CAM and Follower 71
B C
Displacement
A B C D E
Rise Dwell Return Dwell

One Revolution of Cam
Angular Displacement
(a) Displacement Diagram
Acceleration Velocity
 
 
(c) Acceleration Diagram
In the drawn above diagram the base (abscissa) represents the time or it may represent
the angular displacement of the Cam in degree. The vertical axis or ordinate represents
the displacement, velocity or acceleration of the follower.
Although the follower moves with uniform velocity during its rise and return stroke the
slope of the displacement curves must be constant. Now the follower remains at rest
during part of the Cam rotation. The periods during which the follower remains at rest
are known as dwell periods. In the above diagram we see that acceleration or retardation
of the follower at the beginning and at th end of each stroke is infinite. This isdue to that
the follower is resuired to start from rest and has to gain a velocity within no time. This
is only possible when the acceleration or retordation at the beginnig and at the and of
each stroke is infinite. But this condition is impracticable.
(2) Simple Harmonic Motion Diagram (S.H.M): We will discuss about the displacement,
velocity and acceleration diagram when follower moves with simple harmonic motion.
8
7
6
Displacement
4 S
3
2
1
A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 QR
C
Velocity
max Vo
max VR

Sine Curve
Acceleration
Max ao
Max aR
Cosine Curve
Above diagram drawn represents the Displacement, velocity and Acceleration of the follower
moves with S.H.M.
Construction of the Diagram.
(a) Draw a semicircle with Cam rise or fall as the diameter. This is, usually known as the
harmonic (semi) circle.
(b) Divide the semi-circle into any number of even equal parts (say eight)
(c) Divide the Cam displacement interval into n equal division.
CAM and Follower 73
(d) Project the intercepts of the semicircle to the corresponding divisions of the Cam
displacement internal.
(e) Join the points with a smooth curve to obtain the required harmonic curve.
The follower moves with a simple harmonic motin, therefore velocity diagram consists of a
sine curve and the acceleration diagram consist of cosine curve.
Let S = stroke of the follower
O and R = Angular displacement of the Cam dunins out of stroke and return stroke.
 = Angular velocity of the Cam in rad/s.
So, Maximum velocity of the follower on the outstroke.
S
VO 
2 O
and, Maximum acceleration of the follower on the outstroke
22s
ao 
2(o )2
and, Maximum acceleration of the follower on the return stroke.
22 .s
aR 
2(R )2
(3) Uniform Acceleration and Retardation Diagram: We will discuss about the
displacement, velocity and acceleration diagram when follower moves with uniform
acceleration and retaration.
g H 7
f G 6
Displacement
e F 5
d S
4
E
D c 3
C b 2
B a 1
A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 R
Angular Displacement
Velocity
Max vo
Max vR
ao
aR
Construction of the Diagram:

(a) Divide the Cam diameter during outstroke (0) in the any even number, of equal parts
(say eight) and draw vertical lines through these points.
(b) Divide the stroke of the follower(s) in to the same number of equal even parts.
(c) Join Aa to intersect the vertical line through point 1 at B. Similarly, obtain the other point
as usuall.
CAM and Follower 75
Let S = Stroke of the follwer.

O and R = Angular displacement of the Cam during out stroke and return stroke of
the follower respectively.
 = Angular velocity of the Cam
Hence, velocity of the follower during ooutstroke
2S 2s
V0  
t0 0
Similarly, Maximum velocity of the follower during return stroke.
2.S
VR 
R
 Maximum Acceleration of the follower during outstroke.
V0 2  2 s 4 2 s
a0   
t0 / 2 t 0 .0 ( 0 ) 2
Similarly, maximum accelration of the follower during return stroke.
42 .s
aR 
(R ) 2
Cam Profile Construction:

On the basis of displacement diagram we further able to proceed to draw a Cam profile,
means in order to draw to the Cam profile we must first draw the displacement diagram for the
given motion of the follower.
In constructing the Cam profile, the principle of Kinematic inversion is used, i.e., the Cam is
imagined to be stationary and the follower is allowed to rotate in the opposite direction to the Cam
rotation.
We will learn how to draw the Cam profile through the following example.
Example: A Cam is to give the following motin to a knife-edged follower:
1. Outstroke during 60° of Cam rotation.
2. Dwell for the next 30° of Cam rotation.
3. Return stroke during next 60° of Cam rotation.
4. Dwell for the remaining 210° of Cam rotation.
The stroke of the follower is 40mm and the minimum radius of the Cam is 50mm. The follower
moves with uniform velocity during both the outstroke and return stroke. Draw the profile of the
Cam when:
a. The axis of the follower passes through the axdis of the Cam shaft and
b. The axis of the follower is offset by 20mm from the axis of the Cam shaft.
Construction: First of all we will draw the displacement diagram.
Outstroke Dwell Return Stroke Dwell

G H
F J
E K
D L 40 mm
C M
B N
O 1 2 3 4 5 6S T 0' 1' 2' 3' 4' 5' 6'
A P
60° 30° 60° 210°
Displacement Diagram
Step for drawing displacement diagram:

1. First draw a horizontal line AX = 360° to some suitable scale. On this, mark AS = 60° to
represent outstroke of the follower.
ST = 30°, Dwell
TP = 60°, Return Stroke
PX = 210° Dwell
2. Then Draw vertical line AY which is equal to stroke of the follower (i.e., 40mm), which
complete the rectangle.
3. Divide the outstroke and return stroke in to any equal number of even parts (six) and
draw vertical lines through each point.
4. Join AG and HP, since the follower moves with uniform velocity during outstroke and
return stroke, therefore the displacement diagram consists of straight line.
a. Profile of the Cam when the axis of follower passes through the axis of Cam
shaft.
CAM and Follower 77
knife edge
follower
F E
G D
C 40 mm
B
A
3 2 1
4 0
Base 5
Circle 60°
6 m
m
Cam 0 30° 50
Profile I
1 O
2
J 60°
3 5
K 4 P
L 6
M
N
Step:
1. Draw a base circle with radius equal to minimum radius of the Cam (i.e., 50m)
2. Mark point A at the axis of the Cam and follower.
3. From OA, Mark Angle AOS = 60°, outstroke
Angle SOI = 30°, Dwell
Angle TOP = 60°, Return stroke
4. Divide the AOS and TOP into same number of equal even parts as in displacement.
5. Join the point 1, 2, 3, ........ etc. and 0, 1, 2, 3 with centre O and produce beyond the
base.
6. Now set off 1B, 2C, 3D ........ etc and OH, IJ ....... etc. from displacement diagram.
7. Join the point A, B, C, ........ M, N, P with a smooth curve. The curve AGHPA is the
complete profile of the Com.
b. The axis of the follower is offset by 20mm from the axis of the Cam shaft.
Profile of the Cam will be.
G F
E
D
C
4 3 2 1 Knife Edge Follower

5 A
6 0
60°
30°
0 50 mm
O
2 60°
Cam Profile 3
H 4 20 mm
J
K 5 6
L
M N P
Offset Circle
Step:
1. Draw a base circle with radius equal to the minimum radius of the Cam (i.e., 50 mm)
2. Draw the axis of the follower at a distance of 20mm from the axis of the Cam, which
intersect the base circle at A.
3. Join AO and draw on offset circle of radius 20mm with centre O.
4. From OA, AOS = 60°, Outstroke made
SOT = 30°, Dwell
TOP = 60°, Retur stroke
5. Divide AOS and TOP is same equal even parts.
6. Draw tangent from point 1, 2, 3....... and 0, 1, 2, 3, ........ to the offset circle, and
produce this tangent beyond the base circle.
7. Now set off 1B, 2C, 3D ,...... and 0H, 1J. From displacement diagram.
8. Join the point A, B, C, ............ M, N, P with a smooth curve. The curve AGHPA is the
complete profile of the Cam.
CAM and Follower 79
EXERCISE
1. A cam with a minimum radius of 25 mm is to be designed for a knife-edge follower
with the following data:
 To raise the follower through 35 mm during 60° rotation of the cam
 Dwell for next 40° of the cam rotation
 Descending of the follower during the next 90° fo the cam rotation
 Dwell during the rest of the cam rotation.
Draw the profile of the cam if the ascending and descending of the cam is with simple
harmonic motion and the line of stroke of the follower is offset 10 mm from the axis
of the cam shaft.
What is the maximum velocity and acceleration of the follower during the ascent and
the descent if the cam rotates at 150 rpm?
Sol. h = 36 mm; a = 60°
N = 150 rpm 1 = 40°
rC = 25 mm d = 90°
x = 10 mm
6 6 6
5 7
5
4 8
4
35mm
3 9
3
2 10
2
1 11
12
1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
a 1 d
(a)
Draw the displacement diagram of the follower as discussed earlier (a). Construct the cam
profile as followers (b):
(i) Draw a circle with radius rC (= 25 mm).
(ii) Draw another circle concentric with the previous circle with radius x (= 10 mm). If
the cam is assumed stationary, the follower will be tangential to this circle in all the
positions. Let the initial position be a=O.
(iii) Join O-O. Divide the circle of radius rC into four parts as usual with angle a, 1, d
and 2 starting from O-O.
5 4
3
6
2
1
2 1
4 3 O
5
6
6
60°
7 40°
6
a
8 90°
9
7 10mm
10
11 12
8
12
9 11
10
(iv) Divide the angles a and d into same number of parts as is done in the displacement
diagram and obtain the points 1, 2, 3, etc., on the circumference of circle with radius
rC .
(v) Draw tangents to the circle with radius x from the points 1, 2, 3, etc.
(vi) On the extension of the tangent lines, mark the distances from the displacement
diagram.
(vii) Draw a smooth curve through O, 1, 2, etc. This is the required pitch curve.
2 150
During ascent,  = = 5 rad/s
60
h 
vmax = 2 
a
35  5
or, vmax =  = 824.7 mm/se
2 60  
180
2
h   
fmax =  
2  a 
2
35   5 
or, fmax =  = 38862 mm/s2 or 38.882 m/s2
2  60   
 
 180 
CAM and Follower 81
35   5
During descent vmax =  = 549.8 mm/s
2 90  
180
2
35    5 
fmax =  = 17272 mm/s2 or 17.272 m/s2
2  90   
 
 180 
2. A cam is to given the following motion to a knife-edged follower:

 To raise the follower through 30 mm with uniform acceleration and decleration
during 120° rotation of the cam
 Dwell for next 30° of the cam rotation
 To lower the follower with simple harmonic motion during the next 90° rotation
of the cam
 Dwell during the rest of the cam rotation.
The cam has a minimum radius of 30 mm and rotates counter-clockwise at a uniform
speed of 800 rpm. Draw the profile of the cam if the line of stroke of the follower
passes through the axis of the cam shaft. Also, draw the displacement, velocity and
the acceleration diagrams for the motion of the follower for one complete revolution
of the can indicating main values.
Sol. h = 30 mm; r = 30 mm; a = 120°,
1 = 30°; d = 90°; N = 800 rpm;
2 = 360° – 120° – 30° – 90° = 120°
5 6 6 6
7
4 7
8
8
30mm
3 9
9
1 10
2 10
11 11
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 12
a 1 d
(a)
O 1
2
1 2
3
3
4
4
120°
5
90° 30° 5
12 12 6
11
11
10 6
9 8 7 6
10
9
8 6
7
(b)
x = 10 mm
Draw the displacement diagram of the follower as shown in figure (a). As the rotation of the
cam shaft is counter-clockwise, the cam profile is to be drawn assuming the cam to be
stationary and the follower rotating clockwise about the cam. Construct the cam profile as
described below (b):
(i) Draw a circle with radius rC.
(ii) From the vertical positoin, mark angles a, 1, d and 2 in the clockwise direction.
(iii) Divide the angles a and d into same number of parts as in done in the displacement
diagram. In this case, a as well as d have been divided into 6 equal parts.
(iv) On the radial lines produced, mark the distance from the displacement diagram.
(v) Draw a smooth curve tangential to end points of all the radial lines to obtain the
required cam profile.
CAM and Follower 83
30mm
a 1 d
(a)
2.52
Velocity
(m/s)
2.64
(b)
464.6
Acceleration
211.9
211.9
(m/s2)
464.6
(c)
The displacement diagram is reproduce in figure (a). The velocity and acceleration diagrams
are to be drawn below this figure.
2 840
= = 88 rad/s
60
During ascent
During ascent period, the acceleration and the deceleration are uniform. Thus, the velocity is
linear and is given by
4h
v= .
2a
The maximum velocity is at th eend of the acceleration period, i.e., when  = a/2.

 vmax = 2h 
a
88
= 2 × 0.03 × 2.52 m/s
120 / 180
The plot of velocity variation during the ascent period is shown in figure (b).
4h2
funiform =
a2
4  0.03  882
or, funiform = = 211.9 m/s2
(120 /180) 2
This has been shown in figure (c)
During descent
During descent, it is simple harmonic motion.
The variation of velocity is give by
h  
v = 2  sin 
d d
Maximum value is at  = d/2,
h 
vmax = 2 
d
0.03  88
  = 2.64 mm/s
2 90 / 180
The plot of velocity variation during the descent period is shown in figure (b).
The acceleration variation is given by,
2
h    
f=   cos
2   
It is maximum at  = 0, i.e.,
2
h    0.03    88 
fmax =     = 464.6 m/s2
2  d  2  90 / 180 
This variation is shown in figure (c).

CAM and Follower 85
3. A cam is to be designed for a knife edge follower with the following data:
1. Cam lift = 40 mm during 90° of cam rotation with simple harmonic motion.
2. Dwell for the next 30°.
3. During the next 60° of cam rotaiton, the follower retursn to its original position
with simple harmonic motion.
4. Dwell during the remaining 180°.
Draw the profile of the cam when
(a) the line of stroke of the follower passes through the axis of the cam shaft, and
(b) the line of the stroke is offset 20 mm from the axis of the cam shaft.
The radius of the base circle of the cam is 40 mm. Determine the maximum velocity
and acceleration of the follower during its ascent and descent, if the cam rotates at
240 r.p.m.
Sol. Given: S = 40 mm = 0.04 m; O = 90° = /2 rad = 1.571 rad;
R = 60° = /3 rad = 10047 rad; N = 240 r.p.m.
Return
Outstroke Dwell Dwell
Stroke
Y G H
e
e
E F J K
d
d
D L
c c 40mm
C M
b b B
N
a a S R P
A 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 X
90° 30° 60° 180°
First of al, the displacement diagram, as showin in figure, is drawn as discussed in the following
steps:
1. Draw horizontal line AX = 360° to some suitable scale. On this line, mark AS = 90° to
represent out stroke; SR = 30° to represent dwell; RP = 60° to represent return stroke
and PX = 180° to represent dwell.
2. Draw vertical line AY = 40 mm to represent the cam lift or stroke of the follower and
complete the rectangle a shown in figure.
3. Divide the angular displacement during out stroke and return stroke into any equal
number of even parts (say six) and draw vertical lines through each point.
4. Sicne the follower moves with simple harmonic motion, therefore draw a semicircle
with AY as diameter and divide into six equal parts.
5. From points a, b, c, ..... etc. draw horiontal lines intersecting the vertical lines drawn
through 1, 2, 3, .... etc. and 0, 1, 2, .... etc. at B, C, D, ..... M, N, P.
6. Join the points A, B, C ..... etc. with a smooth curve as shown in figure. This is the
required displacement diagram.
(a) Profile of the cam when the line of stroke of the follower passes through the axis
of the cam shaft.
The profile of the cam when the line of stroke of the follower passes through the axis of
the cam shaft, as shown in below figure.
Knife edge
follower
Y
d
c
40mm
b
C B a
D
E 1 A
2
3
4
F 5 m
90°
40m
G S 6
O
30°
60°
R
1
2
Cam profile 3
4 5
6 P
H M
J N
K L
Base circle
(b) Profile of the cam when the line of stroke of the follower is offset 20 mm from the
axis of the cam shaft
The profile of the cam when the line of stroke of the follower is ofset 20 mm from the
axis of the cam shaft, as shown in given figure.
CAM and Follower 87
Knife edge
follower
D
E C
B
F
3 2 1 A
4
5 Base Circle
G S
6
90°
R 30° 40mm
Can 0 O
profile 60°
1
2
H
3
4 20mm
J 5
6
K M N P
L
Maximum velocity of the follower during its ascent and descent

We know that angular velocity of the cam,
2N 2 240

   25.14 rad/s
60 60
We also know that the maximum velocity of the follower during its ascent,
S   25.14  0.04

vO    1 m/s
2 O 2  1.571
and maximum velocity of the follower during its descent,
S  25.14  0.04

vR    1.51 m/s
2R 2  1.047
Maximum acceleration of the follower during its ascent and descent
We know that the maximum acceleration of the follower during its ascent,
r 22 .S 2 (25.14) 2 0.04

aO    50.6 m/s 2
2(O ) 2(1.571) 2
and maximum acceleratio of the following during its descent,
r 2 2 .S 2 (25.14) 2 0.04
aR    113.8 m/s 2
2(R ) 2 2(1.047) 2
4. A cam rotating clockwise at a uniform speed of 1000 r.p.m. is required to give a

roller follower the motion defined below:
1. Follower to move outwords though 50mm during 120° of cam rotation,
2. Follower to dwell for next 60° of cam rotaiton,
3. Follower to return to its starting position during next 90° of cam rotation,
4. Follower to dwell for the rest of the cam rotation.
The minimum radius of the cam is 50 mm and the diameter of roller is 10 mm. The
line of stroke of the follower is off-set by 20 mm from the axis of the cam shaft. If the
displacement of the follower takes place with uniform and equal acceleration and
retardation on both the outward and return strokes, draw profile of the cam and find
the maximum velocity and acceleration during out stroke and return stroke.
Sol. Given: N = 1000 r.p.m.; S = 50 mm = 0.05 m; O = 120° = 2 /3 rad = 2.1 rad;
R = 90° = /2 rad = 1.571 rad
Since the displacement of the follower takes place with uniform and equal acceleration and
retardation on both outward and return strokes, therefore the displacement diagram, as shown
in figure, is drawn in the similar manner as discussed in the previous example. But in this case,
the angular displacement and stroke of the follower is divided into eight equal parts.
Out stroke Dwell Return stroke Dwell

h J K h
g g
H L
f G f
e M
F e
E N d
d 50mm
D c P Q
c
C b R
b
B T
a a
U
A
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 V
120° 60° 90° 90°
Now, the profile of the cam, as shown in below figure, is drawn as discussed in the following
steps:
1. Draw a base circle with centre O and radius equal to the minimum radius of the cam
(i.e., 50 mm)
CAM and Follower 89
Roller follower
D C
E B
2 A
F
3
0 Off-set
4 circle
G 5
120° O
H 7
60°
8 90°
X 8 U
7
J Base circle T
6
R
5
4
0 1 2 3 Q
Prime circle Y
Pitch curve
Cam profile
M
K L
2. Draw a prime circle with centre O and radius

OA = Minimum radius of the cam + radius of roller = 50 + 5 = 55 mm
3. Draw a off-set circle with centre O and radius equal to 20 mm.
4. Divide the angular displacements of the can during out stroke and return stroke into
eight equal parts as shown by points 0, 1, 2, ...... and 0, 1, 2, ...... etc. on the prime
circle in figure.
5. From these points draw tangents to the off-set circle.
6. Set off 1B, 2C, 3D ..... etc. equal to the displacements as measured from the displacement
diagram.
7. By joining th epoints A, B, C ..... T, U, A with a smooth curve, we get a pitch curve.

8. Now from points A, B, C ...... T, U, draw circles with radius equal to the radius of the
roller.
9. Join the bottoms of these circles with a smooth curve to obtain the profile of the cam as
shown in figure.
Maximum velocity of the follower during its ascent and descent
We know that angular velocity of the cam,
2N 2 1000

   104.7 rad/s
60 60
We also know that the maximum velocity of the follower during outstroke,
S 2  104.7  0.05

vO    5 m/s
O 2.1
and maximum velocity of the follower during return stroke,
2S 2  104.7  0.05

vR    6.66 m/s
R 1.571
Maximum acceleration of the follower during out stroke and return stroke
We know that the maximum acceleration of the follower during out stroke,
42 .S 4(104.7) 2 0.05

aO    497.2 m/s 2
( O ) (2.1)2
and maximum acceleration of the following during return stroke,
42 .S 4(104.7) 2 0.05

aR  2
 2
 888 m/s 2
( R ) (1.571)
Power Transmission 91
Power Transmission
4
INTRODUCTION
Powers are transmitted from one shaft to another shaft by means of Belts, Ropes, Chains and
Gears.
So, we can say that Belts, Ropes, Chains and Gears are the mechanical device which is being
used where mechanical powers transmission required. These are the features of the drives.
1. Belt, Ropes and chais are used where the distance between the shaft is large.
2. For small distance we generally prefer Gears.
Belt, Ropes and chains are flexible type of connectors means it will bent easily.
3. Belts and ropes transmit power due to friction between then and the pulleys. If the
power transmitted exceeds the force of friction, the belt or rope slips over the pulley.
4. Belt, Ropes and Chain get strained during motion as stress is developed while movement.
5. Due to the property of slipping and straining action, belt and ropes are not positive types
of drives, i.e., In other word we can say that the velocity ratios are not constant in Belt
and ropes whereas chain and gears have constant velocity ratio.
TYPES OF BELT DRIVES

Belt Drives are classified in to three groups:
1. Light Drives: This drive is used to transmit small powers. Its speed is upto 10 m/s.
2. Medium Drives: This drive is used to transmit medium power. It’s speed is in between
10 m/s to 22 m/s.
3. Heavy Drives: This drive is used to transmit large powers. It’s speed is above
22 m/s.
TYPES OF BELTS
In now a days many types of belt is being used, yet the following are important from subject
point of view.
1. Flat Belt: The belt whose section is of rectangular shape is known as flat belt. The flat
belt is mostly used in the factories and workshop, where a moderate amount of power
is to be transmitted between the pulleys. The distance between the pulleys is not more
than 8 meters apart.
Flat Belt
Flat Belt
2. V-belt: The belt whose section is of trapeoidal section is known as V-belt, V-belts
need little adjustment and transmit more power, without slip, as compared to flat belts.
It is also used in factorised and worskhop. Generally, these are more suitable for short
centre distances.
v-Belt
V-belt
3. Circular Belt or Rope: When large amount of power is to be transmitted from one
pulley to another then circular belt or rope is used. The distance between two pulleys is
more than 8 meters apart.
Circular belt
Circular Belt
MATERIAL USED FOR BELTS AND ROPES

Those material which have high coefficient of friction and which is most strong. Flexible and
durable are used for manufacturing of belt. Choice of material for the belt and ropes are also
influenced by climate or environment conditions.
1. Flat Belts: Generally flat belts are made up of leather, canvas, cotton and rubber. The
usual distance between the connect the shaft is about 8 to 10 meter with speed as high
as 22 m/s.
The most important material for the belt is leather. Leather belt are made from 1.2 to
1.5 m long strips. The hair side of the leather is smoother and harder than the flesh side,
but the flesh side is stronger. The leather belts are cleaned and dressed periodically with
suitable oils to keep them soft and flexible.
Fabric belts are made by folding cotton or canvas layers to three or more layers and
stitching together. They are impregnated with some filler like inseed oil in order to make
the belts water proof and to prevent injury to the fibres. The cotton belts are cheaper
and suitable in warm climates, in damp atmosphere and in exposed position.
These are mostly used in belt conveyors and form machinery.
Rubber belts are very flexible and are get damaged very fact on coming in contact with
heat, grease or oil. One of the principal advantage of these belts is that they may be
easily made endless. These belts are used in paper and saw mills as these can withstand
moisture.
2. V-Belts: These are made of rubber impregrated fabric with the angle of V between 30
to 40 degree. V-Blets are usually used to connect shaft up to 4 meter apart. Speed ratio
can be up to 7 to 1 and belt speed up to 24 m/s.
3. Ropes: Mainly material used for ropes are cotton hemp, manila or wire. Ropes may be
usually to connect shaft up to 30 m distance, with operating speed less than 3 m/s.
Types of Flat Belt Drives:
1. Open belt drives

2. Crossed or twist belt drive
3. Belt drive with Idler pulleys

4. Quarter turn belt driver
5. Compound belt drive
6. Stepped or Cone pulley drive
7. Fast and loose pulley drive.
1. Open belt drives: When the driver pulley have to rotate in the same direction as the
driving pulley an open belt drive is used.
Driver
Slack Slid Driven
e
A B
e
Tight Sid
Normally, the centre distance between two pulley is 14 to 16 m. But If the centre
distance is too large, then the belt gets vibrate in direction perpendicular to the direction
of motion. And for very shorter centre distance the belt slips increases both these
phenomena effects the power transmission of the open belt drive.
While transmitting the power from driver pulley to driven pulley one side of the belt is
more tightened as compared to the other side. The tightened side is known as “tight
side” and another side is known as slack side.
2. Crossed or twist belt drive: The crossed or twist belt drive is used with shaft arranged
parallel and rotating in the opposite directions.
Driver
Driven
Sla
ck
Sid
e
A B
e
Sid
ht
Tig
A crossed-belt driven can transmit more power than an open-belt drive as the angle of
wrap is more. The only drawback is that, at a point where the belt crosses it rubs
against each other and there will be excessive wear and tear.
VELOCITY RATIO
Velocity ratio is the ratio of speed of the driver pulley to that of driven pulley.
Mathematically Expression:
Let, D1 = Diameter of the Driver
D2 = Diameter of the Driven or follower.
N1 = Speed of Ration of the Driver in R.P.M, and
N2 = Speed of Ration of the follower in R.P.M.
t = Thickness of the belt.
Neglecting any slip between the belt and the pulley and also assume that the belt is inelastic.
Speed of the belt on Driving Pulley = Speed of belt on Driven Pulley
D1N1 = D2N2
2N 1D
 Velocity Ratio, N  D
1 2
When the thickness of the belt (t) is considered then the velocity ratio becomes.
N 2 D1  t
(VR)  
N1 D 2  t
SLIP
The friction force plays a vital role while moving a belt from Driver Pulley frictional grip
becomes insufficient. Due to lack of friction force the Driver pulley make itself a forward motion
without carrying the belt with it. This may also cause some forward motion of the belt without
carrying the driven pulley with it. This is called “Slip of the belt”.
The effect of slip is to decrease the speed of the belt on the driving shaft, and to decrease the
speed of the driven shaft.
Let, S1 = Percentage slip between the driver and the belt
S2 = Percentage slip between the driven pulley and the belt
S = S1 + S2 i.e., total percentage of slip.
2 N 1  D  S
So, VR = N  D 1  100 
1 2  
If thickness of the belt (t) is considered
N 2 D1  t  S 
then,  1  
N1 D2  t  100 
CREEP OF BELT
Creep is the natural phenomena occurs in the Belt drive.
When the belt passes from slack side to tight side the belt get elongated and it contracts when
it passes from tight side to slack side. Due to this phenomana the changes of lenght occur, due to this
their is a generation of relative motion between the belt and pulley surface occcurs. This relative
motion is termed as creep.
LENGTH OF AN OPEN BELT DRIVE
D

G  H
O1 O2
B
A
r1 X r2
Let, r1 and r2 = Radii of the largest and smaller pulley

X = Distance between the centres of two pulleys
L = Total length of the belt
Hence, length of the open belt drive is
(r1  r2 ) 2
L = (r1 + r2) + 2x +
x
 (D  D2 ) 2  r1  r2 
In terms of pulley diameter = (D1  D 2 )  2x  1 and    
2 4x  x 
LENGTH OF A CROSS BELT DRIVE
C


E F
O1 O2
A
r1 X r2
In cross belt drive both the pulley rotate in opposite directions.

Let r1 and r2 = Radii of the larger and smaller pulley
X = Distance between the centre of pulley
L = Total length of the belt
Hence length of the crossed belt drive is,
(r1  r2 ) 2
L = (r1 + r2) + 2x +
x
 (D  D2 ) 2  r1  r2 
In terms of pulley diameter = (D1  D 2 )  2x  1 and    
2 4x  x 
RATIO OF TENSIONS IN FLAT BELT DRIVE
T R
T2 
 R
T1 
T+T
Let, T 1 = Tension in the belt on the tight side

T2 = Tension in the belt on the slack side
 = Angle of lap or contact of the belt over the pulley
µ = Cofficient of friction between the belt and the pulley
R = Normal Reaciton
Resolving all the forces vertically and equating the same.
 
µR + Tcos  (T  T) cos  0
2 2
As  is very small

So, cos 1
2
µR + T – T – T = 0
or, T = µR ...(i)
Again, Resolving all the force in horizontally direction
 
R – Tsin  (T  T)sin 0
2 2
 
As,  is very small, then sin 
2 2
  T
So, R–T –T – =0
2 2 2
As  is very small then the product of  and T is also very very small. Hence, neglecting
the same one we have
2T
R– 0
2
R = t ...(ii)
Inserting the value of R in equation (i) we have,
T = µ.t
T
or, = µ ...(iii)
T
Integrating the equation (iii) between proper limit
i.e., T2 to T1
and 0 to 
T1 
dT
T T  0 .d
2
T1
loge = µ
T2
T1
  e 
T2
T 
and 2.3 log  1   
 T2 
POWER TRANSMITTED BY A BELT

Let, T1 = Tension in the tight side
T2 = Tension on the slack side of belt
V = Velocity of the belt
And, also we know that the ratio of driving tensions is
T1
 e 
T2
T1
or, T2 = ...(ii)
e w
Putting the value of T2 in equation (i) we have,
 T1   1 
P =  T1   V  T1 1    V = T1 . V . K,
 e    e 
1
where, Where, K = 1 –  constant
e 
Again we know that,
P = (T – TC) KV
where, TC = Centrifugal Tension = mV2
P = (T – mV2) K . V
= (TV – mV3) K
For maximum power we have to different the power with respect to V and equate to zero, we
get
dP
0
dV
d
or, (TV  mV3 )K  0
dV
 T – 3mV2 = 0
T – 3TC
T
TC =
3
1
Hence, the above relation shows that when the power transmitted is maximum rd of the
3
maximum tension is absorbed as centrifugal tension.
T 2T
Also, T1 = T – TC = T – 
3 3
And the velocity of belt for maximum power is
T
Vmax =
3m
MAXIMUM TENSION IN THE BELT

T = T1 + TC
where, TC = Centrifugal tension
and, T = T1 = Tension in the tight side of the belt.
INITIAL TENSION
T1  T2
T0 = = Mean of the tight side and slack side
2
where, T0 = Initial tension
CHAIN DRIVE
As earlier we have discussed about the motion and power transmission by the belt and rope
driver. The major drawbrack in transmitting power from Belt and Rope drive is slippling. In order to
avoid slippling the chain drive is used. The chains are made up of rigid links which are hinged
together in order to provide the necessary flexibility for driving wheels.
Advantage and Disadvantage of Chain Drive
Advantage-
1. Chain drive occupy constant velocity ratio due to no slip and hence, it is known as
positive drive.
2. Chain drive puts lesser load on shaft.
3. Gives maximum transmisison efficiency due to no slip.
4. The velocity ratio is not affected by oil and grease on the surface.
5. By one chain only the chain drive can transmit motion to several shaft.
6. Chain occupy lesser space because they are made up of metal.
7. Chain drive may be used when the distance between shaft is less.
Disadvantage-
1. The making and production cost is high in compared to Belt and Rope.
2. The weight of chain drive is heavier than the belt and rope.
3. Chain drive needs accurate shape and careful maintenance.
4. Chain drive may have velocity fluctuation when it is not properly streated.
Classification of Chains
Chains has been classified as below:

1. Hoisting chain
2. Conveyor chain
3. Power transmission chain
Lubrication of Chain
A chain lubricant should have low enough viscosity to pentvate in the critical internal surfaces
and high enough viscosity, or necessary additive, to maintain an effective film at the prevailing
temperature and pressure.
The recommended method of lubrication for chain drives is indicated in the power rating table
published in ASME B29 series standards and in various manufactures catalogs. The method normally
listed are manual drip, oil bath, slinger disk and oil stream. In all methods, the oil should be applied to
the upper edges of the link plate or slide bar in the lower span of the chain. this enables gravity and
centrifugal force to carry the libricant into the critical bearing areas.
GEAR DRIVES
As we have read earlier that slipping of a belt is common phenomanon in the transmission of
power from one shaft to other shaft. The slipping reduces the velocity ratio of the system. So to
obtain the exact velocity ratio the gear drive is used. A body of frustum of a cone shape and of small
width having teeth of identical shape on its internal or external curcumferential surface is called a
‘Gear’ or “Toothed Gear”.
Gears doesnot need a intermediate link or connector to transmit the motion. It transmit the
motion by direct contact.
Advantage of Gear Drive:
1. It transmit the exact velocity ratio.
2. It is positive drive.
3. It also transmitted a large power.
4. Gears efficiency is good.
Disadvantage of Gear Drive:
1. Gears construction is very complicated, thatswhy for manufacturing it requires special
tool arrangement and skilled worker.
2. It causes vibration and noise when error is cutting of teeth.
GEAR TERMINOLOGY
th
id
Addendum Circle W nd
ce La id
th
Fa p
To e
W
ac
Sp
E
C
um FA
Addend
Pitch Circle
K
LAN
F
m
endu Working
Ded
Depth
Dedendum Circle Bottom Land

Root
Clearance
1. Pitch Circle: It is an imaginary circle. When the gear gets pure rolling motion, gives
the some motion when as the actual gear gives.
2. Pitch Diameter: It is the diameter of the pitch circle. Actually the dimension or size of
the gear is generally specified by pitch diameter.
3. Pitch Surface: It is the surface of the pitch circle.

4. Pitch Point: The common point of contact of two pitch circle is known as pitch point.
5. Pressure Angle: It is the angle between the common normal and the common tangent
1
at the pitch point. It is generally denoted by . The standard pressure angle are 14 °
2
and 20°.
6. Circular Pitch (PC): It is the distance measured on the circumference of the pitch
circle from a point of one tooth to the corresponding point on the next tooth.
D
Mathematically, Circular pitch, PC =
T
where, PC = Circular Pitch
D = Diameter of the Pitch Circle
T = Number of teeth
7. Diametral Pitch (Pd): It is the ratio of number of teeth per unit length to the pitch circle
diameter in inches.
T   D 
Mathematically pitch, Pd = D  P  PC  
C  T 
where, T = N0 of teeth
D = Pitch circle diameter
8. Module: It is the ratio of Pitch Circle diameter in mm to the number of teeth. It is
denoted by m.
D
Mathematically, Module m=
T
9. Addendum: It is the radial height of a tooth from the pitch circle to the top of the tooth.
10. Addendum Circle: It is the circle passing through the tip of the teeth.
11. Dedendum: It is the radial height of a tooth from the pitch circle to the bottom of the
tooth.
12. Dedendum Circle: It is the circle drawn through the bottom of the teeth.
13. Clearance: It is the radial difference between the addendum and dedendum of a tooth.
14. Backlash: It is the difference between tooth space and tooth thickness.
15. Rack: It is the part of gear wheel which consist of infinite diameter.
16. Pinion: It is the driving gear of a pair of mated gear.
Pressure angle
Pitch Line
17. Gear Ratio (G): It is the ratio of number of teeth on the gear to the number of teeth in
pinion.
T
Mathematically, Gear Ratio, G=
t
where, T = No. of teeth in gear.
t = No. of teeth in pinion.
18. Velocity Ratio: It is Ratio of angular velocity of follower to the angular velocity of
driver.
2 w 2 N 1 d
VR = w  N  d ( d1 N1  d 2 N 2 )
1 1 2
T1  d1 d 2 
= T P   
2  T1 T2 
MATERIAL OF GEAR
The cast iron is widely used in the production of gears due to its good wearing properties and
can be produced complicated shape by casting method.
The steel is also used for the manufacturing of gears. It is also used for high strength gears. It
may be plain carbon steel or alloy steel. The phosphor brone is widely used for worm gear.
Types of Gears
According to Relative position of the axes of the shafts:

The axes of the two shaft on whcih the gear is mounted may be
(a) Parallel (b) Intersecting (c) Non-Intersecting and Non-parallel
1. Spur Gears: This type of gear is used when two parallel and co-planar straight teeth
parallel to the axes and thus are not subjected to axial thrust due to footh load. The
arrangement is known as spur gearing. Another name given to spur gearing is helical
gearing, in which the teeth are inclined to the axis.
At the time of engagement of the two gears the contact extends across the entire width
on a line parallel to the axes of rotation.
Pitch Circle
Driver Follower
Line of Contact
Shafts
The double helical gears are known as herringbone gears.
Single Double
Helical Gear Helical Gear
2. Bevel Gears: The Bevel gear is used to connect two non-parallel or interesting but
coplanar shaft and the arrangement is known as Bevel gearing.
When the teeth of a bevel gear are inclined at an angle to the face of the bevel, they are
known as spiral bevels or helical bevels.
3. Skew Bevel Gearing: When the axes of rotation of shaft carrying gears are neither
parallel and nor intersecting. The gear used are called spiral or skew or cross Helical
gears.
This type of gearing also have a line contact, the rotation of which about the axes
generates the two pitch surface known as hyperboloids. When two equal bevel gears
having equal teeth connect two shafts whose axes are mutually perpendicular, the bevel
gears are known as mitre gears.
According to Peripheral Velocit of Geers
According to this the gears are divided into three types.

i. Low Speed Gears: The gears having velocity less than 3 m/s are known as low speed
gears.
ii. Medium Speed Gears: The gears having velocity between more than 3 m/s but less
than 15 m/s are called medium speed gears.
iii. High Speed Gears: The gears having more than speed 15 m/s are called high speed
gears.
According to Types of Gearing
i. External Gears: When the gears of the two shaft mesh externally with each other
known as external geras.
ii. Internal Gearing: When the pinion moves internally inside the larger wheel, then the
larger wheel is called internal gears or annular wheel.
iii. Rack and Pinion:
Pinion
Rack
When a gear meshes with another gear in straight line the combination, so formed is
called rack and pinion.
GEAR TRAIN
For transmiting the power from one shaft to another, sometime we require two or more gears
or the combination of gear. The combination is called gear train or train of toothed wheels. It
becomes more necessary, when we want to obtain large speed reduction in a small space.
Types of Gear Train
1. Simple Gear Train: When there is only one gear on each shaft then the arrangement
is known as simple gear train.
In this arrangement two external gears of a pair moves always in opposite directions
and all odd numbered gears moves in same direction as well as all even-numbered
gears in the opposite directions.
1 2 3 4 5
Simple Gear Train

As in above figure, gears 1, 3, 5 moves in counter clockwise where as 2, 4 moves in

clockwise direction.
Speed Ratio: The ratio between the speed of driver to the speed of driven is called
speed ratio and reciprocal of speed ratio is known as Train value.
Let, T = Number of teeth on a gear.
N = Speed of gear in rpm.
Velocity Ratio for respective gears,
1 N
2 T
V.R (For gear 1 and 2) = N  T ...(i)
2 1
2 N
3 T
V.R (For gear 2 and 3) = N  T ...(ii)
3 2
3 N
4 T
V.R (For gear 3 and 4) = N  T ...(iii)
4 3
4 N
5 T
V.R (For gear 4 and 5) = N  T ...(iv)
5 4
Now, multiplying equation (i), (ii), (iii), (iv), (v) we get,
N1 N 2 N3 N 4 T2 T3 T4 T5
      
N 2 N 3 N 4 N5 T1 T2 T3 T4
N1 T5
or, 
N 5 T1
Hence, it is seen that the intermediate gears have no effect on the speed ratio and
therefore they are known as idlers.
ii. Compound Gear Train: When the gear train in which the intermediate shaft consist
more than one gear. It is called a compound train of gear. In this type, some of the
intermediate shafts, i.e., other than the input and output shaft, carry more than one gear
as shown in figure.
Driver Compound Gear Driven
4
1 3 5 6
2
If we consider gear 1 as a driver than velocity ratio or, speed ratio of different gear,
N1 T2 N3 T4 N 5 T6
 ,  , 
N 2 T1 N 4 T3 N 6 T5
Multiplying the above equation:
N1 N 3 N5 T2 T4 T6
     
N 2 N 4 N 6 T1 T3 T5
N
1 2T T T
4 6
or, N  T  T  T (N2 = N3, because it mounted on same shaft and same to
6 1 3 5
N4 = N5)
Ratio of Number of teeth on drivers

or, Speed Ratio =
Product of the number of teeth on drivers
iii. Riverted Gear Train: If the axes of the first and last wheels of a compound gear train
are the same. i.e., co-axial is called riverted gear train. It is used in clock and in simple
lathes where back gear is used.
1 Last Gear
First Gear
From Geometry, r1 + r2 = r3 + r4 (Where r is the pitch circle radius)

or, T1 + T2 = T3 + T4
N4 Ratio of Number of teeth on driving gears T1 T3

Now,  = 
N1 Product of the number of teeth on driven gears T2 T4
iv. Epicyclic Gear Train: Gear Train or, Planetary Gear Train: Those gear train which
having a relative motion of axes is called on epicyclic gear train. In the axis of epicyclic
gear train at least one of the gear also moves relative to the frame.
a T
Consider two gears S and T, the axes of which is connected by an arm a. The arm is
fixed, the wheel S and T form a simple gear trian. But if the wheel T is fixed so that the
arm can rotate about the axis of T, the wheel S move ground T. Therefore, it is an
epicyclic gear train. Usually S is known as epicyclic wheel.
LAW OF GEARING
n F
vc
t
B vd
A

 wA
 D C
A
B P 
wB
E n
The law of gearing states that the condition which must be fulfilled by the gear tooth profiles
to maintain a constant angular velocity ratio.
Let VA, A, VB and B be the linear and angular velocities of curved bodies A and B respectively.
Now as these two bodies remain in contact so, the component of their relative linear velocities
along the common normal must be equal i.e.,
Component of VA along common normal = Component of VB along common normal
VC cos  = Vd cos 
or, 1 AC cos  = 2 BD cos 
AE BF
or, 1 AC  2 BD
AC BD
or, 1 AE = 2 BF
1 BF BP
or,   [ AEP and BEP are similar.]
2 AE AP
Thus, the centre line AB is divided at P by the common normal in the inverse ratio of the
angular velocities of the two gears. If it is desired that the angular velocities of two gear remain
constant, the common normal at the point of contact of the two teeth should always pass through a
fixed point P which divides the line of centres in the inverse ratio of angular velocities of two gears.
Thus for constant velocity ratio of the two gears, theh common normal at the point of contact
of the two matins teeth must pass through the pitch point.
So, AEP and BFP are similar,
BP FP

AP EP
1 FP
or, 
2 EP
or, 1 EP = 2 FP
ROPE DRIVE
Where there a large amount of power is to be transmitted from one pulley to another within a
considerable distance then the rope driver is used.
The use of flat belt is limited within a pulley distance of 8 meter apart. But if a large amount
of power is to be transmitted then their needs a excessive increase in belt cross-section. It may be
noted that friction grip in case of rope drive is more than that in V-drive.
The rope drive are classified in to two types:
1. Fibre Rope
2. Wire Rope
Rope drives are usually preferred for long centre distances between the shafts, ropes being
cheaper as compared to belts.
Advantages of Rope Drives:
1. It gives smooth, steady and quiet service.
2. They are little affected by outdoor condition.
3. They give high mechanical efficiency.
4. The shaft may be out of strict alignment.
5. The power may be taken off in any direction.
EXERCISE
1. An engine, running at 150 r.p.m., drives a line shaft by means of a belt. The engine
pulley is 750 mm diameter and the pulley on the line shaft being 450 mm. A 900 mm
diameter pulley on the line shaft drives a 150 mm diameter pulley keyed to a dynamo
shaft. Find the speed of the dynamo shaft, when 1. there is no slip, and 2. there is a
slip of 2% at each drive.
Sol. Given : N1 = 150 r.p.m.; d1 = 750 mm; d2 = 450 mm; d3 = 900 mm; d4 = 150 mm
The arrangement of belt drive is shown in figure.
Let, N4 = Speed of the dynamo shaft.
900 mm 150 mm
1
4
Dynamo Shaft
750mm
Engine Shaft
450mm
Line Shaft
1. When there is no slip
N 4 d1  d3 N 750  900
We know that  or 4   10
N1 d 2  d 4 150 450  150
 N4 = 150 × 10 = 1500 r.p.m.
2. When there is a slip of 2% at each drive
N 4 d1  d 3  s1  s2 
We know that  1  1  
N1 d 2  d 4  100  100 
N 4 750  900  2  2 
 1  1    9.6
150 450 150  100  100 
 N4 = 150 × 9.6 = 1440 r.p.m.
2. A shaft which rotates at a constant speed of 160 r.p.m. is connected by belting to a

parallel shaft 720 mm apart, which has to run at 60, 80 and 100 r.p.m. The smallest
pulley on the driving shaft is 40 mm in radius. Determine the remaining radii of the
two stepped pulleys for 1. a crossed belt, and 2. an open belt. Neglect belt thickness
and slip.
Driving 5 3
shaft 1 r1 r3 r5
720 mm
2
4
6
Driving
shaft
Sol. Given : N1 = N3 = N5 = 160 r.p.m.; x = 720 mm; N2 = 60 r.p.m.; N4 = 80 r.p.m.;

N4 = 80 r.p.m.; N6 = 100 r.p.m.; r1 = 40 mm
Let r2, r3, r4 and r6 be the raidd of the pulleys 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 respectively as shown in figure.
1. For a crossed belt
We know that for pulleys 1 and 2
N 2 r1

N1 r2
N1 160
or, r2 = r1 × N  40  60 = 106.7
2
and for pulleys 3 and 4,
N 4 r3 N
 or r = r × 3 = r × 160 = 2r
N 3 r4 4 3 N4 3
80 3
we know that for a crossed belt drive,

r1 + r2 = r3 + r4 = r5 + r6 = 40 + 106.7 = 146.7 mm
 r3 + 2r3 = 146.7 or r3 = 146.7/3 = 48.9 mm

and, Now for pulleys 5 and 6
N 6 r5 N 160
 or r = r × 5  r5 
N5 6 6 5 N6 100 = 2r3
we know that for a crossed belt drive,
r1 + r2 = r3 + r4 = r5 + r6 = 40 + 106.7 = 146.7 mm ...(i)
 r3 + 2r3 = 146.7 or r3 = 146.7/3 = 48.9
and r4 = 2r3 = 2 × 48.9 = 97.8 mm
and, Now for pulleys 5 and 6,
N 6 r5 N
 or r = r × 5 = r × 160 = 1.6r
N 5 r6 6 5 N6 5
100 5
from equation (i), r5 + 1.6r5 = 146.7 or r5 = 146.7/2.6 = 56.4 mm

r6 = 1.6 r5 = 1.6 × 56.4 = 90.2 mm
2. For a open belt
We know that for pulleys 1 and 2,
N 4 r3 N3 160
 or r = r × = r × = 2r3
N 3 r4 4 3 N4 3
80
we know that length of belt for an open belt drive,
(r2  r1 ) 2
L =  (r1 + r2) +  2x
x
(106.7  402 )
= (40 + 106.7) + + 2 × 720 = 1907 mm
720
Since the length of the belt in an open belt drive is constant, therefore for pulleys 3 and
4, length of the belt (L)
(r4  r3 ) 2
1907 = (r3 + r4) +  2x
x
(2r3  r3 ) 2
= (r3 + 2r3) +  2  720
720
= 9.426 r3 + 0.0014 (r3)2 + 1440
or, 0.0014 (r3)2 + 9.426 r3 – 467 = 0
9.426  (9.426) 2  4  0.0014  467

 r3 =
2  0.0014
9.426  9.564
=  49.3
0.0028
and r4 = 2r3 = 2 × 49.3 = 98.6 mm
Now for pulleys 5 and 6,
N 6 r5 N 160
 or r6  5  r5 
N 5 r6 N6 100 × r5 = 1.6 r5
and length of the belt (L),
(r6  r5 ) 2
1907 = (r5 + r6) +  2x
x
(1.6r5  r5 ) 2
= (r5 + 1.6 r5) + + 2 × 720
720
= 8.17 r5 + 0.0005 (r5)2 + 1440
or, 0.0005 (r5)2 + 8.17 r5 – 467 = 0
8.17  (8.17) 2  4  0.0005  467

 r5 =
2  0.0005
8.17  8.23
=  60 mm ...(Taking +ve sign)
0.001
and r6 = 1.6 r5 = 1.6 × 60 = 96 mm
3. Determine the width of a 9.75 mm thick leather belt required to transmit 25KW
forma motor running at 900 r.p.m. The diameter of the driving pulley of the motor is
300 mm. The driven pulley runs at 300 r.p.m. and the distnace between the centre of
two pulleys is 3 metres. The densit of the leather is 1000 kg/m3. The maximum
allowable stress is the leather is 2.5 MPa. The coeffecient of friction between th
leather and pulley is 0.3. Assume open belt drive and neglect the sag and slip of the
belt.
Sol. Given: t = 9.75 mm = 9.75 × 10–3 m; P = 15 kW = 15 × 103 W; N1 = 900 r.p.m.;
d1 = 300 mm = 0.3 m; N2 = 300 r.p.m.; x = 3m;  = 1000 kg/m3;
 = 2.5 MPa = 2.5 × 106 N/m2; µ = 0.3 ———* 1MPa = 1 × 106 N/m2
First of all, let us find out the diameter of the driven pulley (d2). We know that
N 2 d1 N  d 900  0.3
 or d 2  1 1   0.9m
N1 d 2 N2 300
d1 N1  0.3  900

and velocity of the belt, v   14.14 m/s
60 60
r2  r1 d 2  d1 0.9  0.3
For an open belt driver, sin  =    0.1 [ d2 > d1]
x 2x 23
or,  = 5.74°
 Angle of lap,  = 180° – 2 = 180 – 2 × 5.74 = 168.52°
= 168.52 × /180 = 2.94 rad
Let, T1 = Tension in the tight side of the belt, and
T2 = Tension in the slack side of the belt.
 T1 
We know that 2.3 log  T  = µ. = 0.3 × 2.94 = 0.882
 2
 T1  0.882 T1
log  T  = = 0.3835 or T = 2.42 ...(ii)
 2 2.3 2
... (Taking antilog of 0.3835)

We also know that power transmitted (P),
15 × 103 = (T1 – T2) v = (T1 – T2) 14.14
 T1 – T2 = 15 × 103 / 14.14 = 1060 N ...(iii)
From equations (i) and (ii),
T1 = 1806 N
Let, b = Width of the belt in metres.
We knwo that mass of the belt per metre length,
m = Area × length × density = b.t.l.
= b × 9.75 × 10–3 × 1 × 1000 = 9.75 b kg
 Centrifugal tension, TC = m.v2 = 9.75 b (14.14)2 = 19.50 b N
Maximum tension in the belt,
T = .b.t = 2.5 × 106 × b × 9.75 × 10–3 = 24.400 bN
we know that T = T1 + TC or T – TC = T1
24 400 b – 1950 b = 1806 or 22 450 b = 1806
b = 1806/22 450 = 0.080 m = 80 mm
4. An open belt running over two pulleys 240 mm and 600 mm diameter connects two
parallel shafts 3 metres apart and transmits 4 kW from the smaller pulley that rotates
at 300 r.p.m. Coefficient of friction between the belt and the pulley is 0.3 and the safe
working tension is 10N per mm width. Determine : 1. minimum width of the belt,
2. initial belt tension, and 3. length of the belt required.
Sol. Given : d2 = 240 mm = 0.24; d1 = 600 mm = 0.6 m; x = 3m; P = 4 kW = 4000 W;
N2 = 300 r.p.m.; µ = 0.3; T1 = 10 N/mm width
1. Minimum width of belt
We know that velocity of the belt,
d 2 .N 2  0.24  300
v=  = 3.77 m/s
60 60
Let, T1 = Tension in the tight side of the belt, and
T2 = Tension in the slack side of the belt.
 Power transmitted (P),
4000 = (T1 – T2)v = (T1 – T2) 3.77
or, T1 – T2 = 4000 / 3.77 = 1061 N ...(i)
We know that for an open belt drive,
r1  r2 d1  d 2 0.6  0.24
sin  =   = 0.06 or  = 3.44°
x 2x 2 3
and angle of lap on the smaller pulley,
 = 180° – 2 = 180° – 2 × 3.44° = 173.12°
= 173.12 × /180 = 3.022 rad
 T1 
 2
 T1  T1
log  T  = 0.3942 or T = 2.478 ...(ii)
 2 2
...(Taking antilog of 0.3942)

From equations (i) and (ii),
T1 = 1779 N, and T2 = 718 N
Since the safe working tension is 10 N per mm width, therefore minimum width of the
belt,
T1 = 1779 N, and T2 = 718 N
Since the safe working tension is 10 N per mm width, therefore width of the betl,
T1 1779
b=   177.9
10 10
2. Length of the belt required
We know that length of the belt required,
 (d  d ) 2
L= (d1 – d2) + 2x + 1 2
2 4x
 (0.6  0.24) 2
= (0.6 + 0.24) + 2 × 3 +
2 43
= 1.32 + 6 + 0.01 = 7.33 m
5. A shaft runs at 80 rpm and drives another shaft at 150 rpm through belt drive. The
diameter of the driving pulley is 600 mm. Determine the diameter of the driven
pulley in the following cases:
(i) Neglecting belt thickness
(ii) Taking belt thickness as 5 mm
(iii) Assuming for case (ii) a total slip of 4%
(iv) Assuming for case (ii) a slp of 2% on each pulley
Sol. N1 = 80 rpm D1 = 600 mm N2 = 150 rpm
N 2 D1 150 600
(i) N  D or 80  D
1 2 2
or, D2 = 320 mm
N 2 D1  t 150 600  5
(ii) N  D  t or 80  D  5
1 2 2
D2 = 317.7 mm
N 2 D1  t  100  S 
(iii)   
N1 D2  t  100 
150  600  5   100  4 

 
or, 80  D 2  5   100 
D2 = 304.8 mm
N 2 D1  t  100  S 
(iv)   
N1 D2  t  100 
where S = S1 + S – 0.01S1S2 = 2 + 2 – 0.01 × 2 × 2 = 3.96
150  600  5   100  3.96 

 
80  D 2  5   100 
D2 = 304.9 mm
6. A belt runs over a pulley of 800-mm diameter at a speed of 180 rpm. The angle of lap
is 165° and the maximum tension in the belt is 2 kN. Determine the power transmitted
if the coefficient of friction between the belt and the pulley is 0.3.
Sol. T1 = 2000 N d = 0.8m
N = 180 rpm µ = 0.3
 = 165° = 165 × /180 = 2.88 rad
dN  0.8 180

v=   7.54 m/s
60 60
T1
µ 0.3×2.88
T2 = e = e = 2.37 or T1 = 2.37T2
or, 2000 = 2.37 T2 or T2 = 843 N

and, P = (T1 – T2) v = (2000 – 843) × 7.54 = 8724 W or 8.724 kW
7. A casting weighs 6 kN and is freely suspended from a rope which make 2.5 turns
round a drum of 200-mm diameter. If the drum rotates at 40 rpm, determine the
force required by a man to pull the rope from the other end of the rope. Also, find the
power to raise the casting. The coefficient of frictin is 0.25.
Sol. T1 = 6000 N d = 0.2 m
N = 40 rpm µ = 0.25
 = 2.5 × 2 = 15.7 rad
dN   0.2  40
v=   0.419 m/s
60 60
T1
µ 0.25×15.7
T2 = e = e = 50.8 or T1 = 50.8T2
or, 6000 = 50.8 T2 or T2 = 118 N

and, P = (T1 – T2) v = (6000 – 118) × 0.419 = 2464 W or 2.464 kW
8. An open-belt drive is required to transmit 10 kW of power from a motor running at

600 rpm. Diameter of the driving pulley is 250 mm. The speed of the driven pulley is
220 rpm. The belt is 12 mm thick and has a mass density of 0.001 g/mm2. Safe stress
in the belt is not to exceed 2.5/mm2. The two shafts are 1.25 m apart. The coefficient
of friction is 0.25. Determine the width of the belt.
Sol. Speed of the driving pulley, N1 = 600 rpm
Speed of the driven pulley, N2 = 220 rpm
Thus, smaller pulley is the driver and
d = 250 mm;
P = 10 kW;
t = 12 mm;
 = 0.001 g/mm2 = 1000 kg/m2; r = 125 mm;
C = 1.25 m; N2 = 220 rpm; µ = 0.25;
t = 2.5 N/mm2 = 2.5 × 106 N/m2
To calculate the widthe of the belt, we need to know the maximum tension in the belt which is
the sum of the tight side tension and the centrifugal tensin,
i.e, T = T1 + T2
Calculation of T1 P = (T1 – T2) v
 t  2N  t
where v =  r    r  
 2  60  2 
2 600  12 
= 125   = 8230 mm/s or 8.23 m/s
60  2
 10 000 = (T1 – T2) × 8.23
or, T1 – T2 = 1215
T1
µ
Also, T2 = e
 R 2  R1 
where,  =  – 2 =  – 2sin–1  
 C 
 125  600 / 220  125 

or,  =  – 2 sin–  
 1250 
or,  =  – 19.9° =  – 0.347 = 2.79
T1
0.25×2.79
T2 = e = 2.01 or T1 = 2.01 T2 ...(ii)
From (i) ad (ii), 2.01 T2 – T1 = 1215

T2 = 1203 N
T1 = 2418 N
Calculatio of TC
TC = mv2
= mass per unit length × v2
= volume per unit length × density × v2
= (x-sectional area × length × density) × v2
= (width × thickness × length × density) × v2
= b × 0.012 × 1 × 1000 × (8.23)2
= (8.12.8b) N (b in m)
T = T1 + TC = t × (b × t)
2418 + 812.8b = 2.5 × 106 × b × 0.012
2418 + 812.8b = 2.5 × 106 × b = 0.012
29 187 b = 2418
b = 0.0828 m or 82.8 mm
9. An induction motor drives the main shaft of a workshop by means of a flat belt. The
diameter of the pulleys on the motor shaft and the main shaft are 45 cm and 75 cm
respectively. Another pulley of diameter 50 cm drives a countershaft having a pulley
70 cm keyed to it. If there is 3% slip on such drive, determine the speed of the
countershaft if the motor runs at 1400 r.p.m. Neglect thickness of the belt.
Sol. N1 = r.p.m. of the motor shaft.
N2 = r.p.m. of themain shaft.
d1 = diameter of the motor pulley (driver)
d2 = diameter of the 1st pulley on the main shaft (driven)
s1 = percentage slip.
 d1   100  s1  45  (100  3) 
Therefore, we have N2 = N1 ×  d    100   1400  75   100 
 2    
45 97
= 1400 ×  = 814.8 r.p.m.
75 100
Also, if, N3 = r.p.m. of the 2nd pulley on themain shaft (driver).

N4 = r.p.m. of the countershaft (driven).
d3 = diameter of the 2nd pulley.
d4 = diameter of the pulley on the countershaft.
d 3 (100  s2 )
we havee, N4 = N3 × d  100
4
But, N3 = N2 because both the pulleys are fastened to the same main shaft.
50 100  3 50 97
Therefore, N4 = 814.8 ×   814.8   = 564 r.p.m.
70 100 70 100
10. A pulley is 15 cm in diameter mounted on induction motor shaft running at 950 r.p.m.
drives a workshop main shaft at 300 r.p.m. by belt drive. The belt is 5 mm thick and
15 cm wide. Determine the size of the pulley on the main shaft if there is slip of 4%
between the belt and each pulley.
Sol. The effective diameter of driver pulley = d + t = 15 + 0.5 = 15.5 cm
The linear speed of the belt running on the pulley, allowing for the belt slip
(d1  t)N1  100  s1   15.5  950 96

    = 740 cm/sec.
60  100  60 100
The linear speed of the belt on driven pulley will be the same, but due to slip over the driven
pulley, the linear speed of the driven pulley
(100  s 2 ) (d 2  t)  300

= 740 × 
100 60
740  (100  s2 )  60 740  96  60

or, (d2 + t) =  = 45.2 cm
100  300   100  300  
Therefore, d2 = 45.2 – 0.5 = 44.7 cm.
11. The diameter of apulley on the driving shaft rotating at 120 r.p.m. is 60 cm. A
countershaft is to be driven at 300 r.p.m. by an open belt drive, µ = 0.3 and the
distance between the centre lines of the shafts is 2.4 metres. Determine the width of
the belt to transmit 3 kW if the safe permissible stress in tension is 150 N/cm width
of the belt.
N 2 r1
Sol. We have 
N1 r2
N1 120
Therefore, r2 = r1 ·  30   12cm
N2 300
(r2  r1 ) 30  12 18
Also, sin  =    0.075
D 240 240
Therefore,  = 4° 18 = 0.07504 radian.
Since, the least value of the angle con contact is to be chosen, the angle of contact for the
smaller pulley will be less and equal to
 =  – 2 = 3.14160 – 0.15008 = 2.99152
T1
µ 0.3×2.99152
T2 = e = e = 2.453 or T1 = 2.453 T2
(T1  T2 ) (2.453T2  T2 )2N.r

Also, we have, Power = kW 
1000 1000  60
(2.543  1)T2  2120  0.3

Therefore, 3=
1000  60
1000  60  3
or, T=  547 N
2120  0.3  1.453
Therefore, T1 = 2.453 T2 = 2.453 × 547 = 1340 N
Thus the width of the belt is given by
T1
b=
ft
where ft is stress per cm width of the belt, b is the width of the belt in cm.
1340
Therefore, b= = 8.93 cm  9 cm.
150
12. A leather belting of mass 1 gram/cm3 has a maximum permissible tension of 21 bar.
Determine the maximum power that can be transmitted by a belt 25 cm × 1.1 cm, if
the ratio of friction tension is 2.
Sol. Volume of 1 metre run of the belt = 25 × 1.1 × 100 cm3
25  1.1 100 1
Mass of the belt per meter run m =  = 2.75 kg/metre run
1 1000
105
Maximum load permissible = × 1.1 × 21 × = 5770 N
10 4
1
When maximum load is transmitted, the centrifugal tension have a value = × Max.
3
permissible tension.
Therefore, centrifugal tenson is given by
1 1 5770
TC = m2 = × Max. tension = · T = = 1923.3 N
3 3 3
1/2
 1923.3 
Therefore, =   = 26.45 metres/sec.
 2.75 
Also we have maximum tension due to friction for power transmisison.
2 2
T1 = T= × 5770 = 3846.6 N
3 3
1
and T2 = T (by data)
2 1
1
Therefore, T2 = × 3846.6 = 1923.3 N
2
Thus maximum power transmitted
(T1  T2 )   1923.3  26.45

=   50.84 kW
1000 100
13. A rope drive transmits 125 kW at 225 r.p.m. by rope 2.5 cm in diameter and mass of
0.6 kg per metre run. The maximum rope tension is 1360 N and its is designed for
maximum power conditions. The angle of contact is 160 degrees and the co-efficient
of friction = 0.25. The groove angle is 45 degrees. Determine the diameter of the
pulley and the number ropes.
Sol. For maximum power condition, we have
T = 3TC (where T = maximum permissible tension)
2
or, T1 = T (where T1 = friction tension on tight side)
3
Let, n = number of ropes.
Therefore, T = 3 × m2 or n × 1360 = 3 × 0.6 × 2 × n
1360
i.e., 2 = = 755.5 or  = 27.49 metres/sec.
3  0.6
Diameter of the pulley is given by
 27.49  60
  = 2.33 metres.
 N  225
60
Centrigual ension tension in the ropes is given by
TC = m2 × n = 0.6 × 755.5 × n = 453.3 n
Therefore, T1 = T – TC = 1360 n – 453.3 n = 906.7 n
T1
µ/sin 
Also, we have T2 = e where 2 = 45°
0.25 160 

= e 0.3827 180
 e1.82  6.16
T1 906.7n
Therefore, T2 =  = 147.07 n Newton
6.16 6.16
And the number of ropes required is given by
(T1  T2 )  n  
P= kW
1000
(906.7  147.07)  n  27.49

125 =
1000
125  1000
n= = 6 ropes.
759.63  27.49
14. A pinion having 30 teeth drives a gear having 80 teeth. The profile of the gears is
involute with 20° presure angle, 12 mm module and 10 mm addendum. Find the
length of path of contact, arc of contact and the contact ratio.
Sol. Given: t = 30; T = 80;  = 20°; m = 12 mm; Addendum = 10 mm
Length of path of contact
We know that pitch circle radius of pinion
r = m.t/2 = 12 × 30/2 = 180 mm
and pitch circle radius of gear,
R = m.T/2 = 12 × 80/2 = 480 mm
 Radius of addendum circle of pinion,
rA = r + Addendum = 180 + 10 = 190 mm
and radius of addendum circle of gear,

RA = R + Addendum = 480 + 10 = 490 mm
We know that length of the path of approach,
KP = (R A ) 2  R 2 cos 2  – R sin 
= (490) 2  (480) 2 cos 2 20 – 480 sin 20° = 191.5 – 164.2 = 27.3 mm
and length of the path of recess,
PL = (rA ) 2  r 2 cos 2  – r sin 
= (190) 2  (180) 2 cos 2 20 – 180 sin 20° = 86.6 – 61.6 = 25 mm

We know that length of path of contact,
KL = KP + PL = 27.3 + 25 = 52.3 mm Ans.
Length of arc of contact
We know that length of arc of contact
Length of patch of contact 52.3

  = 55.66 mm Ans.
cos  cos 20
Contact ratio
We know that circular pitch,
PC = .m =  × 12 = 37.7 mm
Length of arc of contact 55.66

 Contact ratio = 
PC 37.7 = 1.5 say 2 Ans.
15. A pair of gears, having 40 and 20 teeth respectively, are rotating in mesh, the speed
of the smaller being 2000 r.p.m. Determine the velocity of sliding between the gear
teeth faces at the point of engagement, at the pitch point, and at the point of
disengagement if the smaller gear is the driver. Assume that the gear teeth are 20°
involute form, addendum length is 5 mm and the module is 5 mm.
Also find the angle through which the pinion turns while any pairs of teeth are in
contact.
Sol. Given : T = 40; t = 20; N1 = 2000 r.p.m.;  = 20°; adendum = 5 mm; m = 5 mm
We know that angular velocity of the smaller gear,
2N1 2 2000

1 =   209.5 rad/s
60 60
and angular velocity of the larger gear,
t 20   t
2 = 1   209.5  = 104.75 rad/s ...  2  
T 40  1 T 
Pitch circle radius of the smaller gear,
r = m.t/2 = 5 × 20/2 = 50 mm
and pitch circle radius of the larger gear,
R = m.T/2 = 5 × 40/2 = 100 mm
 Radius of addendum circle of smaller gear,
rA = r + Addendum = 50 + 5 = 55 mm
and radius of addendum circle of larger gear,
RA = R + Addendum = 100 + 5 = 105 + 5 = 105 mm
The engagement and disengagement of the gear teeth is shown in figure. The point K is the
point of engagement, P is the pitch point and L is the point of disengagement. MN is the
common tangent at the points of contact.
We know that the distance of point of engagement K from the pitch point P or the length of the
path of approach,
KP = (R A ) 2  R 2 cos 2  – R sin 
= (105) 2  (100) 2 cos 2 20 – 100 sin 20°

= 46.85 – 34.2 = 12.65 mm
and the distnace of the pitch point P from the point of disengagement L or the length of the
path of recess,
PL = (rA ) 2  r 2 cos 2  – r sin 
= (55) 2  (50) 2 cos 2 20 – 50 sin 20°

= 28.6 – 17.1 = 11.5 mm
Velocity of sliding at the point of engagement
We know that velocity of sliding at the point of engagement K,
vSK = (1 + 2) KP = (209.5 + 104.75) 12.65 = 3975 mm/s Ans.
Velocity of sliding at the pitch point
Since the velocity of sliding is proportional to the distance of the contact point from the pitch
point, therefore the velocity of sliding at the pitch point is zero. Ans.
Velocity of sliding at the point of disengagement

We know that velocity of sliding at the point of disengagement L,
vSL = (1 + 2) PL = (209.5 + 104.75) 11.5 = 3614 Ans.
Angle through which the pinion turns
We know that length of the path of contact,
KL = KP + PL = 12.65 + 11.5 = 24.15 mm
KL 24.15
and length of arc of contact =  = 25.7 mm
cos  cos 20
Circumference of the smaller gear or pinon
= 2  r = 2 × 50 = 314.2 mm
 Angle through which the pinon turns
360
= Length of arc of contact × Circumference of pinon
360
= 25.7 × = 29.45° Ans.
314.2
Flywheel and Governors 131
Flywheel and Governors

5
INTRODUCTION
Flywheel is used to control the fluctuation of a engine for each cycle. A flywheel of proper
dimension is attached with the crankshaft, increases the moment of Inertia of rotating parts, and
thus it acts as a reservoir of energy. During the working period when the supply of energy is more
than required, it stores the energy and during the period when the requirement is more then it supply
the energy.
TURNING MOMENT DIAGRAM

The turning moment diagram is the graphical representation of the turning moment or Crank-
effort for various position of the crank. In which the turning moment is taken as the ordinate and
crank angle as abcissa on the cartesion co-ordinates. It is also known as “Crank-effort diagram.”
During one revolution of the crankshaft of a steam engine or IC engine, the torque is given as,
 sin 2 
T = FP × r sin   
 2 n 2  sin 2  
where, FP = Piston effort

r = Radius of crank

n = Ratio of length of connecting rod to the crank radius = .
r
 = Angle turned by the crank from inner dead centre.
Turning Moment Diagram for a 4-Stroke Cyle Internal Combustion Engine (Single Cylinder)
As we know that in four stroke cycle, there is one working stroke after the crank has turned
through two revolution i.e., 720°.
Tmax
Positive
Turning moment
Mean Resisting Loop

Torque
TMean Negative Loop
0  2 3 4
Suct Com Work Exha

ion press ing P ust
ion ower
Crank Angle
Above figure represent the turning moment diagram for a four stroke cycle of internal
combustion engine.
Now from the turning moment diagram we can see that a negative loop is formed during
suction stroke because during the suction process the pressure inside the cylinder is less than the
atmospheric pressure. During the compression stroke, the work is done on the gases, therefore a
higher negative loop is formed. During working or power stroke a large positive loop is formed
because in power stroke the fuel burns and gases gets expand so the work is done by the gases.
During exhaust stroke, the work is doe on the gases, therefore a negative loop is formed.
Turning Moment Diagram for a Multi-Cylinder Engine
Resultant Mean
Turning Moment Torque
Turning Moment
Cylinder Cylinder Cylinder

1 2 3
0° 60° 120° 180° 240° 300° 360°

Crank Angle
For a compound steam engine having three cylinders a turning moment diagram is shown in
above figure.
The above resultant turning moment diagram is the summation of the turning moment diagram
for the three cylinder. The those three cylinder in which the first cylinder is the high pressure
cylinder, the second cylinder is of intermediate pressure cylinder and the third cylinder is the low
pressure cylinder. The crank is usually placed at 120° in the case of three cylinder.
COEFFICIENT OF FLUCTUATION OF ENERGY

It is defined as the ratio of maximum fluctuation of energy to the work done per cycle.
Maximum Fluctuation of Energy

Mathematically, CE = Work done per Cycle
Work done per cycle (N-m or Joules) may be obtained from following relation.
i. Work done per cycle = Tmean × 
Where, Tmean = Mean torque in N-m
 = Angle turned in one complete revolution in radians
= 2, in case of two stroke, IC engine or, In steam engine
= 4, in case of four stroke, IC engine
And the mean torque may be find as

where, P = Power Transmitted and
2 N
= = Angular speed in rad/s
60
P  60
ii. Work done per cycle =
n
where, P = Power in watts, and
n = No. of working stroke
= N, in case of two stroke, IC engine or steam engine
N
= , In case of four stroke, IC engine
2
Coefficient of Fluction of Speed
It is the ratio of maximum fluction of speed to the mean speed. The diference between the
maximum and minimum speed during a cycle, is called maximum fluctuation of speed.
N1  N 2
Let, N = Mean speed in r.p.m =
2
 Mathematically,
Coefficient of fluctuation of speed
N1  N 2 N1  N 2 2(N1  N 2 )
CS =  
N N1  N 2 N1  N 2
2
In terms of angular speed
1   2 2( 1   2 )
CS = 
 1   2
In terms of linear speed
V1  V2 2(V1  V2 )
CS = 
V V1  V2
The reciprocal of the coefficient of fluctuation of speed in known as coefficient of steadiness

and denoted by ‘m’.
1 N
 m= C  N N
S 1 2
ENERGY STORED IN A FLYWHEEL

Let N1 and N2 = Maximum and minimum speed of the flywheel respectively
 Fluction of Speed = N1 – N2
N1  N 2
Mean speed, N=
2
Again, Let m = Mass of the flywheel in kg.
k = Radius of gyration in ‘m’
So, Moment of Inertia of Flywheel, I = mK2
As we know that mean kinetic energy of the flywheel
1
E= × I . 2
2
So, E = Maximum K.E – Minimum K.E
1 1
= × I (1)2 – × I (2)2
2 2
1
= × I [(1)2 – (2)2]
2
1
= I (1 + 2) (1 – 2)
2
 1   2 
= I .  (1 – 2)    
 2 
Now, multiplying and dividing by 
 1   2 
= I . 2  
  
 1  2 
= I . 2 . CS  C S  
 2 
= mK2 2 . G ( I = mK2)
 1 2
E  2ECS (N  m or Joule)  E   IW 
 2 
Type sof Flywheel
(1) Disc Type

(2) Rim Type
Rim type of Flywheel is mostly used. In this flywheel, the mass moment of Inertia of hub and
arms can be neglected and mass momment of inertia of only rim is considered.
Disadvantage of Disc type flywheel –
1
(1) The radius of gyration of disc is low for the same diameter of flywheel as it is only
2
of rim type.
(2) There are higher stresses in the disc.
GOVERNOR
The function of a governor is to conrol the mean speed of the engine with specified limits
whenever there is a variation of load.
When the load on the engine increases, the engine speed gets decreases, then the governor
supply the extra fuel to maintain the constant speed of the engine. On the other hand, when the load
on the engine decreases, its speed increases and thus less working fluid is required which is also
controlled by the governor. Hence we can say that, the governor automatically controls the supply
of working fluid to the engine with the varying load conditions and keep the mean speed with certian
limits.
Types of Governor
The governor may be classified by two types-

1. Centrifugal governors and
2. Inertia governors
The centraifugal governors may further classified as follows:
Centrifugal Governor
Pendulum Type Loaded Type
Walt Governor Dead Weight Spring Controlled

Governors Governor
Porter Governor Proell Governor
Hartnell Hartung Wilson-Hartnell Pickering

Governor Governor Governor Governor
Centrifugal Governor
s
Arm
Spindle
Stop
Ball Ball
Bell Crank
Sleeve Lever
(free to slide) Throttle
Valve
Stop
From
Engine
The centrifugal governors are based on ther balancing of centrifugal force on the rotating
balls by an equal and opposite radial force known as controlling force. This is the most common type
of governor. Its working depends upon the change of speed. It has pair of masses, which is known
as governor balls, which rotate with a spindle. The spindle is driven by an engine through bevel
gears. With the increase in the speed, the balls tend to rotate at a greater radius from the axis and
through a suitable linkage. The throttle value is made to close to the required extent. When the
speed decreases the balls rotate at a smaller radius and the value is opened according to the
requirement.
INERTIA GOVERNOR
In the type of Inertia governor, the position of the balls are effected by the forces set up by an
angular acceleration or deceleraton of the given spindle in addifion to the centrifugal forces on the
balls. Using suitable linkage and springs, the change in position of the balls is made to open or close
the throttle value. Thus whereas the value is operated by the actual change of the engine speed in
the case of centrifugal governors. It is by the rate of change of speed in case of inertia governor.
Therefore, the response of inertia governor is faster than that of the centrifugal governors.
Comparison between Flywheel and Governor
Sl. No. Flywheel Governor

1. It provided on the engines and fabricating It is provided on the prime movers such
machines. e.g., rolling mills, punching and as engines and turbines.
shearing machines. etc.
2. Its function is to store available Its function is to regulate the supply of
mechanical energy, when it is in excess working fluid. i.e., fuel according to the
of the load requirement and to give it the load requirement so that at different
away when the available energy is less load almost a constant speed is
than the load requirement. maintained.
3. It take cares of fluctuation of speed It take care of fluctuation of speed due
during a thermodynamic. Cycle in to variation of load over long range of
engines and during operational cycle working of the engine and turbines.
in fabricating machines etc.
4. It works continously from cycle to cycle. It works intermittently, i.e., when the
load changes.
5. In fabricating machine. It is very Governor ensures optimum use of fuel
economical to use it, as its use reduce thus it economises its consumption.
capital investment and running cost on
prime movers.
TERMINOLOGY OF GOVERNOR
The following terms used in governor.
i. Height of Governor: It is the vertical distance, from the centre of the ball to a point on
the spindle axis, where the axes of the arm interesect. It is generally denoted by ‘b’.
ii. Controlling Force: When a body rotates in a circular motion, there is a inward radial
force acting inward, that force is known as centripetal force.
In the case of governor running at a steady speed, the inward force acting on the
rotating balls is known as controlling force. In other words we can say that the centripetal
force in governor is called “Controlling Force”,.
iii. Equilibrium Speed: The speed in which the governor balls, arms etc. are in complete
equilibrium and sleeve don’t have the upward and downward motion, is known as
equilibrium speed.
iv. Mean Equilibrium Speed: It is the speed at the mean position of the ball or sleeve.
v. Maximum and Minimum Equilibrium Speeds: These are the speeds at maximum
and minimum radii of rotation of the balls respectively.
vi. Radius of Rotation: It is the horizontal distance between the centre of ball and the
axis of rotation.
vii. Sleeve Lift: It is the vertical distance travelled by the sleeve on the spindle due to
change in equilibrium speed.
viii. Sensitiveness: A governor is said to be sensitive when it responds to a small change
of speed. It may be defined as the ratio of the difference between the maximum and the
minimum speed to the mean equilibrium speed. Thus,
N 2  N1 (Range of speed) N 2  N1 2(N 2  N1 )

Sensitiveness =  
Mean speed N (N1  N 2 )
where, N = Mean speed

N1 = Minimum speed
N2 = Maximum speed
ix. Stability: A governor is said to be stable. If it brings the speed of the engine to the
required value and there is not much hunting. Hence we can say that the stability and
sensitivity are two opposite characterists.
x. Hunting: When the speed in a governor fluctuates above and below the mean speed, it
is said to be hunting. This will happen in very sensitive governor.
xi. Isochronism: A governor with zero range of speed is known as an Isochronous governor
and this property of governor is called Isochronism.
WATT GOVERNOR
It is simplest form of centrifugal governor. It is also known as conical pendulum with links
attached to a sleeve of negligible mass.
A
O O
O
h A h h
FC B B
r
W = mg
(a) Pinned arm Type (b) Open-arm Type (c) Crossed-arm Type
Let, m = Mass of the ball in kg

W = Weight of the ball in newton = m.g
T = Tension in the arm in newton
 = Angular velocity of the arm about the spindle axis in rad/s
r = Radius of rotation of the balls
h = Height of the governor (m)
FC = Centrifugal force acting on the balls (N)
Now, Taking moment about point O, we have
FC × h = m.g × r
or, m 2r.h = m.gr
g
or, 2 =
h
2
 2N  g  2N 
or,       
 60  h  60 
9.81  (60) 2
or, N2 = (2)  h
(Take, g = 9.81 m/s2)
895
or, N2 =
h
895
 h metres
N2
From above expression it is clear that ‘h’ is inversely proportional to N2, i.e., at high speed the
governor height ‘h’ becomes very small. So the watt governor is not suitable for high speed application.
Means it will work satisfactory at speed between 60 to 80 r.p.m.
PORTER GOVERNOR
Porter Governor is the modified version of watt governor. In comparions to watt governor
their is extra only a central load attached to the sleeve of porter governor. The load moves up and
down the central spindle. The working of the porter governor is similar to that of watt governor.
Consider the force acting on one-half of the governor as shown in figure.
P
Arm P
Central Load T1  h
h
Ball FC
FC
B B 
r w=1
D
D E
Sleeve w/2
The speed of the governor (porter) can be found out by two ways.
1. Method of Resolution of forces. and
2. Instantaneous centre method.
We will find from the method of resolution of forces.
Let, m = Mass of each ball in kg.
M = Mass of central load in kg.
r = Radius of rotatin in m.
h = Height of the governor in m.
N = Speed of balls in r.p.m.
T1 = Tension in the arm.
T2 = Tension in the link.
w = Weight of the ball.
Consider the equilibrium at the point D.
W M.g.
T2 cos = 
2 2
M.g
or, T2 = ...(i)
2cos
Resolving forces vertically.
M.g  M.g 
T1 cos = T2 cos + w = + m.g. ...(ii)  T2 cos   
2  2 
Resolving the forces horizontally.

T1sin + T2sin = FC
M.g  M.g 
or, T1sin + × sin = FC  T2  
2cos  2 cos  
M.g
T1sin + × tan = FC
2
M.g
 T1sin = FC – × tan ...(iii)
2
Dividing equation (iii) by equation (ii)
M.g
FC   tan 
T1 sin  2

T1 cos  M.g
 m.g
2
 M.g  M.g
or,   m.g  tan   FC   tan 
 2  2
M.g F M.g tan 

 m.g  C  
2 tan  2 tan 
tan  r
Putting = q, and tan  = , we have
tan  h
M.g h M.g
 m.g  mw 2 .r   q ( FC  m2 r)
2 r 2
M.g
or, m.2.h = m.g + (1  q)
2
M
m (1  q)
 M.g  1 2 g
 h =  m.g  (1  q)  2
  2
 2  m. m 
M
m (1  q)

2
Mg  1 2 g
or,  =  m.g  (1  q)    ...(iv)
 2  m.h m h
M
2 m (1  q)
 2N  2 g
or,    
 60  m h
M M
m (1  q) 2 m  (1  q)
2 g  60  2 895
 N2 =      ...(v)
m h  2  m h
(g = 9.81 m/s2)
Some point about speed of porter governor
1. When the length of arms are equal to the length of links, then
tan 
tan  = tan  or, q= =1
tan 
(m  M) 895
then, N2 = 
m h
2. When then centrally loaded sleeve moves up and down the spindle, the frictional force
acts on it in a direction opposite to that of the motion of sleeve.
Let, F = Frictional force acting or the sleeve (N)
 M.g  F 
m.g    (1  q) 895 m.g  (M.g  F) 895
 2 
then, N2 =    (....when q = 1)
m.g h m.g h
PROELL GOVERNOR
B P Q C
P
B
F G FC

w
Governor Axis


Central
Load 
D E
Sleeve I M D
w/2
The proell governor has a ball fixed at B and C to the extension of the link DF and EG. The
arm FP and GQ are pivoted at P and Q respectively.
Consider the equilibrium of the forces on one half of the governor as above shown in figure.
Taking moment about I, using the same notation.
W M.g
FC × BM = W × IM + × ID = m.g × IM + × ID
2 2
IM M.g  IM  MD 
 FC = m.g ×    ( ID = IM + MD)
BM 2  BM 
Multiplying and dividing by FM, we get
FM  IM M.g  IM MD   FM  M.g 
FC = BM  mg.  FM  2  FM  FM   =
   m.g  tan   2  tan   tan  
BM 
 
FM  M.g  tan   
  tan   m.g  1  
BM  2  tan   
r tan 
As, FC = m.2r; tan = and q =
h tan 
FM r  M.g 
 m2r =   m.g  (1  q) 
BM h  2 
 M 
m  (1  q) 
2FM  2 g
and,  =  
BM  m h
N
substituting,  = 2 and g = 9.81 m/s2 we get
60
 M 
FM  m  2 (1  q)  895
N2 =  
BM  m  h
when,  = , then q = 3, thereofore above equation becomes
FM  m  M  895
N2 =   . (‘h’ is meter).
BM  m  h
EXERCISE
1. The flywheel of a steam engine has a radius of gyration of 1 m and mass 2500 kg. The
starting torque of the steam engine is 1500 N-m and may be assumed constant.
Determine: 1. the angular acceleration of the flywheel, and 2. the kinetic energy of
the flywheel after 10 seconds from the start.
Sol. Given : k = 1 m; m = 2500 kg; T = 1500 N-m
1. Anular acceleration of the flywheel
Let,  = Angular acceleration of the flywheel.
We know that mass moment of inertia of the flywheel,
I = m.k2 = 2500 × 12 = 2500 kg-m2
 Starting torque of the engine (T)
1500 = I. = 2500 ×  or  = 1500/2500 = 0.6 rad/s2 Ans.
2. Kinetic energy of the flywheel
First of all, let us find out the angular speed of the flywheel after 10 second from the
start (i.e., from rest), assuming uniform acceleration.
Let, 1 = Angular speed at rest = 0
2 = Angular speed after 10 seconds, and
t = Time in seconds.
We know that 2 = 1 +  t = 0 + 0.6 × 10 = 6 rad/s
 Kinetic energy of the flywheel
1 1
=  I(2 ) 2  × 2500 × 62 = 45000 N-m = 45 kN-m Ans.
2 2
2. A horizontal cross compound steam engine develops 300 kW at 90 r.p.m. The
coefficent of fluctuation of energy as found from the turning moment diagram is to be
0.1 and the fluctuation of speed is to be kept within ± 0.5% of the mean speed. Find
the weight of the flywheel requried, if the radius of gyratio is 2 metres.
Sol. Given : P = 300 kW = 300 × 103 W; N = 90 r.p.m.; CE = 0.1; k = 2m
We know that the mean angular speed,
 = 2  N/60 = 2  × 90/60 = 9.426 rad/s
Let 1 and 2 = Maximum and minimum speeds respectively.
Since the fluctuation of speed is ± 0.5% of mean speed, therefore total fluctuation of speed,
1 – 2 = 1%  = 0.01 
and coefficient of fluctuation of speed,
1  2
CS = = 0.01

We know that work done per cycle

= P × 60/N = 300 × 103 × 60/90 = 200 × 103 N-m
 Maximum fluctuation of energy,
E = Work done per cycle × CE = 200 × 103 × 0.1 = 20 × 103 N-m
Let, m = Mass of the flywheel
We know that maximum fluctuation of energy (E),
20 × 103 = m.k2.2.CS = m × 22 × (9.426)2 × 0.01 = 3.554 m
 m = 20 × 103/3.554 = 5630 kg Ans.
3. A flywheel with a mass of 3 kN has a radius of gyration of 1.6 m. Find the energy
stored in the flywheel when its speed increases from 315 rpm to 340 rpm.
2 340
Sol. 1 = = 35.6 rad/s
60
2 315
and 2 = = 33 rad/s
60
1 1
Additional energy stored = I(12  22 )  mk 2 (12  22 )
2 2
1
= × 3000 × 1.62 × (35.62 – 332)
2
= 684 900 N.m or 684.9 kN.m
or, 684.9 kJ
4. The turning-moment diagram for a petrol engine is drawn to a vertical scale of 1 mm
= 500 N.m and a horizontal scale of 1mm = 3°. The turning-moment diagram repeats
itself after every half revolution of the crankshaft. The areas above and below th
emean torque line are 260, –580, 80, –380, 870, and –250 mm2. The rotating parts
have a mass of 55 kg and radius of gyration of 2.1 m. If the engine speed is 1600 rpm,
determine the coefficient of fluctuation of speed.
Sol. Let flywheel KE at a = E
at b = E + 260
at c = E + 260 – 580 = E – 320
at d = E – 320 + 80 = E – 240
at e = E = 240 – 380 = E – 620
at f = E – 620 + 870 = E + 250
at g = E + 250 – 250 = E
870
260
80
b c d e f g(a)
a
580 380 250

moment
Turning
Crank angle
Maximum energy = E + 260 (at b)

Maximum energy = E – 620 (at e)
Maximum fluctuation of energy, emax = (E + 260) – (E – 620) × Hor. scale × Vert. scale
  
= 880 ×  3    500 = 23038 N.m
 180 
e e 23038
K= 2
  2
I mk 22 2  2 1600 
55  2.1   
 60 
K = 0.0034 or 0.34%
5. Determine the maximum and minimum speed of a flywheel of mass 25 kg and radius
of gyration of 10 cm when the fluctuation of energy is 54.5 N-m. The mean speed of
the engine is 1000 rpm.
1  2 2N 2 100

Sol. Mean speed =   = 104.72 rad/sec
2 60 60
1 2 1 2
Also fluctuation of energy, E1 – E2 = I1  I2
2 2
1
or, E1 – E2 = I (1 + 2) (1 – 2)
2
1  2
where, E1 – E2 = 54.5 N-m, =  = 104.72 rad/sec
2
I = mk2 = 25 × (0.1)2 = 0.25 kg m2
Therefore, 54.5 = 0.25 × 104.72 × (1 – 2)
54.5
or, (1 – 2) = = 2.082 rad/sec ...(i)
0.25 104.72
1  2
Also, = or 1 + 2 = 2 = 2 × 104.72 = 209.44 rad/sec. ...(ii)
2
From (i) and (ii), we have
21 = 209.44 + 2.082
209.44  2.082
or 1 = = 105.76 rad/sec
2
And, 2 = 105.76 – 2.082 – 103.67 rad/sec
60 1 60  105.76
Thus maximum speed N1 =  = 1010 rpm
2 2
60  2 60  103.67
And minimum speed N2 =  = 990 rpm.
2 2
6. The turning moment diagram of a multicylinder reciprocating engine is drawn to
scale : 1 mm = 500 N-m Y axis and 1 mm = 4° X-axis. The areas above and below the
mean torque line are : + 50, – 120, +95, – 140, + 90 – 70 and + 95 mm2, when the
engine is running at 1000 rpm. If the mean fluctuation of speed is not to exceed ±
1% of the mean speed, determine the mass of flywheel of radius of gyration of
400 mm.
Sol. The fluctuation of speed not more than ± 1% of mean
or, (1 – 2) = 2%  = 0.02 
(1  2 )
And co-efficient of fluctuation of speed q= = 0.02


Scale of the diagram = 1 mm2 = 500 N-m × 4 × = 34.9 N-m. refer figure.
180
+95 +90 +95

+50 B C E G
D F H(A)
Torque
–70
–120 –140
Crank Angle
Let E be stored energy in the flywheel at the beginning of the cycle. Subsequently the values
of energy stored in the flywheel at different crank angles are the following:
At A energy stored =E
At A energy stored = E + 50
At A energy stored = E + 50 – 120 = E – 70
At A energy stored = E – 70 + 95 = E + 25
At A energy stored = E + 25 – 140 = E – 115
At A energy stored = E – 115 + 90 = E – 25
At A energy stored = E – 25 – 70 = E = – 95
At A energy stored = E – 95 + 95 = E
Therefore maximum energy stored E1 in the flywheel is at B = E + 50
And minimum energy stored E2 in the flywheel at E = E – 115
Therefore maximum fluctuation of energy emax
emax = E1 – E2 = (E + 50) – (E – 115) = 165 mm2
= 165 mm2 × 34.9 = 5758.5 N-m
Also, emax = mk22 . q
where, emax = 5758.5 N-m, k = 400 mm = 0.4 mm,
2N 21000
 =  = 104.72 rad/sec.
60 60
q = 0.02
Therefore, 5758.5 = m(0.4)2 × (104.72)2 × (0.02)
5758.5
or, m = (0.4)2 (104.72) 2  (0.02) = 164 kg.
7. Calculate the vertical height of a Watt governor when it rotates at 60 r.p.m.. Also
find the change in vertical height when its speed increases to 61 r.p.m.
Sol. Given : N1 = 60 r.p.m; N2 = 61 r.p.m.
Initial height
895 895
We know that initial height, h1 = 2
  0.248m
(N1 ) (60) 2
Change in vertical height
895 895
We know hat final height, h2 = 2
  0.24 m
(N 2 ) (61) 2
 Change in vertical height = h1 – h2 = 0.248 – 0.24 = 0.008 m = 8 mm
8. Calculate the change in Governor height for a Watt governor when speed varies 100
rpm to 101 rpm.
g
Sol. Initial Governor height, h1 = 2
 2N1 
 
 60 
where, N1 = initial rpm = 100 rpm
9.81
or, h1 = 2 = 0.08945 m = 89.46 mm
 2 100 
 
 60 
g
Final Governor height h2 = 2
 2N 2 
 
 60 
9.81
when h2 = 2
= 0.08769 m = 87.69 mm
 2 101 
 
 60 
Thus change in Governor height = (h1 – h2) = 89.46 – 87.69 = 1.77 mm.
9. Each arm of a Porter governor is 200 mm long and is pivoted on the axis of the
governor. The radii of rotation of the balls at the minimum and the maximum speeds
are 120 mm and 160 mm respectively. The mass of the sleeve is 24 kg and each ball
is 4 kg. Find the range of speed of the governor. Also determine the range of speed
if the friction at the sleve is 18N.
Sol. m = 4kg, M = 24kg, f = 18N
At minimum speed, h= 200 2  120 2 = 160 mm

As k = 1, f = 0
895  m  M  895  4  24 
N2 =      39156
h  m  0.16  4 
or N = 197.9 rpm
At maximum speed, h= 200 2  160 2 = 120 mm

As, k = 1, f = 0
895  m  M  895  4  24 
N2 =      52208
h  m  0.12  4 
or, N = 228.5 rpm
200 200
h1 h2
120 160
mg mg
200 200
mg/2 mg/2
(a) (b)
Range of speed = 228.5 – 197.9 = 30.6 rpm

When friction at the sleeve is 18N
895  mg  (Mg  f ) 
At minimum speed, N2 =  
h  mg 
895  4  9.81  (24  9.81  18) 

=  
0.16  4  9.81 
= 35.590 or N = 191.3 rpm
895  mg  (Mg  f ) 
At maximum speed, N2 =  
h  mg 
895  4  9.81  (24  9.81  18) 

=  
0.12  4  9.81 
= 55.630 or N = 235.9 rpm
Range of speed = 235.9 – 44.6 rpm
10. The arms of a Porter governor are each 250 mm long and pivoted on the governor
axis. The mass of each ball is 5 kg and the mass of the central sleeve is 30 kg. The
radius of rotation of the balls is 150 mm when the sleeve begins to rise and reaches
a value of 200 mm for maximum speed. Determine the speed range of the governor.
If the friction at the sleeve is equivalent of 20N of load at the sleeve, determine how
the speed range is modified.
Sol. Given: BP = BD = 250 mm; m = 5kg; M = 30kg; r1 = 150 mm; r2 = 200 rmm
First of all, let us find the minimum and maximum speed of the governor. The minimum and
maximum position of the governor is shown in figure (a), (b) respectively.
Let, N1 = Minimum speed when r1 = BG = 150 mm, and
N2 = Maximum speed when r2 = BG = 200 mm.
P P
0
0
25
h1 h2
25
B 150 B 200
G G
25
25
0
0
mg mg
D D
Mg Mg
2 2
(a) Minimum position (b) Maximum position
Speed range of the governor

From figure (a), we find that height of the governor,
h1 = PG = (PB) 2  (BG) 2  (250) 2  (150) 2 = 200mm = 0.2m
m  M 895 5  30 895
We know that (N1)2 =     31.325
m h1 5 0.2
 N1 = 177 r.p.m.
From figure (b), we find that height of the governor,
h2 = PG = (PB) 2  (G) 2  (250)2  (200) 2 = 150 mm = 0.15 m
m  M 895 5  30 895
We know that (N2)2 =     41.767
m h2 5 0.15
 N2 = 204.4 r.p.m.
We know that speed range of the governor
= N2 – N1 = 204.4 – 177 = 27.4 r.p.m. Ans.
Speed range when friction at the sleeve is equivalent of 20 N of load (i.e., when F = 20 N)
We know that when the sleeve moves downwards, the frictional force (F) acts upwards and
the minimum speed is given by
m.g  (M.g  F) 895

(N1)2 = 
m.g h1
5  9.81  (30  9.81  20) 895

=   29500
5  9.81 0.2
 N1 = 172 r.p.m.
We also know that when the sleeve moves upwards, the frictional force (F) acts downwards
and themaximum speed is given by
m.g  (M.g  F) 895

(N2)2 = 
m.g h2
5  9.81  (30  9.81  20) 895

=   44200
5  9.81 0.15
 N2 = 210 r.p.m
We know that speed range of the governor
= N2 – N1 = 210 – 172 = 38 r.p.m. Ans.
11. A cast iron flywheel is required to absorb 25000 Nm of energy as speed is increased
from 120 to 125 rpm. If the wheel is to be solid disc having a diameter 8 times its
thickness. Determine its diameter. Density of C.I. = 7200 kg/m3 .
Sol. Given: Density,  = 7200 kg/m3
D = 8t
Ef = 25000 N-m
2N1 2 125

N1 = 125 rpm  1 =  = 13.08 rad/sec.
60 60
2N 2 2 120
Also, N2 = 120 rpm  2 =  = 12.56 rad/sec.
60 60
Also we know that
1
The fluctuation of energy, Ef = . I(12  22 )
2
1
 25000 = . I [(13.08)2 – (12.56)2]
2
or, 50000 = I (171.08 – 157.75)
so, moment of inreria, I = 3750.94 kg-m2
Also, we know that
mD 2
Moment of inreria of solid disc =
8
and, m =  · V i.e., Density × Volume
=  · (area × thickness)

=· D2 × t
4
 D  D
=· D2 ×  t  
4 8  8
D2  D2 
Therefore, I = m ·   · · D3   ·  · D5
8 32 8 256

or, 3750.94 = × 7200 × D5
256
= 42.472
Hence, diameter of flywheel, D = 2.116 m Ans.
Brackes, Dynamometers, Clutches and Bearings: Brakes 155
Brackes, Dynamometers,
Clutches and Bearings 6
BRAKES:
INTRODUCTION
A brake is a device used to apply frictional resistance to a moving body or moving machine
member in order to stop or retard it by absorbing its kinetic energy. The energy absorbed by brakes
is dissipated in the form of heat. This heat is released in the surrounding air or the fluid which is
circulated through the passages in the brake drum.
Dynamometer
Introduction: A dynamometer is a brake incorporating device to measure the frictional resistance

applied. This is used to determine the power developed by the machine, while maintaining its speed
at the rated value.
Types of Brakes
Commonly there are three types of braking system

i. Hydraulic Brakes
ii. Electric Brakes
iii. Mechanical Brakes
Types of Mechanical Brakes
i. Block or shoe brake

ii. Band brake
iii. Band and block brake
iv. Internal expanding shoe brake
Our concentraion is only to the construction and working of mechanical brakes.

i. Black or shoe brake: A block or shoe brake consists of a block or shoe which is pressed
against a rotating drum. The force on the drum is increased by using a lever. These
brakes are used on railway trains and tram cars. Wood and rubber blocks are used for
light and slow vehicles whereas cast iron or steel is used for heavy and fast vehicles. The
material of block is softer than that of drum or rim of the wheel to avoid wear of the
drum.
l l
x x
N f N f
f
 
D r D r
Fig. (a) Clockwise motion of drum Fig. (b) Atnti-clockwise motion of drum
Let, P = force applied at the end of the lever.

N = Normal force between block and wheel.
r = Radius of the wheel.
f = Force of friction or tongential braking force.
 = Coefficient of friction.
2 = Angle of contact of block surfac.
Tangential braking force on the wheel, f = mN
and the braking torque, T = fr = Nr
Now, we will consider the following three cases.
Case 1: When the line of action of tangential braking force passes through fulcrum.
From above fig. considering equilibrium.
i.e., M0 = 0
N×x=P×l
P
or, N=
x
Hence braking torque is
P µPr
T = µNr = µ × r 
x x
The braking torque is same independent of direction of rotation of wheel.
Case 2: The line of action of tangential braking force (f) is at a distance ‘a’ below
the fulcrum O.
l l
x x
a a
N f N f
 
D r D r
Fig. (a) Clockwise direction of wheel Fig. (b) Atnti-clockwise direction of wheel
Considering Equilibrium- M0 = 0 (Wheel rotates in clockwise direction)

N×x+f×a=P×l
N × x + µN × a = P × l
Pl
 N=
x  a
And, the Braking Torque,
Plr
T = µrN =
x  a
Again, Consider Equilibrium

M0 = 0 (Wheel rotates in annticlockwise direction)
N×x–f×a=P×l
 N × x – N × a = P × l
Pl
 N=
x  a
And, the braking torque is
Plr
T = Nr =
x  a
Case 3: When the line of action of the tangential braking force passes through a
distance ‘a’ above the fulcrom O.
l l
x x
F P
N f P N f
a a
 O 
D r D r
Fig. (a) Clockwise direction of wheel Fig. (b) Atnti-clockwise direction of wheel
Considering Equilibrium- M0 = 0 (Wheel rotates in clockwise direction)

N×x–f×a=P×l
 N × x – N × a = P × l
Pl
 N=
x  a
Plr
T = Nr =
x  a
Again considering equilibrium
N×x+f×a=P×l
 N × x + N × a = P × l
Pl
 N=
x  a
Plr
T = Nr =
x  a
Question. A single black shoe brake is shown where the block is rigidly fixed to the lever AB.
The radius of drum is 160mm and coefficient of friction fo brake lining is 0.3. If the
drum rotates clockwise. Calculate the brake torque due to vertical force of 600N
applied at B.
Solution. Given data is, r = 160 mm = 0.16 m
µ = 0.3
P = 600N
2 = 40°, the block pressure may be taken as uniform.
Considering equilibrium, MA = 0
350mm 400mm
B
200mm f
N
600N
40°
r
D
160mm
Taking moment about A N × 350 + f (200 – 160) = 600 (400 + 350)
f
N=

f
  350  40 f  600  750
0.3
600  750
 f = 350 = 372.8 N
 40
0.3
And the braking torque, T = f × r = 372.8 × 0.16 = 59.6 Nm
Pivoted Block Shoe Brake
As we know that when the angle of contact is less than 60°, then it may be assumed that the
normal pressure between the block and the wheel is uniform.
l
x
f
N P

w r
For blocks with angle of contact more than 60°, the normal pressure between block and wheel
is non-uniform with more pressure in the centre than at the ends of the block. In order to ensure
uniform pressure and shoe wear, the block is hinged or pivoted to the lever instead of attaching
rigidly.
The braking torque for a pivoted block or shoe brake (2 > 60°) is given by
T = f × r = µNr
whereµ = Actual coefficient of friction
4 sin 
µ = Equivalent coefficient of friction =
2  sin 2
Question. A single block shoe brake has drum diameter of 250mm and coefficient of friction of
0.35. The angle of contact is 90° and operating force is 700 N at the end of the lever
shown. Determine the torque which can be transmitted by the brake.
450mm
200mm
N f 700N
50
90°
D r
125mm
Solution. Given data is, d = 250mm

r = 125 mm = 0.125 m

2 = 90° =
2
P = 700N
µ = 0.35
The angle of contact is greater than 60°, therefore equivalent coefficient of friction is
used.
4 sin  4  0.35  sin 45

µ =   0.385
2  sin 2 
 sin 90
2
For equilibrium, taking moment about the fulcrum 0,

M0 = 0
f  f 
700 × 450 + f × 50 = N × 200 = µ  200  N  w 
 
or, 520f – 50f = 700 × 450
700  450
f=  670N
470
the torque, T = f × r = 670 × 0.125 = 8375 Nm Ans.
ii. Band Brake: A band brake consists of a rope, belt or flexible steel band lined with
friction material or a number of ropes which embrace a part of drum circumference. The
force is applied at the free end of a lever.
l P l P
b b
B C B C
T1 T1
T2 T2
w w
r  r 
t t
Brake drum
Band
Fig. (a) Clockwise Rotation of Drum Fig. (b) Atnti-clockwise Rotation of Drum
One end of band is attached to a fixed pin (Fulcrum) of the lever and the other end is
attached at some distance from the fulcrum.
When a force P is applied to the lever at C, the lever turns about the fulcrum point O and
the band is tightened and the brakes are applied.
Let, T1 = Tension in the tight side of band.
T2 = Tension in the slack side of band.
 = Angle of lap of the band on the drum.
µ = Coefficient of friction between the band and the drum.
r = Radius of brake drum.
t = Thickness of band.
t
re = Effective radius of drum = r 
2
T1
As we know the ratio of tension is  eµ
T2
 T1 
or, ln    
 T2 
 T1 
or, 2.3 log  T   .
 2
Braking force on drum = (T1 – T2)

 Braking torque on the drum = (T1 – T2) re . (Considering thickness of band)
= (T1 – T2) r (Neglecting thickness of band)
Clockwise Rotation of Drum
When drum rotates in clockwise direction, the end of band attached to falcrum 0 will be
slack with tension T2 and other end of band attached to point B will be tight with tension
T 1.
For equilibrium of brake M0 = 0
P × l = T1 × b
Anticlock Rotation of Drum
When the drum rotates in anticlockwise direction, the end of band attached to fulcrum
will be tight with tension T1 and other end attached to point B will be slack with tension
T 2.
For equilibrium of brake, M0 = 0
P × l = T2 × b
where, l = length of the lever from the fulcrum (OC) and

b = perpendicular distance from 0 to the line of action of T1 and T2
Important Point:
i. The force P must be applied upward to tighten the band.
ii. The maximum tension in the band is T1 = .w.t
where,  = Maximum permissible tensile stress
w = Width of the band and
t = Thickness of the band.
Question. A simple band brake has a drum of 600 mm diameter and coefficient of friction 0.25
and angle of contact 270°. The drum is rotating at 200 rpm. The band end is connected
to the fulcrum pin and other end to brake arm 125 mm from the pin. The straight
brake arm is 75 mm long and is placed perpendicular to the diameter that bisects the
angle of contact find.
i. The necessary pull to be applied at the end of brake arm to step the wheel if
35 kw is being absorbed. What is the direction of the pull?
ii. The width of the steel band if the band thickness is 2.5 mm and maximum allowable
tensile stress is not to exceed 250 N/mm2.
Solution. Given data is, d = 600mm
r = 300 mm = 0.3 m
N = 200 rpm
µ = 0.25
750 mm
25 mm
D P
B C
T1 T2
m
0m
30
270  
 = 270° =  4.713rad
180
Power = 35 kw = 35 × 103 W
t = 2.5 mm
 = 50 N/mm2
1. Pull (P)
For anticlockwise direction of motion, the band tensions T1 and T2 are shown in
figure.
The pull has to be applied upwards
T1
T2
= eµ = e0.25×4.713
T1
 T2
= 3.25
2 NT
As P (Power) =
60
35  103  60
The braking torque, T = = 1667 × 103 Nmm
2 200
The braking torque, T = (T1 – T2)r
1667  103
 (T1 – T2) = = 5556 N
300
 T1 
 T1    5556N
 325 
 T1 = 8025 N
8025
T2 = = 2469 N
3.25
For equilibrium of brake, M0 = 0
 P × 750 = T2 × OD
125 1
where, OD =   62.5  2
2 cos 45
2469  62.5  2
 P=  291N Ans.
750
2. Width of Steel Band

T1 = wt
T1 8025
Hence, width w=   64.2 mm Ans.
t 50  2.5
ii. Band and Block Brake: A band and block brake consists of a number of wooden blocks
secured inside a flexible steel band. When the brake is applied, the blocks are pressed
against the drum. Wooden blocks have high coefficient of friction. So, that it increases
the effectiveness of the brake. The friction between the blocks and the drum provides
braking action.
A
P
T1 O
RN Block
T1 T1'
1
T2
2
wRN
3  
n
m
Fig. (a) Fig. (b)
Each block subtends a small angle of 2 at the center of the drum. The frictional force
on the blocks acts in the direction of rotation of the drum. For n blocks on the brake.
Let, T1 = Tension in the tight side.
T2 = Tension at the slack side.
µ = Coefficient of friction between the blocks and drum.
T1 = Tension in the band between the first and second block.
T2 . T3, etc. = Tension in the band between the second and the third block
between the third and fourth block respectively.
At the fig. (b)
Resolving the force radially, we have
(T1 + T1) sin = RN ...(i)
Resolving the force tangentially, we have

(T1 – T1) cos = µ . RN ...(ii)
After dividing (ii) by (i) we get
(T1  T1)cos  R N

(T1  T1)sin  R N
or, (T1 – T1) = µtan (T1 + T1)
T1 1   tan 
 
T1 1   tan 
Similarly, it can be done for each blocks
T1 T1 T1 T2 T  1   tan  

so,     ......  n 1   
T2 T1 T2 T3 T2  1   tan  
Braking torque on the drum of effective radius re.

TB = (T1 – T2) re = (T1 – T2) r (Neglecting thickness of band)
Question. A band and block brake has 14 blocks. Each block subtends an angle of 14° at the
center of rotating drum. The diameter of the drum is 750 mm and the thickness of the
blocks is 65 mm. The two ends of the band are fixed to the pins on the lever at a
distance of 50mm and 210mm from the fulcrum on the opposite sides. Determine the
leart force required to be applied at the lever at a distance of 600mm from the fulcrum.
If the power absorbed by the blocks is 180 kw at 175 rpm. Coefficient of friction
between the blocks and the drum is 0.35.
Solution. Given data is, N = 175 rpm, d = 750 mm,  = 7°
µ = 0.35, p = 180 kw, t = 65mm, l = 600mm
DN
Now, P = (T1 – T2) V = (T1 – T2) .
60
  (0.75  2  0.065)  175

 180000 = (T1 – T2) ×
60
or, T1 – T2 = 22333 N
n
T1  1   tan    1  0.35tan 7 
and,     = 3.334
T2  1   tan    1  0.35tan 7 
or, 2.334 T2 = 22323

or, T2 = 9564 N
and, T1 = 22323 + 9564 = 31887 N
Assume a = 210 mm and b = 50 mm

As, a > b, F must be downwards and rotating clockwise for maximum braking torque.
Taking moments about the fulcrum.
F × l – T2 a + T1 b = 0
F × 600 = 9564 × 210 + 31887 × 50 = 0
 F = 690 N Ans.
ii. Internal Expanding Shoe Brake: Earlier in Automobile the band brakes were used.
But these days band brakes have been replaced by internal expanding shoe brakes having
at least one self-energising shoe per wheel. The major drawback of the band brake is that
heat dissipation capacity was poor.
An Internal Expanding brake consists of two semi circular shoes which are lined with a
friction material such as ferodo, to increase the coefficient of friction to prevent wearing
away of the metal. The shoes press against the inner flange of the drum when the brakes
are applied. The friction between the shoes and the drum produces the braking torque
and hence reduces the speed of the drum. This type of brake is commonly used in motor
cars and light trucks.
Cam
S1 S2
Brake Lining
Internal Expanding Brake
DISC BRAKE
A disc brake works on the principle of Pascal’s law. Pascal’s law developed by french
mathematician Blaise Pascal states that “Pressure exerted anywhere in a confined incompressible
fluid is transmitted equally in all directions throughout the fluid such that the pressure ratio remains
same.
When a brake lever or pedal is pressed, the push rod which is connected to lever or pedal and
master cylinder piston. This movement allows the master cylinder piston to slide and push the return
spring inside the bore of master, cylinder, which generates pressure in reservoir tank. At this moment
a primary seal allows the brake fluid of reservoir tank to flow over it into the brake hosepipes. A
secondary seal ensure that the brake fluid does not go other side. Then the fluid enters in to cylinder
bore of caliper assembly via brake hosepipes and pushes the calper piston or pistons. At this time the
piston ring moves in rolling shapes with piston. Then the caliper piston pushes brake pad. This
movement causes brake pads to stick with brake disc which creates friction and stops the brake disc/
rotor to rotate. This way disk brake system stops or slows down the vehicle.
Advantage of Disc Brake
1. Disk brake requires less effort to stop the vehicle compare to drum brake.
2. It generate less heat compare to drum brake for the same brake torque.
3. Ease of maintenance as disk brake is outside the wheel rim.
4. It cools down faster compare to drum brake.
5. It is less likely to skid compare to drum brake in wet condition.
6. It is much safer than drum brake in hard braking condition. Under such condition drum
brake can lock up the rear wheel.
7. It has brake pad wear indicator which is not there in drum brake.
Disadvantage of Disc Brake
1. It is expensive compare to drum brake.

2. More skills require to operate disk brake compare to drum brake that’s the reaosn why
some people are not comfortable with disk brake.
3. If any air remains in disk brake system, it can cause accident as the brake will not work
effectively.
4. Disk brake assembly has more moving parts and much complex than drum brake.
5. It requires lot of effort of maintenance front like brake fluid (bleeding), change of brake
pads etc. compare to drum brake.
Dynamometers
As we have already discussed about the dynamometer, is a brake but in addition it has a device
to measure the frictional resistance. After being knowing the frictional resistance, we can able to
obtain the torque and power of the engine.
There are mainly two types of dynamometers.
1. Absorption Dynamometers: In the absorption dynamometers the work done is converted
into heat by friction resistance, during the process of measurement. This can be used for
the measurement of moderate power only.
Absorption Dynamometers are classified in two types, from subject point of view.
i. Prony brake dynamometer, and

ii. Rope brake dynamometer
2. Transmission Dynamometers: In the Transmission dynamometer the work is not
absorbed in the process, but is utilised after the measurement.
Transmission Dynamometer are classified in three types, from subject point of view:
i. Epicyclic-train dynamometer,
ii. Belt transmission dynamometer, and
iii. Torsion dynamometer
ROPE BRAKE DYNAMOMETERS
Spring Balance
S
Pulley
Rim
Rope
Wooden
Block
Dead Weight
In this Dynamometer, a rope is wrapped over the rim of a pulley keyed to the shaft of the
engine. The diameter of the rope depends upon the power of the machine. The upper end of the ropes
is attached to a spring balance while the lower end of the ropes is kept in position by applying a dead
weight as shown in figure. The wooden blocks are placed at interval around the circumference of the
flywheel to avoid the slipping of the rope over a pulely.
Let, W = Dead load in newtons,

S = Spring balance reading in newtons,
D = Diameter of the wheel in meters,
d = Diameter of rope in meters, and
N = Speed of the engine shaft in r.p.m.
 Net load on the brake = (W – S)N
Distance moved in one revolution = (D + d)m
 Work done per revolution (W – S)  (D + d) N-m
and work done per minute = (W – S)  (0 + d)N N-m
 Brake power of the engine
Work done per min. (W  S) (D  d)N

B.P. =  walts.
60 60
If the diameter of the rope (d) is neglected, then brake power of the engine
(W  S) DN
B.P. = walts.
60
Question. In a laboratory experiment, the following data were recorded with rope brake. Diameter
of the flywheel 1.2 m, diameter of the rope 12.5 mm, speed of the engine 200 r.p.m.,
dead load on the brake 600N, spring balance reading 150 N. Clculate the brake power
of the engine.
Solution. Given data is, D = 1.2 m, d = 12.5 mm = 0.0125 n
N = 200 r.p.m. W = 600N S = 150N
As we know that the brake power of the engine
(W  S)(D  d)N 600  150) (1.2  0.0125)200

B.P. = = = 5717 W = 5.715 KW
60 60
Hydraulic Dynamometer
The hydraulic dynamometer working compartment consists of special semi-circular shaped

vanes cast into stainless steel rotor and stators, water flowing in a toroidal vortex pattern around
these vanes creates a torque reaction through the dynomometers casing which is measured by a
precision load cell. The hydraulic dynamometer fill level and consequently load is controlled by a
water outlet value, operated by a closed loop electro-hydraulic serve system. The power absorbed by
the dynamometer is carried away by the water in the form of heat.
Applied torque by the dynomometer is measured by a load cell installed on the arm of the
dynamometer. The load cell signal is transmitted to a load cell amplifier. Control command is supplied
to the outlet analog water valve, through an electronic/pneumatic transducer, which converts the
electric signal to proportinoal air quantity as supply to the valve.
Eddy-Current Dynamometers
Eddy-current Brake Dynamometers are ideal for application requiring high speeds and also
when operating in the middle to high power range. Eddy-current Brakes provide increasing torque as
the speed increases, reaching peak torque at rated speed. The dynamometers have low inertia as a
result of small rotor diameter. Brake cooling is provided by a water circulation system. Which pases
inside the stator to dissipate heat by the braking power. The water cooling in the WB provides high
continuous power rating (max 140 kw). The WB dynamometers have accuracy rating of ±0.3% to
0.5% full scale (12% for WB 2.7), depending on size and system configuration. Addition options
include : high-speed version, speed pickup, mechanical rotor blocking device, OEM version IS and
vertical mounting.
Application:
1. Motors
2. Combustion Engine
3. Hybrid
4. Electric
5. Hydraulic
6. Pneumatic
7. Pumps (hydraulic, oil)
8. Properller (Aerospace, Marine, Helicopter)
9. Clutch, overload clutch
10. Other machine tools
FRICTION CLUTCHES
A clutch is a device used to transmit rotary motion of one shaft to the other shaft when desired.
In the automobiles, it is used for engaging and disengaging the engine crank shaft and the
driven shaft instantaneously when derived by the driver. It is located between engine crankshaft and
the gear box.
The following friction clutches are important from subject point of view:
1. Disc Clutch (Single Plate Clutch)
2. Multi Plate Clutch
3. Cone Clutch
4. Centrifugal Clutch
1. Disc Clutch (Single Plate Clutch)
Flywheel
Pedal
Friction Plate
Driving Driven
Shaft Splines Shaft
Hub
Pressure
Plate
Clutch
Plate
Disc Clutch or, Single Plate Clutch
A disc clutch consists of a clutch plate attached to a splined-hub which is free to slide axially
on splines cut on the driven shaft. The clutch plate is held between the flywheel and the pressure
plate. The springs which are kept circumferentially, provide an axial force on the pressure plate to
keep the clutch in the engaged position. Both the flyheel and the pressure plate rotate with the driving
shaft and thus enable the driven shaft to rotate.
When the clutch pedal is pressed down, its linkage forces he thrust release bearing to move in
twards the flywheel and pressing the longer ends of the lever inward. The levers are forced to turn on
their suspended pivot and the pressure plate moves away from the flywheel by the knife edges thereby
compressing the clutch spring. This action removes the pressure from the clutch plate and thus
moves back from the flywheel and the driven shaft becomes stationary.
And when the foot is taken off from the clutch pedal, the pressure on the thrust bearing is
released then spring become free to move the pressure plate to bring it in contact with the clutch
plate. The clutch plate slides on the splined hub and is tightly gripped between the pressure plate and
the flywheel. The friction between the linings on the clutch plate, and the flywheel on one side and the
pressure plate on the other cuase the clutch plate and hence the driven shaft to rotate.
As from the experimental study. Frictional torque acting on the ring,

Tr = 2µPr2dr
i. Considering Uniform Pressure:
Total frictional torque acting on the friciton surface or on the clutch.
2  (r1 )3  (r2 )3 
T= 3  W  2 2 
 WR
 (r1 )  (r2 ) 
where, R = Mean Radius of friction surface
2  (r1 )3  (r2 )3 
= 3  (r ) 2  (r )2 
 1 2 
ii. Considering Uniform Theory:

Total frictional torque on the friction surface,
1
T= × µW (r1 + r2) = µ.W.R
2
r1  r2
where, R = Mean Radius of the friction surface =
2
where, T = Torque transmitted by the clutch
P = Intensity of axial pressure with which the contact surface are held together
r1 and r2 = External and Internal radii of friction faces
µ = Coefficient of friction
W = Normal or axial force on the ring
2. Multi Plate Clutch:
When a large torque is to be transmitted the multi-plate clutch is being used. In this clutch the
number of frictional linings and the metal plates is increased, which increases the clutch capacity.
The outside discs are held by bolts and are fastened to the housing which is keyed to the
driving shaft. The multiple disc clutches are widely used in motor cars, machine too, etc.
The driving shaft also supports discs on the splines which rotate with the driven shaft and can
slide axially.
If the acting force on the pedal is removed, a spring presses the discs into contact with the
friction rings and the torque is transmitted between the engine shaft and the driven shaft. If n is the
total number of plates on the driving and driven members, then the number of active surface will be
n-1.
Friction Rings
Friction Lining
Spring
Driven
Shaft
Engine
Shaft
Disc
(Plate)
Flywheel
Multi-Plate Clutch
Question. A single plate clutch, with both sides effective, has outer and inner diameters 300mm
and 200mm respectively. The maximum intensity of pressure at any point in the contact
surface is not to exceed 0.1 N/mm2. If the coefficient of friction is 0.3, determine the
power transmitted by a clutch at a speed 2500 r.p.m.
300
Solution. Given data is, d1 = 300mm, r1 = = 150mm
2
200
d2 = 200mm, r2 = = 100mm
2
P = 0.1 N/mm2
µ = 0.3
N = 2500rpm
2 N 2  2500
So, =  = 261.8 rad/s
60 60
As the intensity of pressure is maximum, so the uniform wear,

Pr2 = C
or, C = 0.1 × 100 N/mm
Axial thrust,
W = 2C (r1 – r2) = 2 × 10 (150 – 100)
Mean radius for uniform wear,
r1  r2 150  100
R=  = 125m = 0.125m
2 2
Then the torque transmitted,
T = n.µ.W.R.
= 2 × 0.3 × 3142 × 0.125
= 235.65 N-m (n = 2, both side plate is effective)
 Power transmitted
P = T. = 235.65 × 261.8
= 61693 W = 61.693 kW
3. Cone Clutch:
Spring
Driven
Shaft
r1 r2
 w
Driving
Shaft
Driver
Conical b
Fractional Surface
The contact surface is in the form of cones, due to this it is known as cone clutch. When a cone
clutch is in the engaged position, the friction surfaces of the two cones are in complete contact due to
spring pressure. When the clutch is engaged, the transmission torque is transmitted from the driving
shaft to the driven shaft through the flywhee, and the friction cones.
The advantage of a cone clutch is that the normal force on the contact surface is increased
b
dl
dr
Pn
r1 r1 r2
r1
r2 r

 h1
Pn
dr
Fig. (1) Fig. (2)
Let, Pn = Intensity of pressure on the friciton surfaces.

r1 and r2 = Outer and Inner radius of friction surfaces
r1  r2
R = Mean Radius =
2
µ = Coefficient of friction between contact surfaces
 = Semi angle of cone
b = Face width of the clutch plate
Now, consider a small ring of radius r and thickness dr, (from fig.) and dl be the length of ring
of the friction surface.
So, dr = x sin
x = dr.cosec 
Area of ring = 2rx = 2rdr cosec 
Normal load on the ring
Wn = Normal Pressure × Area of the ring

or, Wn = PN . 2r . dr . cosec 
Horizontal component of this load will be axial load on the ring
so, W = Wn . sin  = Pn . 2r . dr . cosec  . sin 
W = Pn . 2r . dr
Total axial load taken by the clutch
r2
n 2 P
2 2 2 2
W =  Pn .2r.dr  2 (r1  r2 )  Pn (r1  r2 )
r 1
W
Pn = (r 2  r 2 )
1 2
Friction force on the ring acting normally

Fr = µ . Wn = µ . 2r . Pn . cosec  . dr
Frictional tongue on the ring
Tr = Fr . r = µ . Wn . r
= µ . 2r2 . Pn . cosec  . dr
Total frictional torque is given by
r1 r1
 r3 
T =  2 .  . Pn .cosec  . dr  2  .Pn .cosec   
r2  3  r2
2.Pn
= .cosec (r13  r23 )
3
Putting the value of Pn in above equation, we have,
2 W
T= . .cosec  (r13  r23 )
3 (r12  r22 )
2  (r1 )3  (r2 )3 
or, T = 3  W  cosec   2 2 
 (r1 )  (r2 ) 
ii. Considering Uniform Wear:

Let P is the intensity of pressure at radius r,
So, P.r = contant = c
c
or, P =
r
Axial load on the ring

W = Wn . sin 
= P . 2r . dr . cosec  . sin  (As, Wn = P2rdr cosec )
= 2r . P . dr
 C
= 2C . dr  As, P  
 r
Total thrust taken by the clutch,
r1
W =  2 c.dr  2C(r1  r2 )
r2
W
or, C = 2(r  r )
1 2
Friction force on the ring is given by,

Fr = µ . Wn = µ (2r . dr . cosec )
And the friction torque on the ring,
r1
2C
T =  2.  .c.cosec  . r . dr = cosec  (r12 -r22 )
r2 2
Substituting the value of C in above equation
W
T = µ cosec  (r12 -r22 )
2(r1  r2 )
W
or, T = cosec (r1 – r2 )  r12  r22  (r1  r2 )(r1  r2 ) 
2
 r1  r2 
where,   is the mean radius
 2 
Axial force required at the engagement of clutch is given by = W (1 + µ cot )
Force at the disengagement is given by = W (1 – µ cot )
Question. An engine developing 45 kW at 1000 rpm is fitted with a cone clutch built inside the
flywheel. The cone has a face angle of 12.5° and a maximum mean diameter of 500mm.
The coefficient of friction is 0.2. The normal pressure on the clutch face is not to
exceed 0.1 N/mm2. Determine.
i. The axial spring force necessary to engage to clutch
ii. The face width required.
Solution. Given data is, P = 45 kW = 45 × 103 watt.

N = 1000 rpm
2  1000
= = 104.7 rod/s
60
 = 12.5°
500
D = 500mm or, R = = 250 mm = 0.25 m
2
µ = 0.2
Pn = 0.1 N/mm2
i. The axial spring force necessary to engage the clutch.
As, torque developed by the clutch and normal load.
Power, P = T
or, 45 × 103 = T × 104.7
 T = 430 N-m
Now, Torque developed by the clutch (T)
T = µ . Wn . R
or, 430 = 0.2 × Wn × 0.25 = 0.05 Wn
430
Wn = = 8600 N
0.05
And, Axial spring force
We = Wn (sin  + µ cos )
= 8600 (sin 12.5° + 0.2 cos 12.5°)
= 3540 N Ans.
ii. Face width
Let b = Face width
As we know that normal load acting
Wn = Pn × 2 R.b
or, 8600 = 0.1 × 2 × 250 × b = 157 b
8600
 b= = 54.7 mm Ans.
157
4. Centrifugal Clutch:
Spider
Shoes
Rim
Spring
Centrifugal Clutch
According to above figure the driving shaft carries the spider, shoes and springs while the
driven shaft is connected to the pulley. Centrifugal clutch is being widely used in automobile and
machines, now a days. As the speed of shaft increases, the centrifugal force on the shoe increases.
When the centrifugal force exceds the resisting force of the springs, then the shoes moves ahead and
presses against inside of the rip, in this way the torque is transmitted to the Rim and then to the shaft.
In other words we can say that the clutch is engaged only when the motor gains the sufficinet speed
to take up the load in the effective manner.
Let, R = Inner radius of the pulley rim.
r = Distanc of center of mass of each shoe from the shaft axis.
m = Mass of each shoe.
n = No. of shoes
 = Normal speed of the shaft (rad/s)
 = Speed at which shoe moves ahead
µ = Coefficient of friction between the shoe and the rim
Centrifugal force exerted by each shoe = mr2
Centrifugal force exerted by each shoes at the time of engagement with the rim = mr2
So, Net normal fore by each shoe = mr2 – mr2

= mr (2 – 2)
Tangent friction force on each shoe = µ mr (2 – )2
Frictional torque on each shoe = µ mr (2 – 2) – R
Total frictional torque acting = µ mr (2 – 2) . R . n
If P be the maximum pressure intensity on shoes
then, mr (2 – 2) = P . lb
where, l = contact length of each shoe
b = contact width of each shoe
DIAPHRAGM CLUTCH
As we have discussed earlier about the centrifugal clutch which works on centrifugal force but
the diaphragam clutch works with spring force.
Working and Construction:
Diaphragm-spring clutch has similar construction of that of the multi-coil spring unit, but it
uses a single dished diaphragam-type spring to apply the clamping thrust. This spring also serves as
part of the release mechanism. Mainly the diaphragm clutch consists of a diaphragm on conical
spring which produces pressure on the pressure plate for engaging clutch. The spring is either tapered
finger type or crown type and is mounted on the pressure plate. When the clutch is engaged the spring
pivots on the rear pivot rings as it is held in the clutch cover, so that its outer rings contacts the
pressure plate. In this conical position of springs the clutch plate remains gripped between the flywheel
and the pressure plate.
Pivot
Diaphragm Rings
Spring
Driven Driving
Plate Plate
Pivot
Rings
Retaining
Bolt
When the clutch pedal is pressed the throw out bearing moves towards the flywheel, pressing
the center portion of the spring which causes the rim to move backward. This removes the pressure
on the pressure plate and the clutch is disengaged.

Advantage:
i. The diaphragm clutch no needs release levers because the spring it self acts as a series of
levers.
ii. The pressure of the spring increases until the flat position is reached and decreases as
this position is passed.
iii. The driver doesnot have to exert such heavy pedal pressure to hold the clutch disengaged
as with the coil spring type in which the spring pressure increases further when the pedal
is depressed disengage the clutch.
Question. On single plate clutch- The inner and outer radii of a single plate clutch are 40mm and
80mm respectively. Determine the maximum, minimum and the average presure when
the axial force is 3KN.
Solution. The maximum pressure will be at the inner radius.
Given data is, W = 3 kN = 3000 N
r2 = 40 mm = 0.04 m
r1 = 80 mm = 0.08 m
so, the axial thrust is
W = 2 Ps . r2 (r1 – r2)
3000 = 2 × P × 0.04 (0.08 – 0.04)
 Ps = 298.4 × 103 N/m2
or 298.4 KN/m2
 Maximum Pressure = 298.4 KN/m2
As from the concept we know that, the minimum presure will be at the outer radius.
F = 2 P0 r1 = (r1 – r2)
3000 = 2 × P0 × 0.08 (0.08 – 0.04)
P0 = 149.2 × 103 N/m2
or, 149.2 KN/m2
Total Normal Force 3000

The average pressure = = (0.08)2  (0.04) 2
Cross-section Area
= 198.9 × 103 N/m2

or, 198.9 KN/m2 Ans.
Bearing
A bearing is a machine element that constrains relative motion to only the desired motion, and
reduces friction between moving parts. The design of the bearing may, for example, provide for free
linear movement of the moving part or for free rotation around a fixed axis.
Generally speaking, a bearing is a device that is used to enable rotatinonal or linear movement,
while reducing friction and handling stress. Resembling wheels, bearing literally enable devices to
roll, which reduces the friction between the surface of the bearing and the surface it’s rolling over.
It’s significantly easier to move, both in a rotary or linear fashion, when friction is reduced, this also
enhances speed and efficiency.
Simple Pivot Bearing
When a rotating shaft is subjected to an axial load, the thrust (axial thrust) will develop. The
bearing surfaces such as pivot and collar bearing are used to take this axial thrust of the rotating
shaft. The word pivots mans, the bearing surfaces placed at the end of a shaft to take the axial thrust.
It is also known as foot step bearing.
dr
Shaft
Flat Pivot
Bearing
Let, P = Intensity of pressure per unit area of bearing surface between rubing surfaces.
R = Radius of bearing surface.
W = Load transmitted to bearing surfaces.

µ = Coefficine of friction
W
Pressure distribution, P=
R 2
As ring of radius is (r) and thickness (dr)
then area of bearing surfaces, A = 2r . dr
Load transmitted, W = P × A = P × 2 rdr
Friction resistance, Fr = µ . W = µP × 2r . dr = 2pµ . P . r . dr
 Frictional torque, Tr = Fr × r = 2µr . dr × r = 2µr2 dr
Integrating the above equation from O to R,
2
we have, Total frictional torque, T = × µ . P . R3
3
2 W  W 
= × µ × × R3  P  
3 R 2  R 2 
2
= ×µ.W.R
3
Rate of wearing depends upon the intensity of pressure (P) and the velocity of rubbing
surface (v)
So, the load transmitted to the ring
W = P × 2r . dr
C
= × 2r . dr = 2C . dr
r
R
 Total load, W =  2 C.dr  2C.R

0
W
 C=
2 R
Now, the frictional torque,
Tr = 2µpr2dr
C  C
= 2µ × × r2dr  p  
r  r
= 2µ . C . r . dr
 Total frictional torque,
R
T =  2 .c.r.dr
0
W .W.R  W 
= µ ×  R2   C  
2 R 2  2 R 
CONICAL PIVOT BEARING
Shaft
Conical
Bearing
dr
2
Pn
Pn
dr
Let, Pn = Intensity of pressure normal to cone

 = Semi angle of cone

R = Radius of the shaft
µ = coefficient of friction between the shaft and bearing
i. Considering Uniform Pressure
2
Total frictional torque, T= × µW.R.cosec a
3
ii. Considering Uniform Wear
1 1
Total frictional torque, T= × µ.W.R. cosec  = × µ.W..l
2 2
Flat Collar Bearing
Collar bearing are also used to take the axial thrust of the rotating shaft. It is also known as
thrust bearing.
r2
r1
Collar
dr
r2
r1
Let r1 = External radius of collar

r2 = Internal radius of collar
 Area of bearing, A =  [(r1)2 – (r2)2]
W W
So the pressure, P = A  [(r )2  (r )2 ]
1 2
Now, Frictional torque on the ring,

Tr = 2µ . p . r2 . dr
Total frictional torque is obtained, by integrating the above equation within the limit
from r2 to r1.
r1
 (r1 ) 3  (r2 ) 3 
 Total frictional turque T =  2µ.p.r 2 .dr  2.p  
r2  3 
After putting the value of p is above equation we have,
2  (r )3  (r2 )3 
T=  µ.W  1 2 2 
3  (r1 )  (r2 ) 
C
As we know that, W = Pr.2r.dr = . 2r.dr = 2c.dr
r
r1
Now, Total load transmitted W =  2cdr  2c(r1  r2 )

r2
W
 C=
2(r1  r2 )
As we know that frictional torque,

Tr = µ.dW.r = µ × 2c.dr.r = 2µ.c.r.dr
Total frictional torque is obtained, by integrating the above equation within the limit
from r2 to r1.
r1
T =  2µ.c.r.dr  µ.c[(r1 )2  (r2 ) 2 ]

r2
Putting the value of c in above equation we have,

W
T = µ × [(r1 )2  (r2 )2 ]
2(r1  r2 )
1
T= × µ.W (r1 + r2)
2
Question. A vertical shaft 200mm in diameter rotating at 120r.p.m. rests on a flat end footstep
bearing. The shaft carries a vertical load of 25kN. Assuming uniform pressure
distribution and coefficient of firction equal to 0.05, estimate the power lost in friction.
Solution. Give data is, D = 200mm or, R = 100mm = 0.1m
N = 120 r.p.m
2N 2  120
or, =   12.57 rad/s
60 60
W = 25kN = 25 × 103 N
µ = 0.05
For uniform pressure distribution
The total frictional torque,
2 2
T= × µ.W.R = × 0.05 × 25 × 103 × 0.1 = 83.33 N-m
3 3
Power lost in frictin,
P = T = 83.33 × 12.57 = 1047.46 Watt. Ans.
Question. A conical pivot bearing supports a vertical shaft of 250mm diameter. It is subjected to
a load of 50kN. The angle of the cone is 120° and the coefficient of friction is 0.03.
Find the power lost in friction when the speed is 200 r.p.m, assumiing (i) Uniform
pressure and (ii) Uniform wear.
Solution. Give data is, D = 250 mm, or, R = 125 mm = 0.125 n
3
W = 50kN = 50 × 10 N
2 = 120°
  = 60°
µ = 0.3
N = 200 r.p.m.
2N 2  200
 =  = 20.94 rad/s
60 60
i. Uniform Pressure:
2
As, total frictional torque, T= × µ.W.R cosec 
3
2
= × 0.03 × 50 × 103 × 0.125 × cosec 60°
3
= 144.375 N-m
Now, power lost in friction, P = T.w = 144.375 × 20.94 = 3023.212 Watt Ans.
ii. Uniform Wear:
1
Here, total frictional torque, T = × µ.W.R.cosec 
2
1
= × 0.03 × 50 × 103 × 0.125 × cosec 60°
2
= 108.28 N-m
 Power lost in friction, P = T. = 108.28 × 20.94 = 2267.38 Watt Ans.
Question. A shaft has a number of collars integral with it. The external diameter of the collar is
300mm and the shaft diameter is 200 mm. If the intensity of pressure is 0.30 N/mm2,
and the coefficient of friction is 0.05, estimate.
i. Power absorbed when the shaft runs at 100 r.p.m. carrying a load of 125 kN, and
ii. Number of collars required.
Solution. Give data is, d1 = 300 mm or, r1 = 150 mm
d2 = 200 mm or, r2 = 100 mm
2
P = 0.30 N/mm
µ = 0.05
N = 100 r.p.m
2N 2   100
or, =  = 10.47 rod/s
60 60
W = 125 kN = 125 × 103 N
i. Power Absorbed:
For uniform pressure, the total firctional torque required
2  (r )3  (r1 )3 
T=  µ.W  1 2 2 
3  (r1 )  (r2 ) 
2 3  (150)3  (100)3 
= 3  0.05  125 10  (150) 2  (100)2 
 
= 791.67 × 103 N-mm

= 791 N-m
 Power absorbed, P = T.w = 791 × 10.47 = 8281.77 W = 8.28 KW Ans.
ii. Number of Collars Required:
As we know that the intensity of uniform pressure.
W , where, n = Number of collar required

P
n.[(r1 ) 2  (r2 ) 2 ]
125  103 3.18

0.3 = n.[(150) 2  (100) 2 ]  n
3.18
 n= = 10.6  11
1 Ans.
0.3
Question. A thrust shaft of a ship has 6 collars of 600mm external diameter and 300mm internal
diameter. The total thrust from the propeller is 100 kN. If the coefficient of friction is
0.12 and speed of the engine is 900 r.p.m. Find the power absorbed in friction at the
thrust block.
Solution. Given data is, n = 6,
d1 = 600mm or, r1 = 300mm
d2 = 300mm or, r2 = 150mm
3
W = 100kN = 100 × 10 N
µ = 0.12
N = 90 r.p.m.
2  90
 = = 9.426 rad/s
60
i. Uniform Pressure:
As, total frictional torque transmitted,
2  (r )3  (r2 )3  2  (300)3  (150)3 

T=  / W  1 2 2 
  0.12  100 103  2 2 
3 (r
 1 )  (r2 )  3  (300)  (150) 
= 2800 × 103 N-mm = 2800 N-m

 Power absorbed in friction,
P = T. = 2800 × 9.426 = 26400 W = 26.4 kW
ii. Uniform Wear:
Total frictional torque transmitted,
1
T= × µ . W (r1 + r2)
2
1
= × 0.12 × 100 × 103 (300 + 150)
2
= 2700 × 103 N-mm = 2700 N-m
 Power absorbed in friction
P = T.
= 2700 × 9.426
= 25400 Watt
= 25.45 kW Ans.
EXERCISE
1. The simple band brake, as shown in figure, is applied to a shaft carrying a flywheel of
mass 400 kg. The radius of gyration of the flywheel is 450 mm and runs at 300 r.p.m.
If the coefficient of friction is 0.2 and the brake drum diameter is 240 mm, find:
1. the torque applied due to a hand load of 100 N,
2. the number of turns of the whell before it is brought to rest, and
3. the time required to bring it to rest, from the moment of the application of the
brake.
120 300
O
A C
T1
T2
100N
60°
90°
240
All dimensions in mm
Sol. Given : m = 400 kg; k = 450 mm = 0.45 m; N = 300 r.p.m. or  = 2 × 300/60 = 31.42 rad/s;
µ = 0.2; d = 240 mm = 0.24 m or r = 0.12 m
1. Torque applied due to hand load
First of all, let us find the tensions in the tight and slack sides of the band i.e., T1 and T2
respectively.
From the geometry of the figure, angle of lap of the band on the drum,

 = 360° – 150° = 210° = 210 × = 3.666 rad
180
 T1 
 2
 T1  0.7332
log  T   2.3 = 0.3188
 2
 T1 
or,   = 2.08 ...(i) ...(Taking antilog of 0.3188)
 T2 
Taking moments about the fulcrum O,
T2 × 120 = 100 × 300 = 30000
or, T2 = 30000/120 = 250N
 T1 = 2.08 T2 = 2.08 × 250 = 520 N ...[From equation (i)]
We know that torque applied,
TB = (T1 – T2) r = (520 – 250) 0.12 = 32.4 N-m Ans.
 Starting torque of the engine (T)
1500 = I. = 2500 ×  or  = 1500/2500 = 0.6 rad/s2 Ans.
2. Number of turns of the wheel before it is brought to rest
Let, n = Number of turns of the wheel before it is brought to rest.
1 1 1
=  I. 2   m.k 2 .2  × 400 (0.45)2 (31.42)2 = 40000 N-m
2 2 2
This energy is used to overcome the work done due to the braking torque (TB).
 40000 = TB × 2n = 32.4 × 2n = 203.6 n
or, n = 40000 / 203.6 = 196.2 Ans.
2. A simple band brake operates on adrum of 600 mm in diameter that is running at 200
r.p.m. The coefficinet of friction of is 0.25. The brake band has a contact of 270°, one end
is fastened to a fixed pin and the other end to the brake arm 125 mm from the fixed pin.
The straight brake arm is 750 mm long and placed perpendicular to the diameter that
bisects the angle of contact.
125 P
750
D
O B
T1 E T2 C
270°
300
All dimensions in mm
1. What is the pull necessary on the end of the brake arm to stop the sheel if 35 kW is
being absorbed? What is the directon for this minimum pull?
2. What width of steel band of 2.5 mm thick is required for this brake if the maximum
tensile stress is not to exceed 50 N/mm2?
Sol. Given: d = 600 mm or r = 300 mm; N = 200 r.p.m.;
µ = 0.25;  = 270° = 270 × /180 = 4.713 rad; Power = 35 kW = 35 × 103 W;
t = 2.5 mm;  = 50 N/mm2
1. Pull necessary on the end of the brake arm to stop the wheel
Let, P = Pull necessary on the end of the brake arm to stop the wheel.
The simple band brake is showin in figure. Since one end of the band is attached to the
fixed pin O, therefore the pull P on the end of the brake arm will act upward and when
the wheel rotates anticlockwise, the end of the band attached to O will be tight with
tension T1 and the end of theband attached to B will be slack with tension T2. First of all,
let us find the tensions T1 and T2. We know that
T 
2.3 log  1  = µ .  = 0.25 × 4.713 = 1.178
 T2 
 T  1.178 T1
 log  1   = 0.5122 or T = 3.25
 T2  2.3 2
...(Taking antilog of 0.5122) ...(i)

Let TB = Braking torque.
We know that power absorbed,
2 N.TB 2 200  TB
35 × 103 =  21 TB
60 60
 TB = 35 × 103 / 21 = 1667 N-m = 1667 × 103 N-mm
We also know that braking torque (TB),
1667 × 103 = (T1 – T2) r = (T1 – T2) 300
 T1 – T2 = 1167 × 103 / 300 = 5556 N ...(ii)
From equations (i) and (ii), we find that
T1 = 8025 N; and T2 = 2469 N
3. A single block brake is shown in figure. The diameter of the drum is 250 mm and the angle
of contact is 90°. If the operating force of 700 N is applied at the end of a lever and the
coefficient of friction between the drum and the lining is 0.35, determine the torque that
may be transmitted by the block brake.
200 250
Ft
50 RN
700N
O 2
125
All dimensions in mm.
Sol. Given : d = 250 mm or r = 125 mm; 2 = 90° = /2 rad; P = 700 N; µ = 0.35
Since the angle of contact is greater than 60°, therefore equivalent coefficient of friction,
4µsin  4  0.35  sin 45

µ =   0.385
2  sin 2  / 2  sin 90
Let, RN = Normal force pressing the block to the brake drum, and
Ft = Tangential braking force = µ . RN
Taking moments about the fulcrum O, we have
Ft F
700 (250 + 200) + Ft × 50 = RN × 200 =  200  t = 520 F
 0.385 t
520 Ft – 50 Ft = 700 × 450 or Ft = 700 × 450 / 470 = 670 N

We know that torque transmitted by the block brake,
TB = Ft × r = 670 × 125 = 83750 N-mm = 83.75 N-m Ans.
4. A bicycle and rider, travelling at 12 km/h on a level road, have a mass of 105 kg. A brake
is applied to the rear wheel which is 800 mm in diameter. The pressure on the brake is 80
N and the coefficient of friction is 0.06. Find the distance covered by the bicycle and
number of turns of its wheel before coming to rest.
Sol. m = 105 kg d = 0.8 m
12000
v= = 3.333 m/s Fr = 80 N = Rn
3600
µ = 0.06
Let s = Distance covered by the bicycle before it comes to rest.
Work done against friction = KE of the bicycle and the rider
1
µRnS = mv2
2
1
0.06 × 80 × s = × 105 × (3.333)2
2
s = 121.5 m
dn=s
or  × 0.8 × n = 121.5
n = 48.3 revolutions
5. A differential band brake has a drum with a diameter of 800 mm. The two ends of the
band are fixed to the pins on the opposite sides of the fulcrum of the lever at distances of
40 mm and 200 mm from the fulcrum. The angle of contact is 270° and the coefficient of
frictio is 0.2. Determine the brake torque when a force of 600 N is applied to the lever at
a distance of 800 mm from the fulcrum.
Sol. F = 600 N, l = 800 mm, r = 400 mm,  = 270° and µ = 0.2
 Assuming a = 200 mm and b = 40 mm, i.e,. a > b, F must act dowanwards to apply the brake.

T1 0.2270
 e  e 180
 2.57
T2
Counter-clockwise rotation of the drum

Taking moments about the fulcrum,
Fl – T1a + T2b = 0
600 × 800 – 2.57 T 2 × 200 + T2 × 40 = 0
or T2 = 1012.7 N and
T1 = 1012.7 × 2.57 = 2602.5 N
Braking torque, TB = (2602.5 – 1012.7) × 0.4 = 636 N.m
Clockwise rotation of the drum
Taking moments about the fulcrum O,
Fl + T1b – T2a = 0
600 × 800 + 2.57 T 2 × 40 + T2 × 200 = 0
or 600 × 800 = T2 (200 – 2.57 × 40)
or T2 = 4938 N and T1 = 4938 × 2.57 = 12691 N
TB = (T1 – T2) r = (12691 – 4938) × 0.4 = 3101 N.m
 Assuming a = 40 mm and b = 200 mm, i.e., a < b, F must act upwards to apply to brake.
Couter-clockwise rotation of the drum
600 × 800 + 2.57 T 2 × 40 – T2 × 200 = 0
or 600 × 800 = T2 (200 – 2.57 × 40)
or T2 = 4938 N and T1 = 4938 × 2.57 = 12691 N
Braking torque, TB = (T1 – T2) r = (12691 – 4938) × 0.4 = 3101 N.m
Cloclwise rotation of the drum
600 × 800 + T2 × 40 – 2.57 T2 × 200 = 0
or T2 = 1012.7 N
and T1 = 1012.7 × 2.57 = 2602.5 N
TB = (2602.5 – 1012.7) × 0.4 = 636 N.m
The above results show that the effectiveness of the brake in one direction of rotation is equal
to the effectiveness in the other direction if the distances of the pinns on the opposite sides of
the fulcrum are changed and the force is applied in the proper direction so that the band is
tightened.
6. A band and block brake having 12 blocks, each of which subtends an angle of 16° at the
centre, is applied to a rotating drum with a diameter of 600 mm. The blocks are 75 mm
thick. The drum and the flywheel mounted on the same shaft have a mass of 1800 kg and
have a combined radius of gyration of 600 mm. The two ends of the band are attached to
pins on the opposite sides of the brake fulcrum at distance of 40 mm and 150 mm from it.
If a force of 250 N is applied on the lever at a distance of 900 mm from the fulcrum, find
the
(i) maximum braking torque
(ii) angular retardation of the drum
(iii) time taken by the system to be stationary from the rated speed of 300 rpm.
Take coefficient of friction between the blocks and the drum as 0.3.
Sol. F = 250 N, d = 600 mm,  = 8°, t = 75 mm, l = 900 mm, k = 600 mm, m = 1800 kg, n = 12,
N = 300 rpm,  = 0.3
n
T12  1   tan    1  0.3tan 8 
(i)     = 2.752
T0  1   tan    1  0.3tan 8 
Assume a = 150 mm and b = 40 mm

As a > b, F must be downwards and the rotation is clockwise for maximum braking
torque. Taking moments about the fulcrum,
F × l – T0a + T12b = 0
250 × 900 – T0 × 150 + 2.752 T0 × 40 = 0
T0 (150 – 2.752 × 40) = 250 × 900

T0 = 5636 N
T12 = 5636 × 2.752 = 15511 N
d
Maximum braking torque, TB = (T12 – T0) ×
2
 0.6  0.075  2 
= (15511 – 5636) ×   = 3703 N.m
 2 
(ii) TB = I = mk2
3703 = 1800 × (0.6)2 × 
 = 5.71 rad/s2
(iii) Initial angular speed,
2 300
0 = = 31.4 rad/s
60
Final angular seed,  = 0
  = 0 –  t ( negative due to retardation)
or 0 = 31.4 – 5.71 t
t = 5.5 s
7. Refer given figure. A 70 cm brake drum has a contact angle 40°. It sustains 200 N-m of
torque at 500 r.p.m.
Clockwise
Rotation
cm R
70
µRn
For counter
clockwise rotation
Rn
P
C = 3.5cm µRn
0
a = 35 cm
b = 90 cm
For the coefficient of friction of 0.3, determine:

(i) the total normal force Rn on the shoe.
(ii) the required force to be applied for clockwise rotation.
(iii) the required force to be applied for counter-clockwise rotation.
(iv) the dimension c, required to make the brake self-locking.
(v) the rate of heat generated.
Sol. (i) Frictional brake torque TB = µRn . r.
Rn is assumed to act at the mid-point of the shoe since the angle of contact is less than 45°
Therefore, 200 × 100 = 0.3 Rn × 70 / 2
200 100  2
or, Rn =  1905 N
0.3  70
(ii) For clockwise rotation the sum of moment about O is to be equal to zero, for the lever to
be in equilibrium.
i.e., 0.3 × 1905 × 3.5 + P × 90 – 1905 × 35 = 0
1905  35  0.3 1905  3.5

Therefore, P= = 718 N
90
(iii) For counter-clockwise rotation direction, µRn shall be reversed.
µRn.c + Rn.a – P.b = 0
or, 0.3 × 1905 × 3.5 + 19.5 × 35 – P × 90 = 0
0.3  1905  3.5  19.5  35

Therefore, P=  763 N
90
(iv) For self-locking which is possible only for the clockwise rotation of the drum, we have
µc  a or c  a/µ
35
c= = 116.6 cm
0.3
R n  ( 70  500)
(v) Heat generated = kW = 0.3 × 1905 × kW = 10.47 kW
1000 100  1000  60
8. A simple band brake applied on a drum of diameter 600 mm is shown in figure. The drum
is rotating at 250 rpm. The angle of lap of the band on the drum is 270°. The co-efficient
of friction between the drum and the steel band lined with frictional material is 0.25. One
end of the band is fastened to a fixed pin (fulcrum) and the other end to the brake lever
arm at a distance of 150 mm from the fulcrum. The length of lever arm is 700 mm. The
lever arm is so placed that the diameter that bisects the angle of lap is perpendicular to
the lever arm. Determine:
(i) The effort needed and its direction at the end of the lever to stop the drum, if a power
of 35 kW has to be absorbed.
(ii) Width of the steel band if maximum tensile stress in the band is not to exceed
40 N/mm2. Assume band thickness as 2 mm.
Sol. For counter-clockwise rotation of the drum, the direction of effort of force P has to be upwards
and the end of the band fastened to fulcrum O1 is tight with tension T1. The outer end fastened
to A is slack with tension T2.
180mm 900mm
C
P
O1 O2
B
T1 T2
E F
600mm
0
=270°
T1
µ
Also, T2 = e
270
where, µ = 0.25,  = 270° = ×  rad = 4.71239 rad.
180
T1
Therefore, T2 = e(0.25 × 4.71239) = 3.2482
or T1 = 3.2482 T2
Also, power absorbed is given by
2NTB
Power =
60
where, Power = 35 kW = 35 × 103 W

or TB = brake torque, N = 250 rpm
2 250  TB
therefore, 35 × 103 =
60
35  103  60
or TB = = 1336.9 N-m
2 250
also, TB = (T1 – T2) . r
600
where, TB = 1336.9 N-m, T1 = 3.2482 T2, r = mm = 0.3 m
2
therefore, 1336.9 = (3.2482 T 2 – T2) × 0.3
1336.9
or, T2 = = 1982.2 N
0.3  2.2482
and T1 = 3.2482 T2 = 3.2482 × 1982.2 = 6438.5 N
Consider, the equilibrium of the brake lever, M = 0 for moments about fulcrum O1.
P . L – T2 . O1C = 0
where, L = 900 mm = 0.9 m, T2 = 1982.2 N1
and, O1C = perpendicular distance from O1 to the line of action of tension T2.
OA 180
we have OD =  mm = 90 mm
2 2
1
EOC = (360 – 270) = 45°
2
and, OCE = 45° because OEC = 90°
OD 90
thus, O1C =  = 127.28 mm = 0.12728 m
cos 45 cos 45
therefore, P × 0.9 = 1982.2 × 0.12728
1982.2  0.12728
or, P= = 230 N
0.9
we have, haximum tension
T1 = Max. tensile stress × area of cross section
or, T1 = Ft(max) × (b × t)
or, 6438.5 = 40 N/mm2 × (b mm × 2 mm)
6438.5
or, b= = 80.48 mm.
40  2
9. In a laboratory experiment, the following data were recorded with rope brake:
Diameter of of the flywheel 1.2 m; diameter of the rope 12.5 mm; speed of the engine 200
r.p.m.; dead load on the brake 600 N; spring balance reading 150 N. Calculate the brake
power of the engine.
Sol. Given: D = 1.2 m; d = 12.5 mm = 0.0125 m; N = 200 r.p.m; W = 600 N; S = 150 N
(W  S)(D  d)N (600  150)(1.2  0.0125)200

B.P. =  = 5714 W
60 60
= 5.715 kW Ans.
10. A single dry plate clutch transmits 7.5 kW at 900 r.p.m. The axial pressure is limited to
0.07 N/mm2. If the coefficient of friction is 0.25. Find 1. Mean radius and face width of the
friction lining assuming the ratio of the mean radius to the face width as 4, and 2. Outer
and inner radii of the clutch plate.
Sol. Given: P = 7.5 kW = 7.5 × 103 W; N = 900 r.p.m. or  = 2  × 900 / 60 = 94.26 rad/s;
p = 0.07 N/mm2; µ = 0.25
1. Mean radius and face width of the friction lining
Let, R = Mean radiu sof the friction lining in mm, and
w = Face width of the friction lining in mm,
Ratio of mean radius to the face width,
R/w = 4 ...(Given)
We know that the area of friction faces,
A = 2  R.w
 Normal or the axial force acting on the friction faces,
W = A × p = 2  R.w.p
We know that torque transmitted (considering uniform wear),
T = n.µ.W.R = n.µ (2R.w.p)R
 R   3
= n.µ  2R   p  R   n..p.R ...( w = R/4)
 4  2

= × 2 × 0.25 × 0.07 R3 = 0.055 R3 N-mm ...(i)
2
...( n = 2, for single plate clutch)
We also know that power transmitted (P),

7.5 × 103 = T. = T × 94.26
 T = 7.5 × 103/94.26 = 79.56 N-m = 79.56 × 103 N-mm ...(ii)
from equations (i) and (ii),
R3 = 79.56 × 103/0.055 = 1446.5 × 103 or R = 113 mm Ans.
and, w = R/4 = 113/4 = 28.25 mm Ans.
2. Outer and inner radii of the clutch plate
Let, r1 and r2 = Outer and inner radii of the clutch plate respectively.
Since the width of the clutch plate is equal to the difference of the outer and inner radii,
therefore, w = r1 – r2 = 28.25 mm ...(iii)
Also for uniform wear, the mean radius of the clutch plate,
r1  r2
R= or r1 + r2 = 2R = 2 ×113 = 226 mm ...(iv)
2
from equations (iii) and (iv),
r1 = 127.125 mm; r2 = 98.875 Ans.
11. A multiple disc clutch has five plates having four pairs of active friction surfaces. If the
intensity of pressure is not to exceed 0.127 N/mm2, find the power transmitted at 500
r.p.m. The outer and inner radii of friction surfaces are 125 mm and 75mm respectively.
Assume uniform wear and take coefficinet of friction = 0.3.
Sol. Given : n1 + n2 = 5; n = 4; p = 0.127 N/mm2; N = 500 r.p.m. or  = 2 × 500 × 60 = 52.4 rad/s;
r1 = 125 mm; r2 = 75 mm; µ = 0.3
Since the intensity of pressure is maximum at the inner radius r2,
therefore p.r2 = C or C = 0.127 × 75 = 9.525 N/mm
We know that axial force required to engage the clutch,
W = 2  C (r1 – r2) = 2  × 9.525 (125 – 75) = 2990 N
and mean radius of the friction surfaces,
r1  r2 125  75
R=  = 100 mm = 0.1 m
2 2
We know that torque transmitted,
T = n.µ.W.R = 4 × 0.3 × 2990 × 0.1 = 358.8 N-m
 Power transmitted,
P = T. = 358.8 × 52.4 = 18800 W = 18.8 kW Ans.
12. A multi-disc clutch has three discs on the driving shaft and two on the driven shaft. The
outside diameter of the contact surfaces is 240 mm and inside diameter 120 mm. Assuming
uniform wear and coefficient of friction as 0.3, find the maximum axial intensity of pressure
between the discs for transmitting 25 kW at 1575 r.p.m.
Sol. Given : n1 = 3; n2 = 2; d1 = 240 mm or r1 = 120 mm; d2 = 120 mm or r2 = 60 mm;
µ = 0.3; P = 25 kW = 25 × 103 W; N = 1575 r.p.m. or  = 2 × 1575/60 = 165 rad/s
Let, T = Torque transmitted in N-m, and
W = Axial force on each friction surface.
We know that the power transmitted (P),
25 × 103 = T. = T × 165
or, T = 25 × 103 / 165 = 151.5 N-m
Number of pairs of friction surfaces,
n = n1 + n2 – 1 = 3 + 2 – 1 = 4
and mean radius of friction surfaces for uniform wear,
r1  r2 120  60
R=  = 90 mm = 0.09 m
2 2
we knw that torque transmitted (T),
151.5 = n.µ.W.R = 4 × 0.3 × W × 0.09 = 0.108 W
 W = 151.5 / 0.108 = 1406 N
Let, p = Maximum axial intensity of pressure.
Since the intensity of pressure (p) is maximum at the inner radius (r2), therefore for uniform
wear
p.r2 = C or C = p × 60 = 60 p N/mm
We know that the axial force on each friction surface (W),
1403 = 2.C (r1 – r2) = 2 × 60 p (120 – 60) = 22622 p
 p = 1403/22622 = 0.062 N/m2 Ans.
Balancing and Vibrations 205
Balancing and Vibrations

7
BALANCING:
INTRODUCTION
The high speed running engines and several machine and machine parts are very common in
our environment now a days. And as we know from previous chapter the engines and machine
contains several rotating and reciprocating parts. So for the complete running of engines without
vibration and unpleasant sound the rotating and reciprocating ports should be balanced. If these
parts are not properly balanced, the dynamic forces are set up. These forces increases the load on
bearings and stresses in the various members, and it can also cause even dangerous vibration.
A particle or mass moving in a circular motion (path) experiences a centripetal acceleration
and a force is required to produce it. An equal and opposite force acting radially outward acts on the
axis of rotation and is known as centrifugal force. This is a disturbing force on the axis of rotation,
the magnitude of which is constant but the direction changes with the rotation of the mass.
In a revolving rotor, if the centre of the mass of the rotor lies on the axis of the shaft, the
centrifugal force remains balanced. But when the centre of mass doesnot lie on the axis of the shaft
or there is an eccentricity, an unbalanced force is produced. This type of unbalancing force is very
common.
Static Balancing
A system of rotating masses is said to be in static balance if the combined mass centre of the
system lies on the axis of rotation.
Dynamic Balancing
When several masses rotate in different plances, the centrifugal forces, in addition to being
out of balance, also form couples. System of rotating masses is in dynamic balance when there does
not exist any resultant centrifugal force as well as resultant couple.
Balancing of a single rotating mass by a single mass which is rotating in some plane
Let, m1 = Mass attached to a shaft rotating in  rad/s

r1 = Radius of rotation of the mass m, (Distance between the axis of rotation of the
shaft and the center of gravity of m1)
Disturbin
mass
m1 m1

r1
r1
Axis of Rotation
r2
r2
Balancing mass
m2
r2 = Radius of rotation of the balancing mass m2. (Distance between the axis of rotation
of the shaft and the centre of gravity of m2)
Now, The centrifugal force exerted by the mass m1 on the shaft.
FC1 = m1 . 2 . r1 ...(i)
The centrifugal force acts radially outword and it produces the bending moment on the shaft.
So for the equilibrium of the shaft a balancing mass (m2) may also attached in the same plane, such
that the centrifugal force due to the two masses are equal and opposite.
 Centrifugal force due to mass m2, FC2 = m2 . 2 . r2 ...(ii)
2 2
After equatin equation (i) and (ii) m1 .  . r1 = m2 .  . r2
 m1r1 = m2r2
Balancing of several masses rotating in same plane
The balancing of several masses rotating in same place, can be explained in wo ways.
1. Analytical Method 2. Graphical Method
One by one we will learn about both of the method.
Consider a number of masses of magnitude m1, m2, m3 and m4 at distance (say radius) of r1,
r2, r3 and r4. From the axis of rotating shaft. Let 1, 2, 3 and 4 be the angles of the given above
mentioned masses with the horizontal axis (line). These masses will rotate  rod/s angular velocity
about an axis perpendicular to plane of paper.
First we will discuss about the Analytical method:
i. First find out the centrifugal force (mr). 2 is same for each mass, so we can write m.r
as a cenrifugal force.
ii. Find H and V, i.e., resolve all the centrifugal force horizontally a nd vertically.
So, H = m1r1 cos1 + m2 . r2 cos2 + ........
and V = m1r1 sin1 + m2 . r2 sin2 + .........
iii. Find the resultant centrifugal force
FR = (  H) 2  (  V) 2
iv. The direction of the resultant force
V
tan = ( makes an angle from horizontal)
H
v. The balancing force is equal to the resultant force, but in opposite direction.
vi. Now, at lost find out the magnitude of balancing mass. Such that
FC = m.r where, m = Balancing mass
r = Radius of rotation
d
Resultant FC2
FC3 FC1 FC3

FC FC4
m2
m1
m3 r2 c
r3 r1 e
FC2
X
m4
r4 r
FC
b
FC4 m
FC1
FC
a
(a) Space Diagram (b) Vector Diagram
Graphical Method:
1. First draw the space diagram (Fig. a).
2. Find centrifugal force (m.r). exerted by each mass.
3. Draw the vector diagram with the obtained centrifugal forces. Assume some suitable
scale such that ab represents the centrifugal force exerted by mass m1 (m1 , r1) in
magnitude and direction. Similarly draw bc, cd and ae.
4. Now close the side ae as per the polygon law of forces, which represents the resultant
force in magnitude and direction. (Shown in fig. b)
5. The balancing force is then equal to the resultant force, but in opposite direction.
6. Now find out the magnitude of the balancing masses.
m.2.r = Resultant centrifugal force,
m.r = Resultant of m1r1, m2r2, m3r3, m4r4
Question. Four mases m1, m2, m3 and m4 are 200kg, 300kg, 240kg and 260kg respectively. The
corresponding radii of rotation are 0.2m, 0.15m, 0.25m and 0.3 respectively and the
angles between successive masses are 45°, 75° and 135°. Find the position and
magnitud eof the balance mass requried. If its radius of rotation is 0.2m.
Solution. The given data is m1 = 200kg, m2 = 300kg, m3 = 240kg, m4 = 260kg
r1 = 0.2m, r2 = 0.15m, r3 = 0.25m, r4 = 0.2m
1 = 0°, 2 = 45°, 3 = 75° + 45° = 120°
4 = 45° + 75° + 135° = 255°, r = 0.2m
240 kg
0.25 m 300 kg
120° 5m
0.1
 45°
255° 0.2 m
m 200 kg
0.2
0.3 m
260 kg
First we find the centrifugal force of each mases.

Let m = Balancing mass and
 = The angle which the balancing mas make with m1
Now, centrifugal force
m1 . r1 = 200 × 0.2 = 40 kg-m
m2 . r2 = 300 × 0.15 = 45 kg-m
m3 . r3 = 240 × 0.25 = 60 kg-m
m4 . r4 = 260 × 0.3 = 78 kg-m
Now, first we will draw the space diagram.
Analytical Method.
Resolving horizontal and vertical force.
H = m1, r1 cos1 + m2 r2 cos2 + m3r3 cos3
= 40cos0° + 45cos45° + 60cos120° + 78cos255°
= 40 + 3.8 – 30 – 20.2 = 21.6 kg-m
Again, V = m1r1sin1 + m2r2 sin2 + m3 r3 sin3 + m4r4 sin4
= 40 sin 0° + 45sin45° + 60sin120° + 78sin255°

= 0 + 31.8 + 52 – 75.3 = 8.5 kg-m
then, Resultant,
R= (  H) 2  (  V) 2  (21.6) 2  (8.5) 2  23.2 kg  m
As we know,
2 2
m.r = R = 23.2 or, m = 23  23 = 116 kg
r 0.2
 V 8.5
and, tan1 =   0.3935
 H 21.6
or, 1 = 21.48°
Since, 1 is the angle of the resultant R from the horiontal mass of 200 kg, therefore the angle
of the balancing mass from the horiozntal mass of 200kg.
 = 180° + 21.48° = 201.48°
Graphical Method:
The magnitude and position of the balancing mass can also be found out by graphical method also.
As above in the analytical method we have draw the space diagram, like that the same
diagram can also be drawn here also then again.
Find the centrifugal force of each masses.
i.e., m1 . r1 = 200 × 0.2 = 40 kg-m
m2 . r2 = 300 × 0.15 = 45 kg-m
m3 . r3 = 240 × 0.25 = 60 kg-m
m4 . r4 = 260 × 0.3 = 78 kg-m
Now, draw the vector diagram with the help of space diagram and assume the above value to
some suitable scale. The closing side of ae represents the resultant force, by measurement, we find
ae = 23 kg-m.
240 kg
0.25 m 300 kg
120° 5m
0.1
 45°
255° 0.2 m
m 200 kg
0.2
0.3 m
m
260 kg
60
78
c
Resultant
Force e
45
a 90 b
The balacing force is equal to the resultant force, but opposite in direction.
So, the balancing is m × 0.2 = vector ea = 23 kgm
 m = 115 kg Ans.
By measurement q = 201° Ans. [From horiozntal mass of 200 kg.]
VIBRATIONS
A to-and-fro motion in the body is said to be vibration.
When elastic bodies such as spring, a beam and a shaft are displaced from the equilibrium
position by the application of external forces and then released, they execute a vibratory motion.
Usually, vibration is due to elastic forces. Whenever a body is displaced from its equilibrium position,
work is done on the elastic constraints of the forces on the body and is stored as strain energy. Now,
if the body is released, the internal forces cause the body to move towards its equilibrium position. If
the motin is frictionless, the strain energy stored the period the body reaches the equilibrium position
at which it has maximum kinetic energy. The body passes through the mean position, the kinetic
energy is utilised to overcome the elastic forces and is stored in the form of strain energy and so on.
Some Definitions in Vibrations
i. Period - It is the time taken by a motion to repeat itself, and measured in seconds.
ii. Cycle - It is the motion completed during one time period.
iii. Frequency - It is the number of cycle of motion completed in one second. It is expressed
in hertz (Hz) and is equal to one cycle per second.
iv. Resonance - When the frrequency of the external force is the same as that of the
natural frequency of the system, a state of resonance is said to have been reached.
Resonance results in large amplitudes of vibrations and thus may be dangerous.
Types of Vibratory Motion
Following types of vibratory motions are important from subject point of view.
i. Free (Natural) Vibration: Elastic vibration in which there are no friction and external
forces are present, after giving it an initial displacement then the body is said to be under
free or natural vibration.
ii. Forced Vibration: When a body vibrates under the influence of external forces, then
the body is said to be under forced vibration.
iii. Damped Vibration: When the energy of a vibrating system is gradually dissipated by
friction and other resistances, the vibration are said to be damped. The vibration gradually
increases and the system rests in its equilibrium position.
Types of Free Vibration

There are three types of vibration are important from the subject point of view.
i. Longitudinal Vibration: When the particle or disc of the shaft moves parallel to the
axis of the shaft, then the vibrations are known as longitudinal vibrations.
Shaft
Extreme position A
Disc
Mean Position B
Extreme position
C
ii. Transverse Vibration: When the particle or disc move approximately perpendicular
to the axis of the shaft, then the vibrations are known as transverse vibrations.
C
A
Extreme B Extreme
Position Position
Mean
Position
iii. Torsional Vibrations: When the shaft is twisted and untwisted alternately and torsional
shear stresses are induced, the vibrations are known as torsional vibrations. The particles
of the body move in a circle about the axis of the shaft.
A Extreme Position
B Mean Position
C Extreme Position
Causes of Vibratons
The important causes of vibrations in machines are as follows:
i. Unbalanced rotating machine parts.
ii. Unbalanced reciprocating machine parts.
iii. Variation in the speed of rotation of the rotating machine parts.
iv. Loose fastenings of the moving parts.
v. Impact talking parts of the machines or explosion or impact of working fluids in prime movers.
vi. Incorrect alignment of the transmission elements such as couplings etc.
vii. Use of simple spur gears for power-transmission.
viii. Worn out teeth of the gears for power transmission.
ix. Loose transmission belts and chains.
x. Excessive clearance between the making parts having relative motion between them.
xi. Vibration waves from other sources and machines installed nearby due to improper,
isolation of the vibrations from them.
xii. Due to more material contact such as base plates on the fundations for the pedestal
bearings.
Harmful-Effects of Vibrations
i. Excessive stresses and strain in machine parts.
ii. Excessive wear of machine components resulting in reduction in their useful life.
iii. Fatigue failure of machine components, without perceptible indication or warning.
iv. Reduction in useful life of buildings and structures around the machines.
v. Poor finish on the work produced, in case of machine tools and other production machinery.
vi. Difficulty in precision work.
vii. Fluctuating reading of indicating instruments mounted on such machines.
Remedies of Vibrations
Some of the remedies of vibrations are as follows.
i. Balancing of unbalanced rotating masses.
ii. Partial balancing of reciprocating masses.
iii. Reducing variation in speed of the rotating masses.
iv. Correcting the mis-alignment of rotating component and checking it from time to time.
v. Proper tightening and locking of fastenings and periodically ensuring it agian.
vi. Using helical gears instead of simple spur gears.
vii. Replaicng gears having broken or worn out teeth.
viii. Tightening or replacing of loose belts in transmission systems or making use of belt
tightners such as Jockey Pulley system etc.
ix. Timely replacement of worn out moving parts, slides and bearings with excessive clearance.
x. Using silent chains for positive power - transmission instead of ordinary roller chain if
necessary.
EXERCISE
1. A cantilever shaft 50 mm diameter and 300 mm long has a disc of mass 100 kg at its
free end. T he Young’s modulus for the shaft mater ial is 200 GN/m2 . Determine the
frequency of longitudinal and transverse vibrations of the shaft.
Sol. Given : d = 50 mm = 0.05 m; l = 300 mm = 0.03 m; m = 100 kg;
E = 200 GN/m2 = 200 × 109 N/m2
We know that cross-sectional area of the shaft,
 2 
A =  d  (0.05)2 = 1.96 × 10–3 m2
4 4
and moment of inertia of the shaft,
 
I=  d 4  (0.05)4 = 0.3 × 10–6 m4
64 64
Frequency of longitudinal vibration
We know that static deflection of the shaft,
W.l 100  9.81  0.3
=  = 0.751 × 10–6 m
A.E. 1.96 10 3  200  109
...( W = m.g)
 Frequency of longidutional vibration,
0.4985 0.4985
fn =  = 575 Hz Ans.
 0.751106
Frequency of transverse vibration
We know that static deflection of the shaft,
W.l 3 100  9.81  (0.3)3
=  9 6
= 0.147 × 10–3 m
3E.I 3  200  10  0.3 10
 Frequency of transverse vibration,
0.4985 0.4985
fn =  = 41 Hz Ans.
 0.147 103
2. A disturbing mass of 500 kg attached to a shaft, is rotating at a uniform angular
velocity of  rad/sec. The distance of the centre of gravity of the disturbing mass
from axis of rotation is 250 mm. The disturbing mass is to be balanced by two masses
in two different planes parallel to the plane of rotation of the disturbing mass. The
distances of the centre of gravity of the balancing masses from the axis of rotation is
400 mm. The distance between the two plances of the balancing masses is 1500 mm
and the distance between the plane of the disturbing mass and one of the planes of
balancing mass is 300 mm. Determine:
1. The distance between the plane of disturbing mass and the plane of other
balancing mass.
2. The magnitude of the balancing masses when

(a) the planes of balancing masses are on the same side of plane disturbing mass.
(b) the planes of the balancing masses are on either side of the plane of the disturbing
mass.
Sol. When the planes of balancing masses are on the same side of the plane of disturbing mass, we
have
mr + Bmbm – Blbl = 0
500 × 0.25 + Bm × 0.4 – Bl × 0.4 = 0
Taking moments about O,
Bm2bmd = m2rxl
mrx l 500  0.25  0.3
or, Bm = b d  1.5  0.4 = 62.5 kg.
m
Subsituting in equation (i)

500 × 0.25 + 62.5 × 0.4 – Bl × 0.4 = 0
500  0.25  62.5  0.4
or, Bl = = 375 kg
0.4
(a) To determine the value of xm the distance between the plane of disturbing mass and the
plane of second balancing mass, we have
mrx m
Blbl =
d
Bl bl d 375  0.4  1.5
or xm =  = 1.8 m.
mr 500  0.25
(b) When the planes of balancing masses are on either side of the plane of the disturbing
mass, we have,
500  0.25  0.3
Bm = = 62.5 kg (same as before)
0.4  1.5
Also, Bl × bl + Bm × bm = m × r
i.e., Bl × 0.4 + Bm × 0.4 = 500 × 0.25
thereofre, Bl × 0.4 + 62.5 × 0.4 = 500 × 0.25
500  0.25  62.5  0.4

or, Bl = = 250 kg
0.4
Also, m × r × xm = Bl × bl × d
Bl  bl  d 250  0.4  1.5

or, xm =  = 1.2 m
m r 500  0.25
2013 (Even) THEORY OF MACHINE AND MECHANISM 217
2013 (Even)
Time : 3 Hours Pass Marks : 26 Full Marks : 80
Answer all 20 questions from Group-A. Each question carries 1 mark.

Answer any four questions from Group-B. Each question carries 5 marks.
Answer any four questions from Group-C. Each question carries 10 marks.
All parts of a question must be answered at one place in sequence, otherwise they may not be evaluated.
The figures in right hand margin indicate full marks.
2013 (Even)
GROUP-A
1. Choose the correct alternative : 1× 20 = 20
(i) Kinetic deals
(a) inertial forces (b) momentum
(c) motion (d) relative motion
Ans. (a) Inertial forces
Explanation : The study of forces which are produced due to inertia (initial forces) of moving parts of
machines is deal with by kinetics.
(ii) Kinematics deal
(a) internal stress (b) external stress
(c) relative motion (d) none of these
Ans. (c) Relative motion
Explanation : Kinematic deal with the study of relative motion of parts of which the machine are
constituted.
(iii) Plane motion is on
(a) single plane (b) double plane
(c) three planes (d) none of the above
Ans. (a) Single plane
Explanation : Rectilinear motion — Double plane
Helical motion — Three plane
(iv) Cross head is used in
(a) steam engine (b) IC engine
(c) turbine (d) none of the above
Ans. (a) Steam engine
218 THEORY OF MACHINE AND MECHANISM 2013 (Even)
Explanation : In steam engine :

Piston → piston rod → cross-head → connecting rod → crank shaft.
(v) Lower pair has
(a) point contact (b) surface contact
(c) line contact (d) none of the above
Ans. (b) Surface contact
Explanation : Surface contact — lower pair
Point or line contact — higher pair
(vi) Belt drive is
(a) lower pair (b) higher pair
(c) spherical pair (d) none of these
Ans. (b) Higher pair
Explanation : Belt drive is line contact when relative motion takes place and the motion between belt and
pulley is partly turning and partly sliding, then the pair is known as higher pair.
(vii) Bush bearing is
(a) higher pair (b) lower pair
(c) spherical pair (d) none of these
Ans. (c) Spherical pair
(viii) Friction angle depends on
(a) inclination of plane (b) nature of surface
(c) load (d) none of these
Ans. (a) Inclination of plane
(ix) In V-threaded screw jack, load is
(a) lesser than square thread
(b) higher than square thread
(c) both (a) and (b)
(d) none of the above
Ans. (a) Lesser than square thread
(x) Self locking is related with
(a) pump (b) engine
(c) screw jack (d) none of these
Ans. (c) Screw jack
(xi) Maximum efficiency of screw jack is
1 + tan ϕ 1 − cos ϕ
(a) (b)
1 − tan ϕ 1 + cos ϕ
sec ϕ − tan ϕ
(c) (d) 90%
sec ϕ + tan ϕ
sec ϕ − tan ϕ
Ans. (c)
sec ϕ + tan ϕ
Explanation : We know that

1 − sin ϕ
η max =
1 + sin ϕ
1 − sin ϕ
cos ϕ
= (Dividing the numerator and denominator by cos ϕ)
1 + sin ϕ
cos ϕ
1 sin ϕ
−
cos ϕ cos ϕ sec φ − tan φ
= = .
1 sin ϕ sec φ + tan φ
+
cos ϕ cos ϕ
(xii) Slip in belt due to

(a) elongation (b) creep
(c) tension (d) none of these
Ans. (a) Elongation
(xiii) Centrifugal tension in belt increases the
(a) T1 (b) T2
T1 + T2 T2
(c) (d)
2 T1
T1 + T2
Ans. (c)
2
(xiv) Maximum power by belt depends on
(a) initial tension (b) centrifugal tension
(c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of these
Ans. (c) both (a) and (b).

(xv) Block brakes are
(a) radial (b) conical
(c) flat (d) none of these
Ans. (a) Redial

(xvi) Disc brakes are example of
(a) radial brakes (b) conical brakes
(c) flat brakes (d) none of these
Ans. (d) None of these

Explanation : Disc brakes are example of axial brakes.
(xvii) Circular pitch in gear depends on
(a) module (b) pitch circle diameter
(c) no. of teeth (d) all of the above
Ans. (a) All of the above

πD
Explanation : Circular pitch (PC ) =
T
Where, D = Diameter of pitch circle

T = Number of teeth on the wheel
D
and, Module (m) = .
T
(xviii) Involute teeth is ......... than cycloidal teeth.

(a) weaker (b) stronger
(c) longer (d) smaller
Ans. (a) Weaker
Explanation : Involute teeth is weaker than cycloidal teeth for the same pitch, Due to this reason, the
cycloidal teeth are preferred specially for cast iron.
(xix) Size of flywheel in single cylinder engine is
(a) big (b) small
(c) big and heavy (d) none of these
Ans. (b) Small
(xx) On pitch point, gears

(a) slide (b) roll
(c) both (a) and (b) (d) all of the above
Ans. (a) Slide
GROUP-B
Answer any four questions : 5 × 4 = 20

2. A square threaded screw jack having pitch 1.0 cm and mean diameter 5 cm, find velocity ratio for
double start. 5
Ans. Given data :
Pitch (Pc ) = 1.0 cm
Mean diameter ( d m ) = 5 cm
Let α = helix angle

We know that,
2Pc 2×1
tan α = = = 0.127
π dm π ×5
We know that velocity ratio
1 1
V.R. = = = 7.65.
tan α 0 .127
3. A porter governor of equal sided parallelogram having ball mass 2.5 kg, central weight 25 kg and
arms are 30 cm long is running at 150 rpm. Find effort of governor for 10% increase in speed. 5
Ans. Given data :

Mass of ball (w) = 2.5 kg
Central weight (W) = 25 kg
Increase speed (x) = 10% = 0.1
We know that effort of governor
= x (w + W ) g
= 0. 1( 2. 5 + 25) × 9. 81
= 26.98 N.
4. A open belt having tension in tight and slack side and 5 kg/cm and 4 kg/cm respectively. If thickness
of belt is 1.25 cm and width of belt is 70 cm, then find the stresses in belt. 5
Ans. Given data :

Tension in tight side (T1 ) = 5 kg/cm = 5 b kg
Tension in slack side (T2 ) = 4 kg/cm = 4 b kg
Thickness of belt (t) = 1.25 cm
Width of belt (b) = 70 cm.
We know that, A = bt
= 70 × 1. 25 = 87.5 cm2
Let σ1 = stress in tight side in belt
σ2 = ” slack ” ”
We know that stress in tight side in belt
T1 5b 5 × 70
σ1 = = =
A 87. 5 87. 5
= 4 kg/cm2.
And stress in slack side in belt
T2 4b
σ2 = =
A 87. 5
4 × 70
= = 3.2 kg/cm2.
87. 5
5. Show on diagram pressure angle, pitch point, common tangent of toothed gearing system. 5
Ans.
6. A turning moment diagram for engine consists two isosceles triangle. Base of the triangle θ = 0° to
θ = 180° and θ = 180° to θ = 360°, then find the energy stored in flywheel for height of triangle is 100
kg-m. 5
Ans. Given data :
T = 100 kg-m
θ = 2π
Let Tm = mean torque.
We know that work done
W = Tm × 2π ... (i)
From figure work done,

1
W = π × 100 × 2
2
⇒ W =100π ... (ii)

Now equating equation (i) and (ii), we get
Tm × 2π = 100π
∴ Tm = 50 kg-m.
We know that energy stored in flywheel
1 π
= × ×T
2 2 m
1 π
= × × 50 = 39.6299 kg-m.
2 2
7. A driver pulley having speed 1400 rpm and driven pulley 450 rpm. Maximum linear speed of belt is
22 m/s, find the diameter of driven pulley if thickness of belt is 8 mm and slip 5%. 5
Ans. Given data :

Speed of driver pulley (N1) = 1400 rpm
Speed of driven pulley (N2) = 450 rpm
Linear speed of belt (V) = 22 m/s
= 22 × 60 m/min
= 1320 m/min.
Thickness of belt (t) = 8 mm = 0.008 m
Slip = 5%.
We know that the velocity of the belt passing over the driven
S
π d2N2 = V − V ×
100
5
⇒ π × d 2 × 450 = 1350 − 1350 ×
100
⇒ π × d 2 × 450 = 1282 . 5
1282. 5
⇒ d2 =
π × 450
= 0.9071 m = 90.71 cm.
GROUP-C
Answer any four questions : 10 × 4 = 40
T1
8. Prove that loge = µθ for belt,
T2
where θ = angle of contact,
µ = coefficient of friction. 10
Ans. Consider a driven pulley rotating in the clock wise direction
Let T1 = Tension in the belt on the tight side
T2 = Tension in the belt on the block side.
T = tension in the belt at point P
T + ST = tension in the belt at point Q
R N = normal tension
F = µR N = frictional force
µ = co-efficient of friction
dθ = angle of contact in radians.
Resolving all horizontal force
dθ dθ
F + T cos = (T + δT ) cos
2 2
dθ dθ
⇒ F = (T + δT ) cos− T cos
2 2
dθ dθ dθ
⇒ F = T cos + δT cos − T cos
2 2
dθ
∴ F = δT cos ... (i)
2
dθ
Since the angle is very small theoretically substituting cos = 1 in equ. (i)
2
∴ F = δT × 1
⇒ µR N = δT [Q F = µR N ]
δT
∴ RN = ... (ii)
µ
Resolving all vertical force,
dθ dθ
R N = T sin + (T + δT ) sin
2 2
dθ dθ dθ
⇒ R N = T sin + T sin + δT sin ... (iii)
2 2 2
dθ dθ
Since the dθ is very small, theoretical substituting sin = in equ. (iii)
2 2
dθ dθ
∴ R N = 2T ⋅ + δT ⋅
2 2
⇒ R N = Tdθ ... (iv) [Q δT ⋅ dθ ≈ 0]
Equating equation (ii) and (iv), we get
δT δT
= Tdθ ⇒ = µdθ.
µ T
Integrating both side from 2 to 1
1 δT θ
∫2 = µ ∫0 dθ
T
 T1  T1
⇒ log e   = µθ ∴ = eµθ
 T2  T2
This is the required result.
9. A screw jack is used to raise 5 tonne of load. Spindle of screw jack is 6 cm mean diameter and 2.0 cm
pitch. The coefficient of friction between nut and screw and collar are 0.12 and 0.10 respectively. If
the length of lever is 50 cm and screw is single start square thread. Find the applied force of lever for
load rotates with spindle. 10
Ans. Given data :
Load to be lifted (W ) = 5 tonne = 5000 kg
Pitch ( PC ) = 2 cm
Coefficient of friction between nut and screw
( µ ) = 0.12
Coefficient of friction collar
( µC ) = 0.10
Length of lever ( l ) = 50 cm
We know that,
PC 2
tan α = =
πd m π ×6
 2 
∴ α = tan −1   = 6.05°
 π × 6
and tan ϕ = 0.12

ϕ = tan −1 ( 0.12 ) = 6.84°.
Let P1 = applied force on lever.
dm
We know that, P1 × l = W tan (α + ϕ ) ×
2
6
⇒ P1 × 50 = 5000 × tan ( 6.05 + 6.84 ) ×
2
⇒ P1 × 50 = 15000 × tan (12.89 )
⇒ P1 × 50 = 8314.6
8314.6
⇒ P1 = = 166.29 kg.
50
Note : The load rotates with spindel so does not the torque required to over come friction at the collar.
10. The arms of a porter governor are 30 cm long. The upper arms are pivoted on axis and lower arms at
a distance of 4 cm from axis. ball weight 10 kg, sleeve weight 75 kg and frictional force 5 kg at the
sleeve. Find the equilibrium speed for 22.5 cm radius of rotation and speed to ascend. 10
Ans. Given data :
Ball weight ( w ) = 10 kg
Sleeve weight (W ) = 75 kg
Frictional force ( f ) = 5 kg
Radius of rotation ( r ) = 22.5 cm.
22.5
We know that sin α =
30
 22.5 
α = sin −1  = 48.59°
 30 
r − 4 22.5 − 4 18.5
and sin β = = =
30 30 30
18.5 
∴ β = sin −1  = 38.07°.
 30 
Equilibrium speed ( f = 0)
We know that,
w 2 W
ω × r = w tan α + (tan α + tan β )
g 2
10 72
⇒ × ω 2 × 22.5 = 10 tan ( 48.59 ) + {tan( 48.59 ) + tan(38.8 )}
980 2
25 2 83.23 × 109
⇒ ω = 83.23 ⇒ ω 2 =
109 25
83.23 × 109
⇒ ω= = 19.04 rad/s.
25
ω × 60 19.04 × 60
We know that N = = = 181.9 ≈ 182 rpm.
2π 2π
11. The drum of a band and block brake having 14 blocks, each block subtends 15° at the centre. If the
coefficient of friction is 0.25, find the tension ratio from first principle. 10
Ans. Let there are n number of blocks each subtending an angle 2θ at the centre and the drum rotates in
clockwise directions.
Let T0 = tension in the tight side

Tn = tension in the slack side
µ = co-efficient of friction between the block and drum
T1 = tension in the block between the first and second block
T2 , T3 etc = tension in the band between the second and third block
between the third and fourth block etc.
Consider one of the block (take first block). This is in equilibrium under the action of the following forces:
(1) Tension in the tight side (T0 )
(2) Tension in the slack side (T1 )
(3) Normal reaction of the drum on the block ( R )
(4) Force of friction.
Resolving in vertical component
R = T1 sin θ + T0 sin θ
⇒ R = (T1 + T0 ) sin θ ... (i)

Resolving in horizontal component
T1 cos θ = T0 cos θ + f
⇒ T1 cos θ = T0 cos θ + µR
⇒ µR = (T1 − T0 ) cos θ ... (ii)
Dividing equation (i) and (ii), we get
1  T1 + T0 
=  tan θ
µ  T1 − T0 
T1 + T0 1
⇒ = .
T1 − T0 µ tan θ
By componend and devedendo
T1 1 + µ tan θ
= .
T0 1 − µ tan θ
T2 1 + µ tan θ
Similarly, =
T1 1 − µ tan θ
... ... ... ... ...
... ... ... ... ...
Tn 1 + µ tan θ
= .
Tn − 1 1 − µ tan θ
By multiplying,
n
Tn 1 + µ tan θ 
=  .
T0 1 − µ tan θ 
This is result.
Given data :
No. of blocks (n) = 14
2θ = 15°
∴ θ = 7.5°
µ = 0.25
14
T141 + 0.25 tan (7.5) 
∴ =  = 2.5
T0 1 − 0.25 tan (7.5) 
12. Following data relate to a 20° involute gears in mesh in which pinion is driven :
Gear ratio 2.5
Length of arc of approach in terms of module 3π
Find the number of teeth on pinion and gear for just avoid interference. 10
Ans. Given data : θ = 20°
G = 2.5
Length of arc of approach = 3π m
Let t = number of teeth on pinon
T = number of teeth on gear.
When just to avoid interference.
We known that
r sin ϕ
Length of the arc of approach =
cos ϕ
r sin ϕ
⇒ 3πm =
cos ϕ
⇒ r ⋅ tan ϕ = 3πm
mt mt
⇒ tan ϕ = 3πm [Q r = ]
2 2
t
⇒ tan ϕ = 3π
2
3π 3π
⇒ t= ×2= ×2
tan ϕ tan 20°
= 51.79 ≈ 52.
∴ We know that T = Gt
= 2.5 × 52 = 130.
13. The areas above and below the line of mean resistance taken in order are 3.1, 2.05, 2.2, 2.95, 1.22,
2.44, 2.25 and 1.33 cm2 of turning moment diagram.
The scale of diagram :
Turning moment 1 cm = 1000 kg-m
Crank angle 1 cm = 24°
The mean speed is 180 rpm and total fluctuation of speed is 6%, then find energy stored in flywheel.10
Ans. Given data :

Mean speed ( N ) = 180 rpm
Total fluctuation = 6%
Cranck angle 1 cm = 24°
Energy at A = e
Energy at B = e + 3.1
Energy at C = e +1.05
Energy at D = e + 3.25 = Maximum energy
Energy at E = e + 0.3
Energy at F = e +1.52
Energy at G = e − 0.92 = Minimum energy
Energy at H = e −1.33
Energy at I = e
∴ Maximum energy at D = e + 3.25
Minimum energy at G = e − 0.92
We know that energy stored in fly wheel
= excess energy
= ( e + 3.25) − ( e − 0.92)
= 4.17 cm 2
= 4.17 cm × cm
π
= 4.17 × 1000 × 24 × kg-m
180
=1746.72 kg-m.
o
2012 (Even)

2012 (Even)
GROUP-A
1. Choose the most appropriate answer from given choice : 1× 20 = 20
(i) Statics deals
(a) the motion (b) forces with zero mass
(c) the motion with mass (d) none of these
Ans. (b) forces with zero mass
(ii) Kinetics deals
(a) inertial forces (b) constant forces
(c) concurrent forces (d) all of the above
Ans. (a) inertial forces
(iii) Higher pair has
(a) surface contact (b) line contact
(c) point contact (d) both (b) and (c)
Ans. (d) both (b) and (c)
(iv) Belt drive is
(c) turning pair (d) none of these
Ans. (a) higher pair
(v) Angle of repose (α) in friction on inclined plane is :
(a) α > φ (b) α < φ
(c) α = φ (d) none of these
Ans. (c) α = φ
Explanation : When the angle of inclination of the plane is equal to the angle of friction is know as angle
of repose.
(vi) Maximum efficiency of screw jack is

1 + sin ϕ 1 − sin ϕ
(a) (b)
1 − sin ϕ 1 + tan ϕ
1 − sin ϕ
(c) (d) all of the above
1 + sin ϕ
1− sin ϕ
Ans. (c)
1+ sin ϕ
(vii) Mechanical advantage is ratio of
effort load
(a) (b)
load length of lever
load
(c) (d) none of these
effort
load
Ans. (c)
effort
(viii) Turn buckle is used to
(a) tighten the rod (b) lift the load
(c) loose the rod (d) all of the above
Ans. (d) all of the above
(ix) In self locking of screw jack load
(a) remains stable (b) lowers suddenly
(c) raises suddenly (d) all of the above
Ans. (a) remains stable
(x) Centrifugal tension in belt increases
(a) total tension (b) slack side tension
(c) tight side tension (d) all of the above
Ans. (a) total tension
(xi) Slip is due to
(a) lack of tension in belt (b) uneven elongation in belt
(c) high speed of belt (d) all of the above
(xii) Slip in belt is the effect of
(a) creep (b) tension
(c) centrifugal tension (d) all of the above
Ans. (b) tension
(xiii) Watt governor is
(a) ideal (b) sleeve weightless
(c) all arms equal (d) all of the above
(xiv) Peter is
(a) slow speed governor (b) high speed governor
(c) zero speed governor (d) none of these
Ans. (d) none of these
Explanation : Portor governor is middle speed governor.
(xv) Isochronous governor has
(a) different speed (b) same speed
(c) zero speed (d) none of these
Ans. (b) same speed
Explanation : When the equilibrium speed is constant for all radius of rotation of the ball within the
working range, neglecting friction is known as isochronous governors.
(xvi) Excess energy of a prime mover stored in
(a) governor (b) crank
(c) flywheel (d) none of these
Ans. (c) flywheel
(xvii) Module is the unit of
(a) gear (b) teeth
(c) circular pitch (d) none of these
Ans. (a) gear
(xviii) Diametral pitch is
teeth diameter
(a) (b)
diameter teeth
module
teeth
teeth
Ans. (a)
diameter
Explanation : Diametral pitch is the ratio of number of teeth to the pitch circle diameter in millimeters.
(xix) Pressure angle of involute teeth ............ .
(a) varies (b) remains constant
(c) is very small (d) none of these
Ans. (b) remains constant
(xx) Straight line motion mechanism is
Ans. (a) higher pair
GROUP-B
Answer any four of the following questions : 5 × 4 = 20

2. A screw jack is double start having pitch 1 cm and mean diameter 5 cm, find helix angle of thread. 5
Ans. Given data :
Pitch (Pc ) = 1.0 cm
We know that,
2Pc 2×1
tan α = =
π dm π ×5
 2
∴ α = tan −1   = 7.25°
 5π 
3. Define self locking and overhauling. 5
Ans. Self locking : When friction angle (ϕ ) is greater than helix angle (α ) then a screw will be self locking
ϕ >α
Overhauling : When friction angle (ϕ ) is less than helix angle (α ) then a screw will be overhauling. In
overhauling the load will start moving down ward with the application of any torque.
ϕ <α
4. Find the lift of sleeve of equal sided porter governor of length 25 cm and radii of rotations at lowest
and highest positions 10 cm and 15 cm respectively. 5
Ans. Given data :

Length of arms = 25 cm
Radius of rotation at lowest point = 10 cm
Radius of rotation at highest point = 15 cm.
From figure, h1 = 252 − 152 = 20 cm
and h2 = 252 − 102 = 22.91 cm.

We know that lift of sleeve
h = 2( h2 − h1 )
= 2 ( 22.91 − 20) = 2 × 2.91 = 5.82 cm.
5. A block and band brake has 14 blocks and each block subtends 14° if the coefficient of friction is 0.25
then find the tension ratio. 5
Ans. Given data :
No. of blocks ( n ) = 14
Subtends angle (ϕ ) = 14°
Coefficient of friction ( µ ) = 0.25
We know that tension ratio
n
Tn 1 + µ tan ϕ 
= 
T0 1 − µ tan ϕ 
14
1 + 0.25 tan 14 
= 
1 − 0.25 tan 14 
= 5.74.
6. Two meshing gear, pinion has 20 teeth as driver and module is 5 mm, then for avoiding just
interference find the length of approach. Given pressure angle 20°. 5
Ans. No. of teeth ( t ) = 20
Module ( m ) = 5 mm
Pressure angle (ϕ ) = 20°
We know that
mt 5 × 20
r= = = 50 mm.
2 2
We know that length of approach
r sin ϕ 50 sin 20°
= = = 8.55 mm.7.
2 2
Define isochronous and sensitiveness of governor. 5
Ans. Isochronous governors : The isochronous governors is defined as the equilibrium speed is constant
for all radii of rotation of the balls within the working range, neglecting friction,
Let r = mean radius
r1 = maximum radius
r2 = minimum radius
N = speed of governor at r radius
= speed of governor at r1 radius
For isochronism, range of speed should be zero
i.e., ∴ N 2 − N 1 = 0
⇒ N 2 = N1
∴ h1 = h2 which is impossible in case of porter governor.
Hence a porter governor cannot be isochronous.
Sensitiveness of governors : The sensitiveness is defined as the ratio of the difference between the
maximum and minimum equilibrium speed to the mean equilibrium speed.
Let N = mean equilibrium speed
N 1 = maximum equilibrium speed
N 2 = minimum equilibrium speed
N1 + N 2
∴ N=
2
∴ Sensentiveness pf governor
N1 + N 2 N 1 − N 2 2( N 1 − N 2 )
= = = .
N N1 + N 2 N1 + N 2
2
GROUP-C

8. A simple screw jack has square thread of single start of mean diameter 5 cm and pitch 1.2 cm.
Friction between screw and nut is 0.12. Find the torque required to raise 2500 kg load. If the load
rotates with spindle. 10
Ans. Given data :

Pitch ( Pc ) =1.2 cm.
Coefficient of friction between nut and screw
( µ ) = 0.12
Load to be lifted (W ) = 2500 kg.
We know that,
PC
tan α =
πd m
 1.2 
∴ α = tan −1   = 4.37°
 π × 5
and tan ϕ = 0.12

∴ ϕ = tan −1 ( 0.12 ) = 6.84° .
We know that torque,
= P1 × l
dm
= W tan (α + ϕ ) ×
2
5
= 2500 tan ( 4.37 + 6.84 ) ×
2
= 1238.67 kg-m.
9. A porter governor has equal arms of length 30 cm running at radius 20 cm with sleeve weight 25 kg. If
ball weight 2.5 kg and frictional torque in sleeve 2.5 kg, then find ascending and descending speed. 10
Ans. Given data :

Sleeve weight (W ) = 25 kg
Ball weight ( w ) = 2.5 kg
Frictional torque ( F ) = 2.5 kg
Length of equal arms = 30 cm
Radius of rotation ( r ) = 20 cm
We know that,
20
sin α = sin β =
30
 20 
∴ α = β = sin −1   = 41.81°.
 30 
We know that ascending speed
w W +F
× ω 12 × r = w sin α + (tan α + tan β)
g 2
2.5 25 + 2.55
⇒ × ω 12 × 20 = 2 . 5 tan ( 41.81)° + {tan (41.81)° + tan (41.81)°}
198 2
50 2
⇒ ω = 26.83
981 1
⇒ ω 1 = 526 . 4 = 22.94 rad/s.
w1 × 60 22.94 × 60
∴ N1 = =
2π 2π
= 219.09 ≈ 220 rpm.
We know that descending speed

w W −F
× ω 22 × r = w tan α + (tan α + tan β)
g 2
2.5 25 − 2.5
⇒ × ω 22 × 20 = 2.5 tan ( 41. 81)° +
981 2
{tan (41.81)° + tan (41.81)°}
50 2
⇒ ω = 22.36
981 2
22.36 × 981
⇒ ω 22 =
50
⇒ ω 2 = 438.7 = 20.95 rad/s
ω 2 × 60 20.95 × 60
N2 = =
2π 2π
= 200.01 ≈ 201rpm.
T1
10. Prove that = eµθ
T2
where T1 = tension in tight side
T2 = tension in slack side
µ = coefficient of friction
θ = angle of contact. 10
Ans. See Q.No. 8, Group-C of 2013 (Even).

11. A turning moment diagram of engine assumed as two isoceles triangle of maximum height 100 kg-m.
Crank rotation for triangles are assumed as θ = 0° to 180° and θ = 180° to 360°. The engine runs 200
rpm and total fluctuation of speed is 3%, then find I.H.P. of engine. 10
Ans. Given data :
T = 100 kg-m
θ = 2π
Let Tm = mean torque
Speed ( N ) = 200 rpm.
We know that workdone
W = Tm × 2π ... (i)
From figure workdone,

1
W= π × 100 × 2
2
⇒ W =100π ... (ii)
Tm × 2π = 100π
∴ Tm = 50 kg-m.
We know that I.H.P.
= Tm × ω
2π × N 2π × 200
= Tm × = 50 ×
60 60
=1047.198 kg-m/s
=13.96 H.P.
12. Two gear meshing in which pinion as driver has pressure angle 20° and length of arc of approach is
1.1 times of circular pitch. If the gear ratio is 2.5 then find
(a) no. the teeth on pinion and gear
(b) addendum on pinion in terms of circular pitch. 10
Ans. Given data :

Pressure angle (ϕ ) = 20°
T 
Gear ratio   = 2.5
t
Arc of approach = 1.1 × Pc

r sin ϕ
⇒ = 1.1 × Pc
cos ϕ
πd
⇒ r tan ϕ = 1.1 × πm [Q Pc = = πm ]
t
mt mt
⇒ tan ϕ = 1.1 × πm [Q r = ]
2 2
1.1 × π × 2 1.1 × π × 2
⇒ t= = =18.9≈ 19.
tan ϕ tan 20°
∴ T = 2.5t
= 2.5 × 19 = 47.5 ≈ 48.
T 48
(a) G= = = 2.52 (No)
t 19
48
∴ t= = 19.2≈ 20
2.5
∴ T = 20 × 2.5 = 50.
(b) We know that,
R sin ϕ = r a2 − r 2 cos 2 ϕ − r sin ϕ ... (i)
mT 50 m
Now, R= = = 25 m
2 2
mt 20 m
r= = = 10 m.
2 2
Substituting this value in equation (i), we get
25 m sin ϕ = r a2 − (10 m) 2 cos 2 ϕ − 10 m sin ϕ
⇒ 35 m sin ϕ = r a2 − (10 m) 2 cos 2 ϕ .

Squaring both side, we get
(35 m) 2 sin 2 ϕ = r a2 − (10 m) 2 cos 2 ϕ
⇒ (35 m) 2 sin 2 20° = r a2 − (10 m) 2 cos 2 20°
⇒ r a2 = 231.6 m 2
∴ r a =15.2 m.
We know that addendum on pinion
r a − r 15.2 m −10 m
= =
Pc πm
5.2
= = 1.655.
π
13. Write short notes on any two of the following : 5 × 2 = 10
(a) Power, effort of governor
(b) Gear train
(c) Inversion of four bar mechanism
Ans. (a) Power : The power of a governor is the work done at the sleeve for a given percentage change of
speed. It is the product of the mean value of the effort and the distance through which the sleeve moves
Power = mean effort × lift of sleeve

Effort of governor : The effort of a governor is the mean force exerted at the sleeve for a given
percentage change of speed.
When the governor is running steady there is no force at the sleeve. But when the speed changes, there is a
resistance at the sleeve which opposes its motion. This resistance which is equal to the effort, varies uniformly
form a maximum value to zero while the governor moves into its position of equilibrium.
(b) Gear train : Two ore more gears are made to mesh with each-other to transmit power from one shaft
to another. Such a combination is called gear train. The nature of the train used depends upon the velocity ratio
require and the relative position of the axes at shaft. A gear train may consist of spur, bevel or spiral gears.
Following are the different types of gear train, depending upon the arrangement of wheels.
(1) Simple gear train
(2) Compound gear train
(3) Reverted gear train
(4) Epicyclic gear train.
Let N 1 = speed of gear 1 in rpm.
N 2 = speed of gear 2 in rpm
T1 = number of teeth on gear 1
T2 = number of teeth on gear 2.
N1 T2
Speed ratio = = .
N2 T1
(c) Inversion of four bar mechanism : Though there are many inversions of the four bar mechanism.
There are some important inversions of four mechanism :
(i) Beam engine : A part of mechanism of a beam engine which consists of four links. It is also known as
crank and lever mechanism. The purpose of this mechanism is to convert rotary motion into
reciprocating motion.
(ii) Coupling rod of a locomotive : The mechanism of a coupling rod of a locomotive which consists of
four links. This mechanism is meant for transmitting rotary motion form one wheel to the other
wheel. It is also known as double cranck mechanism.
(iii) Watt’s indicator mechanism : A Watt’s indicator mechanism which consists of four links. It is also
known as Watt’s straight line or double lever mechanism.
o
2011 (Even)
2011 (Even)

Answer any five questions from Group-B. Each question carries 4 marks.
GROUP-A
1. Choose the most appropriate answer from given choice : 1× 20 = 20
(i) Cross head and guide form
(a) reciprocating pair (b) sliding pair
Ans. (b) sliding pair
Explanation : Cross-head and guide of a reciprocating steam engine is the example of a sliding pair.
(ii) Universal joint is a type of
Ans. (a) lower pair
Explanation : Universal joint was first suggested by Da Vinci and was named after English Physicist and
Mathematician Robert Hooke who first applied it to connect two offset misaligned shafts.
(iii) When two elements of a pair are mechanically it forms
(a) closed pair (b) open pair
(c) higher pair (d) none of these
Explanation : When the two elements of a pair are connected together mechanically it forms self-closed
pair.
(iv) Four bar mechanism contains
(a) three bar (b) four bar
(c) two bar (d) none of these
Ans. (b) four bar
(v) Beam engine is the inversion of

(a) three bar mechanism (b) two bar mechanism
(c) four bar mechanism (d) none of these
Ans. (c) four bar mechanism

(vi) Angle of repose is at limiting condition
(a) greater then inclined angle
(b) less than inclined angle
(c) equal to inclined angle
(d) none of these
Ans. (b) less than inclined angle

(vii) Maximum efficiency of screw jack is
1 + sin θ sin θ − 1
(a) (b)
sin θ − 1 sin θ + 1
1 − sin θ
1 + sin θ
1− sin θ
Ans. (a)
1+ sin θ
Explanation : Where θ is inclined angle.
(viii) Total tension (T) is maximum at
(a) 2Tc (b) 3Tc
(c) Tc (d) none of these
Ans. (b) 3Tc
(ix) Centrifugal tension in bolts
(a) increases power (b) decreases power
(c) no effect on power (d) none of these
Ans. (c) no effect on power
(x) Size of gear is specified by
(a) pressure angle (b) circular pitch
(c) module (d) none of these
Explanation : The size of gear is usually specified by the pitch circle diameter.
It is also known as pitch diameter.
(xi) Product diametral pitch and circular pitch is :

π
(a) (b) π
2
π 3π
(c) (d)
4 2
Ans. (b) π
πD T
Explanation : Diametral pitch × circular pitch = × =π
T D
where, T = number of the teeth
D = pitch circle diameter
(xii) Maximum length of arc of contact is :
(a) R sin θ (b) r sin θ
(c) ( R + r ) tan θ (d) none of these
Ans. (c) ( R + r ) tan θ
Explanation :
Maximum length of path of approach = r sin ϕ
Maximum length of path of recess = R sin ϕ
∴ Maximum length of path of contact = r sin ϕ + R sin ϕ
We know that maximum length of arc of contact
maximum length of path of contact
=
cos ϕ
r sin ϕ + R sin ϕ sin ϕ
= = (r + R)
cos ϕ cos ϕ
= ( R + r ) tan ϕ.
(xiii) Module is reciprocal of
(a) circular pitch (b) diametral pitch
(c) pressure angle (d) none of these
Ans. (b) diametral pitch
1
Explanation : m =
Pd
(xiv) Maximum fluctuation of energy is the
(a) sum of maximum and minimum energy
(b) difference of maximum and minimum
(d) none of these
Ans. (b) difference of maximum and minimum
(xv) Ratio of maximum fluctuation of speed to mean speed is
(a) fluctuation of speed
(b) coefficient of fluctuation of speed

(d) none of these
Ans. (b) coefficient of fluctuation of speed
(xvi) The height of a watt governor is
(a) g ⋅ w 2 (b) g ⋅ w
(c) g / w 2
(d) none of these
2
Ans. (c) g / w
(xvii) Hartnell governor is

(a) pendulum type (b) spring loaded
(c) weight type (d) none of these
Ans. (b) Spring loaded

(xviii) The brakes commonly used in railway train is
(a) shoe brake (b) band brake
(c) band and block brake (d) none of these
Ans. (a) shoe brake
T1
(xix) Tension ratio is equal to
T2 µθ
(a) eµθ (b) e sin α

(c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of above
Ans. (c) both (a) and (b)

(xx) Lead screw of a lathe with nut forms a
(a) sliding pair (b) rolling pair
(c) screw pair (d) none of these
Ans. (c) screw pair
GROUP-B
Answer any five of the following questions : 4 × 5 = 20

2. Define angle of repose with figure. 4
Ans. Angle of repose : If the angle of inclination α of the plane to the horizontal is such that the body
begins to move down the plane, then the angle α is called the angle of repose.
Consider that a body A of weight (W ) is resting on inclined plane B.
F
We know that, µ = ⇒ F = µR n ... (i)
RN
We know that when body motion is equilibrium

W sin α = F
⇒ W sin α = µR N
⇒ W sin α = µ ⋅ W cos α
sin α
⇒ µ=
cos α
⇒ µ = tan α
⇒ tan ϕ = tan α [Q µ = tan ϕ]
∴ α =ϕ
3. A screw jack is triple start of mean diameter 6 cm and pitch 1 cm, find helix angle of thread. 4
Ans. Given data :
Men diameter ( d m ) = 6 cm
Pitch ( Pc ) = 1cm
We know that,
3Pc
tan α =
π dm
3×1
⇒ tan α =
π ×6
 1
∴ α = tan −1   = 9.04°.
 2π 
4. A simple watt governor in which the arms intersect on the axis of rotation at 100 rpm. Find height of
governor. 4
Ans. Given data :
Speed ( N ) = 100 rpm
We know that angular velocity
2πN 2π × 100
ω= = = 10.47 rad/s
60 60
Let h = height of governor.

We know that height of watt governor
g 981
h= = = 8.95 cm.
ω2 (10.47 ) 2
5. Find the length of an open belt 3 m apart connected by two pulleys of 30 cm and 60 cm diameters with
figure. 4
Ans. Given data :
l=3m
d1 = 30 cm = 0.3 m
∴ r1 = 0.15 m
d 2 = 60 cm = 0.6 m
∴ r2 = 0.30 m
We know that,
r 2 − r1
sin ϕ =
l
 r 2 − r1 
⇒ ϕ = sin −1  
 l 
 0.3 − 0.15 
= sin −1  
 3 
2.866
= 2.866 = rad = 0.016 rad.
180
We know that length of oven belt
= 2 l 2 − (r 2 − r1 ) 2 + (π − 2ϕ)r1 + (π + 2ϕ) 2
= 2 3 2 − ( 0.3 − 0.15) 2 + (π − 2 × 0.016) × 0.15 + (π + 2 × 0.016) × 0.3

= 7.4103 m.
6. Prove that for maximum power transmission :

T1 = 2Tc
Tc = centrifugal tension. 4
Ans. Consider a small portion PQ of the belt subtending an angle dθ the centre of the pulley
Let m = mass of the belt per unit length in kg

v = linear velocity of the belt in m/s
r = radius of the pulley over which the belt runs in metres
Tc = centrifugal tension acting tangentially at P and Q in Newtons
We know that length of the belt PQ = r ⋅θd
and mass of the belt PQ ( M ) = m⋅ r ⋅ dθ
∴ Centrifugal force acting on the belt PQ
Mv 2 m ⋅ r ⋅ dθ v 2
Fc = =
r r
∴ Fc = mdθv 2 ... (i)
Now from vertical forces
dθ dθ
Tc sin + Tc sin = Fc
2 2
dθ dθ
⇒ Tc sin + Tc sin = mdθv 2 [from equation (i)]
2 2
dθ
⇒ 2Tc sin = mdθv 2 ... (ii)
2
dθ dθ
Since the dθ is very small theoretical substituting sin = in equ. (ii)
2 2
dθ
2Tc ⋅ = mdθv 2
2
⇒ Tc = mv 2 ... (iii)
Power transmitted by belt

P = (T1 − T2 ) ⋅ v
 T1  T1 T1
⇒ P = T1 − µθ  ⋅ v [Q = eµθ ∴ T2 = ]
 e  T2 eµθ
 1 
⇒ P = T1 1 − µθ  ⋅ v
 e 
⇒ P = T1 ⋅ k ⋅ v ... (iv)
1
[Q 1 − = constant = k (let)]
eµθ
Maximum tension in belt
T = T1 + Tc
⇒ T1 = T − Tc .
Substituting this value in equation (iv), we get
P = (T − Tc ) ⋅ k ⋅ v
⇒ P = (T − mv 2 ) kv [From equation (iii)]
3
⇒ P = Tkv − mkv .
Differentiation both side w.r.t. v, we get
dP
= Tk ⋅1 − 3mkv 2
dv
dP
⇒ 0 = Tk − 3mkv 2 [Q = 0]
dv
⇒ k(T − 3mv 2 ) = 0
⇒ T − 3mv 2 = 0
⇒ T = 3mv 2
⇒ T = 3Tc [From equation (iii)]
When total tension

T = T1 + Tc
⇒ 3Tc = T1 + Tc
⇒ T1 = 2Tc
7. A pinion has 30 teeth and with module 6 mm, find pitch circle diameter of pinion. 4
Ans. Given data :
No. of teeth on pinion ( t ) = 30
Module ( m ) = 6 mm
Let d = pitch circle diameter

We know that pitch circle diameter
d = mt
= 6 × 30 = 180 mm.
8. Give an example of the following gear train with figure : 4
(a) Simple gear train
(b) Compound gear train.
Ans. (a) Simple gear train : When there is only one gear on each shaft is known as simple gear train.
When the distance between the two shafts is small, the two gear 1 and 2 are made to mesh with each other
to transmit motion from one shaft to the other.
Let N 1 = speed of gear 1 in rpm

N 2 = speed of gear 2 in rpm
N1 T2
Speed ratio = = .
N2 T1
(b) Compound gear train : When there are more than one gear on a shaft is called a compound gear train.
In a compound train of gears the gear 1 is the riving gear mounted on shaft A, gears 2 and 3 are compound
gears which are mounted on shaft B. The gears 4 and 5 are also compound gears which are mounted on shaft C
and the gear 6 is the driven gear mounted on shaft D.
Let N 1 = speed of driving gear 1.

T1 = number of teeth on driving gear 1.
N 2 , N 3 , K , N 6 = speed of respective gear in rpm
T2 , T3 , K , T6 = number of teeth on respective gear
N1 N3 N5 T2 T4 T6
∴ Speed ratio = × × = × × .
N2 N4 N6 T1 T3 T5
GROUP-C
9. The turning moment diagram of two isosceles triangles. The maximum height for each triangle is
100 kg-m while the base of the triangle is θ = 0° to 180° and θ = 180° to 360°. If the engine runs at 200
rpm and total fluctuation of speed is 4%, find : 10
(a) Indicated power
(b) Energy stored in flywheel.
Ans. Given data :
T = 100 kg-m
θ = 2π
Let Tm = mean torque.
Speed ( N ) = 200 rpm
We know that work done
W = Tm × 2π ... (i)
From figure work done,
1
W = π × 100 × 2
2
⇒ W =100π ... (ii)
Tm × 2π = 100π
∴ Tm = 50 kg-m.
(a) We know that I.P.
= Tm × ω
2π × N 2π × 200
= Tm × = 50 ×
60 60
=1047.198 kg-m/s = 13.96 H.P.
(b) We know that energy stored in flywheel
1 π 1 π
= × × Tm = × × 50 = 39.6299 kg-m.
2 2 2 2
10. In a porter governor, each arm 30 cm long and ball weight is 2.5 kg with central load 25 kg. For the
lowest and highest position of sleeve, the arms are inclined 30° and 40° respectively to the vertical.
Frictional resistance is 2.5 kg. Assuming arms intersect on axis of rotation. Find
(a) travel of sleeve
(b) maximum descending speed. 10
Ans. Given data :
Arm length = 30 cm
Ball weight ( w ) = 2.5 kg
Central load (W ) = 25 kg
Frictional force (F ) = 2.5 kg
α 1 = β 1 = 40°, α 2 = β 2 = 30°
(a)
We know that travel of sleeve

h = 2( h2 − h1 )
= 2 ( 30 cos 30° − 30 cos 40° )
= 60 (cos 30° − cos 40° )
= 6 cm.
(b) We to found maximum descending speed at height point
α 1 = β 1 = 40°
r1 = 30 sin 30° = 19.28
F = − 2.5 kg.
We know that
w 2 W −F
ω 1 × r1 = w tan α 1 + (tan α 1 + tan β 1 )
g 2
2.5 25 − 2.5
⇒ × ω 12 × 19.28 = 2.5 tan 30° + (tan 30° + tan 30° )
981 2
⇒ 0.0491ω 12 = 20.977
20.977
⇒ ω 12 =
0.491
⇒ ω 12 = 426.94
∴ ω 1 = 20.66 rad/sec
ω 1 × 6020.66 × 60
∴ N1 = =
2π 2π
= 197.29 ≈ 198
= 198 rpm.
11. A screw jack is used to raise 5000 kg of load. The screw is single start of square thread has mean
diameter 6.0 cm and pitch 2.0 cm. The coefficient of friction between screw and nut is 0.12. Length of
lever is 50 cm and collar friction is 0.10 with mean radius 4 cm. Find the force on lever and lifting
efficiency. Given that load does not rotate with spindle. 10
Ans. Given data :
Load to be lifted (W ) = 5000 kg.
Pitch ( Pc ) = 2 cm
( µ ) = 0.12
Collar mean radius ( rm ) = 4 cm
( µ c ) = 0.10
Length of lever ( l ) = 50 cm
Let α = helix angle.
We know that,
Pc
tan α =
π dm
 Pc 
⇒ α = tan −1  
 πd m 
 2 
= tan −1   = 6.05°
π × 6 
and tan ϕ = 0.12
∴ ϕ = tan −1 ( 0.12) = 6.84°.
Let P1 = applied force on lever.
We know that
dm
P1 × l = W tan (α + ϕ) ⋅ + Wµ c r m
2
6
⇒ P1 × 50 = 5000 tan( 6.05 + 6.94) × + 5000 × 0.10 × 4
2
⇒ P1 =108.67 kg.
We know that lifting efficiency.
W × Pc
η lifting = × 100
P1 × l × 2π
5000 × 2
= × 100
108.67 × 50 × 2π
= 29.29%.
12. A rope pulley having mean diameter 1.5 m and rotater at 90 r.p.m, Angle of lap = 190° groove angle
45°, safe tension per rope 75 kg and coefficient of friction 0.25. Find the number of ropes for
transmitting 170 HP. 10
Ans. Given data :
Mean diameter ( d m ) =1.5 m
Speed ( N) = 90 rpm
π × 190
Angle of lap (θ) = 190° = rad = 3.316 rad
180°
Groove angle ( 2α) = 45°
∴ α = 22 . 5°
µ = 0.25
Power ( P) =170 H.P.
µθ 0.25 × 3.316
T1 sin α
T1 sin 22.5
We know that, =e ⇒ =e
T2 T2
T1 T1
⇒ = 8.7257 ∴ T2 = ... (i)
T2 8.7257
We know that linear speed
πd m N π × 1.5 × 90
v= = = 7.07 m/sec.
60 60
We know that power
(T1 − T2 ) v
P=
75
(T1 − T2 ) × 7.07
⇒ 170 =
75
170 × 75
⇒ T1 − T2 =
7.07
⇒ T1 − T2 =1803.4
T1
⇒ T1 − = 1803.4 [from (i)]
8.7257
⇒ 7.7257T1 = 1803.4 × 8.7257
1803.4 × 8.7257
⇒ T1 =
7.7257
= 2036.83 kg
2036.83
We now that no. of ropes = = 27.16 ≈ 28 ropes
75
∴ No. of ropes = 28.
T1
13. Prove that = eµθ for usual notations. 10
T2
14. For two involute gears in mesh with pinion as driver, the arc of approach is 1.1 times of the circular
pitch. If the pressure angle is 20° and gear ratio 2.5, find number of teeth on pinion and gear. 10
Ans. See Q.No. 12 (a), Group-C of 2012 (Even).
15. Define the following with examples and figure : 10
(a) Lower pair

(b) Higher pair
(c) Sliding pair
Ans. (a) Lower pair : When the two elements of a pair have a surface contact when relative motion takes
place and the surface of one element slides over the surface of the other, the pair formed is known as lower pair.
Example : A pantograph is a mechanism with lower pair used to produce the path traced out by a point.
(b) Higher pair : When two elements of a pair have a line or point contact when relative motion takes
place and the motion between the two elements is partly turning and partly sliding, then the pair is know as
higher pair.
Example : The belts of ropes drives is example of higher pair are used the transmit power from one shaft to
another by means of pulley which rotate at the same speed or different speeds.
(c) Sliding pair : When the two element of a pair are connected in such a way that one can only slide
relative to the other, the pair is known as a sliding pair.
Example : The cross head and guides of reciprocating engine is the example of sliding pair.
o
2010 (Even)

GROUP-A
2010 (Even)
1. Choose the most appropriate answer from given choice : 1´ 20 = 20

(i) In a reciprocating steam engine, which of the following forms a kinematic link?
(a) Cylinder and piston (b) Piston rod and cylinder
(c) Crankshaft and flywheel (d) None of these
Ans. (c) Crankshaft and flywheel
Explanation : In reciprocating steam engine,
One link : Piston, Piston rod, crosshead, constitute.
Second link : connecting rod with big and small end bearing constitute.
Third link : Crank, crankshaft and flywheel.
Forth link : Cylinder, engine frame and main bearing.
(ii) The cam and follower form
(a) lower pair (b) higher pair (c) closed pair (d) none of these
Ans. (b) higher pair
(iii) Ball and socket form
(a) turning pair (b) rolling pair (c) spherical pair (d) none of these
Ans. (c) spherical pair
(iv) A shaft and bush bearing is
(a) turning pair (b) lower pair (c) rolling pair (d) none of these
Ans. (a) turning pair
(v) Steering gear of automobile is
Ans. (a) lower pair
(vi) Efficiency of screw jack is given by
tan ( a + j) tan a tan j

(a) (b) (c) (d) none of these
tan j tan ( a + j) tan ( a + j)
tan a
Ans. (b)
tan ( a + j )
(vii) Efficiency of screw jack is maximum when

p j p j
(a) a = p - j (b) a = - (c) a = - (d) none of these
4 4 4 2
p j
Ans. (c) a = -
4 2
(viii) Due to slip of the belt, the velocity of pulley

(a) decreases (b) increase
(c) remains constant (d) none of above
Ans. (a) decreases

Explanation : Due to slip of the belt, the velocity of driven pulley is decreases.
(ix) Due to centrifugal tension in belt, stress in belt
(a) remain constant (b) increases (c) decreases (d) none of these
Ans. (b) increases
(x) If the angle of contact increases, then tension ratio in belt
(a) increases (b) decreases (c) does not change (d) none of these
Ans. (a) increases
(xi) Length of approach on gear is on
(a) driver wheel (b) driven wheel (c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of these
Ans. (c) both (a) and (b)
(xii) Gear dimensions are measured by
(a) teeth (b) pitch (c) module (d) none of these
Ans. (c) module
(xiii) On pitch point, gear
(a) slides (b) slips (c) rolls (d) none of these
Ans. (c) rolls
(xiv) Pressure angle in gears varies in
(a) cycloidal teeth (b) involute teeth
Ans. ( )
(xv) Spur gears have
(a) parallel axes (b) perpendicular axes
(c) inclined axes (d) none of these

Ans. (a) parallel axes
Explanation : Parallel axes — spur gears
Perpendicular axes — spiral gears
Inclined axes — bevel gears
(xvi) Excess energy stored in I.C. engine is in
(a) flywheel (b) connecting rod (c) cylinder (d) none of these
Ans. (a) flywheel
(xvii) Porter governor is used for
(a) slow speed engine (b) high speed engine
(c) medium speed engine (d) none of these
Ans. (c) medium speed engine
(xviii) Isochronous governor has
(a) same speed (b) different speed (c) variable speed (d) none of these
Ans. (a) same speed
(xix) Size of cam depends upon
(a) base circle (b) pitch circle
(c) prime circle (d) none of these
Ans. (a) base circle
(xx) At nose of cam, lift remains at
(a) variable height (b) constant height
Ans. (b) constant height
GROUP-B
Answer any four of the following questions : 5 ´ 4 = 20

2. A screw jack of mean diameter 5 cm is double start of pitch 1.0 m, find helix angle of thread. 5
Ans. Given data :
Pitch ( Pc ) = 1
Let a = helix angle.
We know that
2Pc
tan a =
pd m
æ 2P ö
Þ a = tan -1 çç c ÷÷
è pd m ø
æ 2 ´1 ö
= tan -1 ç ÷ = 7.26°.
è p´ 5 ø
3. A porter governor has the arms each 30 cm. The lowest and highest position of sleeve are 30° and
45°, find lift of sleeve. 5
Ans. Given data :

Arms length = 30 cm
a 1 = b1 = 45°
a 2 = b 2 = 30°
We know that, h1 = 30 cos 45° = 21.21 cm

and h2 = 30 cos 30° = 25.98 cm.
We know that lift, h = 2( h2 - h1 )
= 2 ( 25.98 - 21.21) = 9.54 cm.
4. A line shaft is driven by electric motor through open belt. The speed of motor is 1450 r.p.m. and line
shaft should rotate 500 rpm. The maximum linear velocity of belt has to run 1300 m/min. Find
diameters of pulleys, if slip 5% and thickness 10 mm. 5
Ans. Given data :

Moter speed ( N 1 ) = 1450 rpm
Shaft speed ( N 2 ) = 500 rpm
Belt speed ( v ) = 1300 m/min
Belt thickness ( t ) = 10 mm = 0.01 m
Slip ( s ) = 5%.
We know that
100 - 5 ö
Belt speed = pN1 ( d1 + t) æç ÷
è 100 ø
æ 100 - 5 ö
Þ 1300 = p ´ 1450 ( d1 + 0.01) ç ÷
è 100 ø
Þ 1300 = p ´ 1450 ( d1 + 0.01) ´ 0.95
1300
Þ d1 + 0.01 =
p ´ 1450 ´ 0.95
Þ d1 + 0.01 = 0.30055
Þ d1 = 0.3055 + 0.01
= 0.2906 m = 29.06 m.
Similarly,
p( d 2 + 0.01) ´ 500 = 1300 ´ 0.95
1300 ´ 0.95
Þ d2 = - 0.01
p ´ 500
= 0.7762 m = 77.62 cm.
5. A band brake is lined with 10 wooden blocks each subtends an angle of 18° at the centre of drum. If
coefficient of friction is 0.36. Find the tension ratio. 5
Ans. Given data :
No. of wooden block ( n) =10
Subtending angle ( 2q) = 16°
\ q = 9°
Coefficient of friction (m) = 0.36.
We know that tension ratio
n
Tn æ 1 + m tan q ö
=ç ÷
T0 è 1 - m tan q ø
10
T10 æ 1 - 0.36 tan 9 ö
Þ =ç ÷ = 3.13.
T0 è 1 - 0.36 tan 9 ø
6. Define self locking and overhauling in screw jack. 5
Ans. See Q.No. 3, Group-B of 2012 (Even).
7. The following data relate to a 20° involute pair of spur gears in mesh, in which pinion is driver
gear ratio = 2.5
length of arc of approach in term of module = p.
Find least number of teeth on pinion and gear. 5
Ans. Given data :
j = 20°
G = 2.5
Length of arc of approach = p m
We know that,
r sin j
Length of arc of approach =
cos j
r sin j
pm =
cos j
Þ r tan j = pm
mt mt
Þ tan j = pm [Q r = ]
2 2
t
Þ tan j = p
2
2p
Þ t=
tan j
2p
= =17.26 » 18
tan 20°
and T = 2.5t = 2.5 ´ 18 = 45.
Hence No. of teeth on pinion ( t ) = 18
No. of teeth on gear (T ) = 45.
8. Classify the gear train. 5
Ans. Gear train : Two or more gears are made to mech with each-other to transmit power one shaft to
another. Such a combination is called gear train.
Following are the different types of gear trains, depending upon the arrangement of wheel.
(i) Simple gear train : When there is only one gear on each shaft is known as simple gear train.
(ii) Compound gear train : When there are more than one gear on a shaft is called compound train of
gear.
(iii) Reverted gear train : When the axes of the first gear and the least gear are co-axial then the gear train
is known as reverted gear train.
(iv) Epicyclic gear train : The axis of the shafts, over which the gears are mounted, may move relative to
a fixed axis is known as epicyclic gear train.
GROUP-C

9. A porter governor carries a central load of 25 kg and each ball weight 4 kg. The upper links each are
20 cm and lower links each 30 cm. Upper and lower links are 6 cm from the axes of governor spindle.
Find the equilibrium speed at 12.5 cm of radius of rotation and range of speed if the frictional
resistance is 5 kg. 10
Ans. Given data :

Central load (W ) = 25 kg
Length of upper links = 20 cm
Length of lower links = 30 cm.
Radius of rotation ( r ) = 12.5 cm

Frictional resistance ( F ) = 5 kg.
6.5
sin a =
20
a = sin -1 æç
6.5 ö
\ ÷ = 18.17°
è 20 ø
6.5
and sin b =
30
b = sin -1 æç
6.5 ö
\ ÷ = 12.51°.
è 30 ø
Let N = equilibrium speed.
We know that
w W
´ w2 ´ r = w tan a + (tan a + tan b)
g 2
4 25
Þ ´ w2 ´ 12.5 = 4 tan (18.17) °+ {tan (18.17) ° + tan (12 . 5)°
981 2
50 2
Þ w = 8 . 45
981
8.45 ´ 981
Þ w2 =
50
8.45 ´ 981
Þ w= = 12.88 rad/s.
30
We know that
w ´ 60 12.88 ´ 60
N= =
2p 2p
= 122.86 » 123 = 123 rpm.
Range of speed of governor :
When frictional resistance taken positive.
w W +F
g 2
4 25 + 5
Þ ´ w12 ´ 12.5 = 4 tan (18.17) ° + {tan (18.77) ° + tan (12.51) °}
981 2
50 2
Þ w1 = 9 . 56
981
9.56 ´ 981
Þ w12 =
50
9.56 ´ 981
\ w1 = = 13.69 rad/sec.
50
w ´ 60 13.69 ´ 60
\ N1 = 1 = = 130.8 » 131 rpm.
2p 2p
When frictional resistance taken negative
w W -F
g 2
4 25 - 5
Þ ´ w22 ´ 12.5 = 4 tan (18.17) ° + {tan (18.77) ° + tan (12.51) °}
981 2
50 2
Þ w2 = 6 . 81
981
6.81 ´ 981
Þ w22 =
50
6.81 ´ 981
\ w2 = = 11.58 rad/sec.
50
w ´ 60 11.79 ´ 60
\ N2 = 2 = = 110.39 » 111 rpm.
2p 2p
\ Range of speed of governor
= N 2 - N1
= 111 – 131 rpm.

10. A vertical screw with square threads 5 cm mean diameter and 1 cm pitch is raised against a axis load
of 550 kg by means of hand wheel. The load rotates with collar which has mean diameter 6.5 cm. If
the coefficient of friction is 0.15 for screw and 0.18 for collar and tangential force of wheel 14 kg.
Find the diameter of wheel. 10
Ans. Given that :
Pitch ( Pc ) =1 cm
Axial load (W ) = 440 kg
Collar mean diameter ( d c ) = 6.5 cm
\ r c = 3.25 cm
m = 0.15
m c = 0 .18.
Tangential force ( P1 ) = 14 kg.
Let l = suitable diameter for the handwheel.
We know that,
Pc
tan a =
pd m
æ P ö æ 1 ö
Þ a = tan -1 çç c ÷÷ = tan -1 ç ÷ = 3.64°
è pd m ø è p´ 5 ø
and m = 0.15
Þ tan j = 0.15
Þ j = tan -1 ( 0.15)
= 8.53°
\ T = P1 l.
We know that
dm
T = W tan ( a + j) ´ + W ´ m c ´ rm
2
dm
Þ P1 l = W tan( a + j) ´ + 2 ´ m c ´ rm
2
5
Þ P4 ´ l = 550 tan (3.64 + 8.53) ´ + 550 ´ 0.18 ´ 3.25
2
Þ P4 ´ l = 618.28
618.28
Þ l= = 44.16 cm = 44.16 cm.
14
\ Suitable diameters for hand wheel = 44.16 cm.
11. In a rope drive transmitted 1200 HP, the flywheel has effective diameter 360 cm and speed 75 rpm.
There 32 ropes running in grooves which have an angle 45° The coefficient of friction between pulley
and rope 0.25, angle of lap 180° and weight per metre length 1.6 kg. Find the greatest tension in each
rope. 10
Ans. Given data :

d = 360 cm = 3.6 cm
N = 75 rpm
2a = 45° \ a = 22.5
m = 0.25
q = 180° = p
w = 1.6 kg/m
P = 1200 H.P.
No. of ropes = 32.
1200
\ For one ropes = = 37.5 H.P.
32
p ´ 3.6 ´ 75
We know that v= = 14.137 m/s
60
(T - T2 ) v
We know that P= 1
75
(T1 - T2 ) ´ 14 .137
Þ 37.5 =
75
37.5 ´ 75
Þ T1 - T2 =
14.137
Þ T1 - T2 =198.946 kg ... (i)
mq
T1 sin q
We know that, =e
T2
0.25 ´ p
T1 T1
Þ = e sin 22.5 Þ = 7.786
T2 T2
T1
Þ T2 = .
7.786
Substituting this value in equation (i), we get
T
T1 - 1 = 198.946
7.786
6.786T1
Þ = 198.946
7.786
198.946 ´ 7.786
Þ T1 = = 228.26 kg.
6.786
wv 2 1.6 ´ (14.137) 2
We know that, Tc = = = 32.596 kg.
g 9.81
We know that greatest tension in each rope
T = T1 + Tc
= 228.26 + 32.596 = 260.86 kg.
12. A pain of spur wheel with 14 and 21 teeth are of involute type and pressure angle 16°. Find maximum
addenda of the pinion and gear to avoid interference. If pitch in module 6 mm. 10
Ans. Given data :

T = 21
t = 14
f = 16°
m = 6 mm.
We know that
mT 6 ´ 21
R= = = 63 mm = 6.3 cm
2 2
mt 6 ´ 14
and r= = = 42 mm = 4.2 cm.
2 2
We know that
R sin j
= r a2 - r 2 cos 2 j - r sin j
2
6.3 sin 16
Þ = r a2 - ( 4.2) 2 cos 2 16 - 4.2 sin 16
2
Þ 2.026 = r a2 - ( 4.2) 2 cos 2 16.
( 2.026) 2 = r a2 - ( 4.2) 2 cos 2 16
Þ 4.1047 = r a2 - ( 4.2) 2 cos 2 16
Þ r a2 = 4.1047 + ( 4.2) 2 cos 2 16
Þ r a = 4.1047 + ( 4.2) 2 cos 2 16 = 4.52 cm.

= r a - r = 4.52 - 4.2 = 0.32 cm.
and we know that
r sin j
= R a2 - R 2 cos 2 j - R sin j
2
4.2 sin 16
Þ = R a2 - ( 6.3) 2 cos 2 16 - 6.3 sin 16
2
4.2 sin 16
Þ R a2 - ( 6.3) 2 cos 2 16 = + 6.3 sin 16
2
Þ R a2 - ( 6.3) 2 cos 2 16 = 2.32
R a2 - ( 6.3) 2 cos16 = 5.36
Þ R a2 = 5.36 + ( 6.3) 2 cos 2 16
Þ R a = 5.36 + ( 6.3) 2 cos 2 16 = 6.48 cm.

We know that addendum on gear
= R a - R = 6.48 - 6.3 = 0.18 cm.
13. The following data refer for four stroke engine
1 HP = 40 HP
Speed = 300 rpm
Fluctuation of speed = ± 3%
Work done in power stroke

= 2. 5
Work done in compression
Assuming that work done during suction and exhaust are negligible, find energy stored in flywheel.10
Ans. Given data :

P = 40 HP
N = 300 rpm
Wp
= 2.5
Wc
We know that,
2pNTm
H.P. =
60 ´ 75
2p ´ 300 ´ Tm
Þ 40 =
60 ´ 75
40 ´ 60 ´ 75
Þ Tm = = 95.4927 kg-m.
2p ´ 300
We know that
Workdone = W p - Wc ... (i)
and Workdone = Tm ´ 4p ... (ii)
Now, equiating equation (i) and (ii), we get

Tm ´ 4p = W p - Wc
Wp
Þ Tm ´ 4p = W p -
2.5
Tm ´ 4p ´ 2.5 95.4927 ´ 4p
Þ Wp = = ´ 2.5 = 2000 kg-m.
1.5 1.5
We know that (from triangle)
1
W p = ´ T ´ (3p - 2p)
2
1
Þ 2000 = ´ T ´ p
2
2000 ´ 2
Þ T= = 1273.24 kg-m.
p
Now, DABC and DADE are similar,
x T1
\ =
p T
T T - Tm
Þ x = 1 ´ p= ´p
T T
1273.24 - 95.4927
Þ x= ´ p = 2.9059 radian.
1273.24
We know that energy stored in flywheel
= excess energy
1 1
= ´ x ´ T1 = ´ x ´ (T - Tm )
2 2
1
= ´ 2.9059 ´ (1273.24 - 95.4927)
2
=1711.25 kg-m.
n
14. Prove that =ç ÷ with usual nation. 10
To è 1 - m tan q ø

15. (a) Define vibration and classify.
(b) Define lift, dwell angle, angle of ascent and descent with appropriate figure for cam. 10
Ans. (a) Vibration : When elastic bodies such as a spring, a beam and a shaft are displaced from the
equilibrium position by the application of external forces, and then released, they execute a vibratory motion.
This is due to the reason that when a body is displaced, the internal forces in the form of elastic or strain energy
are represent in the body. When body reaches the equilibrium position, the whole of the elastic or strain energy
is converted into kinetic energy due to which the body continuous to move in the opposite direction. The
whole of the kinetic energy is again returns to the equilibrium position. In this way, the vibratory motion is
repeated indefinitely.
The following types of vibratory motion :
(1) Free or natural vibrations :
(a) Longitudinal vibrations
(b) Transverse vibrations
(c) Torsional vibrations
(2) Forced vibrations
(3) Damped vibrations.
(b) Lift : Difference between maximum distance of lowest point of the follower from the axis of rotation
of the came and the least radius is known as the lift of the follower.
Lift = OB - OA = OB - OE = EB.
Dwell angle : The angle through which the cam rotates during the period in which the follower remains in
the height position is known as the angle of dwell and this is equal to angle BOC.
\ ÐBOC = q 2
Angle of ascent : Angle moved by the cam, from the instant the follower begins to rise till it reaches its
highest position, is known as angle of ascent and it is equal to angle AOB .
\ ÐAOB = q1 .
Angle of decent : In a cam in which descent commences as soon as ascent is completed angle of dwell
works out to be zero. Similarly angle COD during which the follower returns to its initial position is known as
angle of descent.
\ ÐCOD = q 3 .
o
272 THEORY OF MACHINE AND MECHANISM 2010 (A)
2010 (A)
2010 (A)

GROUP-A
(i) The linear velocity v of a body is
w
(a) rw(b) (c) w2 r(d) none
r
where, w = angular velocity and r = radius of path
Ans. (a) rw
Explanation : We know that,
Linear velocity = radius of path ´ angular velocity.
(ii) Kinetic energy of rotation of a body is
1 1
(a) Iw(b) Iw2 (c) Iw2 (d) none
2 2
where, I = moment of Inertia and w = angular velocity
1
Ans. (b) Iw2
2
Explanation : When a body of mass moment of inertia I is rotated about that axis, with an angular velocity
w then it possesses some kinetic energy.
1
\ This kinetic energy of rotation is Iw2 .
2
(iii) Lower pair are those which have ........... contact.
(a) surface(b) line(c) point(d) none
Ans. (a) surface
(iv) Lead screw of a lathe with nut forms a
(a) sliding pair (b) rolling pair(c) spherical pair(d) screw pair
2010 (A) THEORY OF MACHINE AND MECHANISM 273
Ans. (d) screw pair

(v) Maximum efficiency of screw jack is
1 - sin j 1 + sin j
(a) (b)
1 + sin j 1 - sin j
1 - tan f
(c) (d) none
1 + tan f
1 - sin j
Ans. (a)
1 + sin j
(vi) Initial tension of the belt t 0 is equal to
T1
(a) T1 - T2 (b)
T2
T1 + T2
(c) T1 + T2 (d)
2
T1 + T2
Ans. (d)
2
(vii) Due to slip, velocity ratio of belt drive
(a) decreases (b) increases
(c) does not change (d) none
Ans. (a) decreases
(viii) Product of circular pitch and diametral pitch in gears is :
1
(a) 1 (b)
p
(c) p (d) none
Ans. (c) p
(ix) Differential gear in an automobile is a
(a) Compound gear train (b) simple gear train
(c) epicyclic gear train (d) none
Ans. (c) epicyclic gear train

(x) A Hartnell governor is a
(a) pendulum type governor (b) inertia governor
(c) dead weight governor (d) spring loaded governor
Ans. (d) spring loaded governor

(xi) The brake commonly used in motor cars is
(a) shoe brake (b) bank brake
(c) internal brake (d) none
Ans. (c) internal brake
(xii) In cross belt drive, the driver and driven pulley rotate in .......... direction.
(a) same (b) reverse
(c) both (d) none
Ans. (b) reverse

(xiii) For dynamic balancing of a shaft
(a) net dynamic force acting on shaft is zero
(b) net couple due to dynamic force acting on shaft is zero
(c) both
(d) none
Ans. (c) both

Explanation : The net couple due to the dynamic force acting on the shaft is equal to zero. This condition
give dynamic balancing.
(xiv) In a single slider crank chain there are ........... inversions.
(a) one (b) two
(c) three (d) four
Ans. (d) four

Explanation : A single slider crank chain is modification of the basic four bar chain. It consist of one
sliding pair and three turning pair.
(xv) Ratio of maximum fluctuation of speed to the mean speed is called
(a) coefficient of fluctuation of speed
(b) fluctuation of speed
(c) maximum fluctuation of speed
(d) none
Ans. (a) coefficient of fluctuation of speed

(xvi) Cam and follower constitute a
(c) both (d) none
Ans. (b) higher pair

(xvii) When no external force acts on the body after giving it an initial displacement the body is said
to be under.
(a) forced vibration (b) damped vibration
(c) free vibration (d) none
Ans. (c) free vibration

(xviii) Diametral pitch of gear is
D T
(a) (b)
T D
(c) T ´ D (d) none
where, D = pitch circle diameter and T = no of teeth on gear.
T
Ans. (b)
D
(xix) In a gear train, when axes of shafts rotate more, relative to a fixed axis is called
(a) simple gear train (b) compound gear train
(c) reverted gear train (d) epicyclic gear train
Ans. (d) epicyclic gear train

(xx) Balancing of parts of an engine is necessary when it runs at
(a) slow speed (b) medium speed
(c) higher speed (d) none
Ans. (c) higher speed
GROUP-B

2. Show that efficiency of self locking screw is less than 50%. 5
Ans. Let a = helix angle

j = friction angle.
We know that efficiency of the screw
tan a
h=
tan ( a + j)
For self locking screws,
j>a
Þ a < j.
\ Efficiency of self locking screws,
tan j
h<
tan ( j + j)
tan j
Þ h<
tan 2 j
tan j
Þ h<
2 tan j
1 - tan 2 j
tan j (1 - tan 2 j)
Þ h<
2 tan j
1 - tan 2 j
Þ h<
2
1 tan 2 j
Þ h< - .
2 2
1
From this expression, that efficiency of self locking screws is less than or 50% .
2
\ h < 50% Proved.
3. For maximum power transmission by belt, prove that T = 3Tc where T = maximum tension in the
belt and Tc = centrifugal tension in the belt. 5
Ans. See Q.No. 6, Group-B of 2011 (Even).

(Only T1 = 2Tc )
4. For a gear drive, prove that p c ´ p d = p

where p c = circular pitch and p d = diametral pitch. 5
Ans. Let D = diameter of the pitch circle

T = number of teeth of the wheel
We know that circular pitch,
pd
pc =
T
and Diameteral pitch,
T
pd =
d
pd T
Now, pc ´ pd = ´ =p
T d
\ p c ´ p d = p Proved.
5. Define the following terms for a governor :

Sensitiveness, Stability, Isochronous, Hunting. 5
Ans. Sensitiveness of governors : The sensitiveness is defined as the ratio of the difference between the
maximum and minimum equilibrium speed to the mean equilibrium speed.
Let N = mean equilibrium speed
N 1 = maximum equilibrium speed
N 2 = minimum equilibrium speed

N1 + N 2
\ N=
2
\ Sensentiveness pf governor
N1 + N 2 N 1 - N 2 2( N 1 - N 2 )
= = = .
N N1 + N 2 N1 + N 2
2
Isochronous governors : The isochronous governors is defined as the equilibrium speed is constant for
all radii of rotation of the balls within the working range, neglecting friction,
Let r = mean radius
r1 = maximum radius
r2 = minimum radius
i.e., \ N 2 - N 1 = 0
Þ N 2 = N1
\ h1 = h2 which is impossible in case of porter governor.
Stability : A governor is said to be stable when for every speed within the working range there is a
definite configuration. For a stable governor, if, the equilibrium speed increases, the radius of governor balls
must also increase.
Hunting : A governor is said to be hunt if the speed of the engine fluctuates continuously above and
below the mean speed.
6. Classify kinematic pairs according to the type of relative motion between the elements. 5
Ans. Kinematic pair : The two links or elements of a machine, when in contant with each other are said
to form a pair. If the relative motion between them is completely, the pair is known as kinematic pair.
The kinematic pair may be classified according to the type of relative motion between the elements :
(i) Sliding pair : When the two elements of a pair are connected in such a way that one can only slide
relative to the other, the pair is known as a sliding pair. The piston and cylinder is example of a sliding
pair.
(ii) Turning pair : When the two elements of a pair are connected in such a way that one can only turn or
revolve about a fixed axis of another link, the pair is known as turning pair. The wheels turning over
their axles is the example a turning pair.
(iii) Rolling pair : When the two elements of pair are connected in such a way that one rolls over another
fixed link. The pair is known as rolling pair. ball and roller bearings is example of rolling pair.
(iv) Screw pair : When the two elements of a pair are connected in such a way that one element can turn
about the other by screw threads, the pair is known as screw pair. The bolt with a nut is example of a
screw pair.
(v) Spherical pair : When two elements of a pair are connected in such a way that one element turns or
swivels about the other fixed element the pair formed is called a spherical pair. The ball and socket
joint is example of spherical pair.
7. Classify followers according to the surface in contact. 5
Ans. Follower : A cam is a rotating machine element which gives reciprocating or oscillating motion to
another element known as follower.
The followers may be classified according to the surface in contact.
(i) Knife edge follower : When the contacting end of the follower has a sharp knife edge, it is called a
knife edge follower.
(ii) Roller follower : When the contacting end of the follower is a roller, it is called a roller follower.
(iii) Flat faced or mushroom follower : When the contacting end of the follower is a perfectly flat face, it
is called a flat faced follower.
(iv) Spherical faced follower : When the contacting end of the follower is of spherical shape, it is called a
spherical faced follower.
GROUP-C
Answer any four questions : 10 ´ 4 = 40

8. A rope drive runs at a speed of 180 rpm over a 1.25 m diameter pulley and transmits 60 KW power.
The angle of lap is 160° and groove angle is 45°. The coefficient of friction is 0.30 and mass of rope is
0.5 kg/ metre length. If maximum tension is 750 N, find no. of ropes required, considering
centrifugal tension. 10
Ans. Given data :
P = 60 KW = 6000 W
d = 1.25 m
N = 180 rpm
p
q = 160° = ´ 160 radian = 2.7925 radian
180
m = 0.28
m = 0.5 kg/m
2a = 45° \ a = 22. 5°
T = 750 N.
p dN p ´ 1. 25 ´ 180
We know that, V= = = 11.78 m/s
60 60
We know that, Tc = mv 2 = 0.5 ´ (11. 78) 2 = 69.38 N.

Let T1 = tension in tight side of the rope

T2 = tension in slack side of the rope.
We know that, T1 = T - Tc
= 750 - 69.38 = 680.62 N.
mq
T1 sin a
We know that, =e
T2
T1 680.62
Þ T2 = mq
= 0. 28 ´ 2. 7925
= 88.22 N.
sin a sin (22.5 )
e e
We know that,
Power transmitted per rope = (T1 - T2 ) V
= ( 680 . 62 - 88 . 22) ´ 11. 78
= 6978.47 K = 6.978 KW.
Total power transimitted
No. of ropes =
Power transimitted per rope
60
= = 8.59 » 9 = 9.
6 . 978
9. The following data were recorded with rope brake dynamometer.
Diameter of flywheel = 1.0 m
Speed of engine = 180 rpm
Diameter of rope = 12 mm
Load on brake = 600 N
Spring balance reading = 150 N
Calculate the brake power (BHP) of the engine.
10
Ans. Given data :
W = 600 N
d = 12 mm = 0.012 m
D=1m
S = 150 N
N = 180 rpm
We know that net load on the brape.
= (W - S ) = 600 – 150 = 450 N.
Distance moved in one revolution
= p ( D + d ) = p (1 + 0. 012) = 3.179 m.
We know that workdone per revolution
= net load ´ distance moved in one revolution
= 450 ´ 3.179 = 430.68 N-m.
We know that brake power

workdone per minute
BHP =
60
1430 . 68
=
60
= 23.84 N-m/s = 23.84 W.
10. Mean diameter of screw of a screw of a screw jack is 60 mm, pitch is 12 mm and coefficient of friction
is 0.15 Assuming the load of 30 KN to rotate with screw, find the ratio of torque required to raise the
load to the torque required to lower the load. 10
Ans. Given data :

d m = 60 mm = 6 cm
Pc = 12 mm = 1.2 cm
W = 30 KN = 30 ´ 100 N
30 ´ 1000
= kg = 3058 kg
9. 81
m = 0 .15.
Let a = helix angle.
We know that,
Pc
tan a =
pd m
æ P ö
è p dm ø
1. 2
= tan -1 = 3.64°
p´ 6
and m = 0 .15
tan j = 0.15
Þ j = tan -1 ( 0 . 15) = 8.53°.
Let T1 = torque required to raise
T2 = torque required to lower.
We know that
dm
T1 = W tan ( a + j) ´
2
6
= 3058 tan (3 . 64 + 8 . 53) ´
2
=1978 . 46 kg-cm
dm
and T2 = W tan ( j - a) ´
2
6
= 3058 (8.53 – 3.64) ´
2
= 784 . 87 kg-cm.
We know that ratio,
T1 1978 . 46
= = 2.52.
T2 784 . 87
11. The turning moment diagram of multicylinder engine is drawn to the scale of 1 mm = 500 N-m and 1
mm – 2° The area between output torque and mean torque taken in order form one end are + 50, –
120, + 94, – 144, + 80 – 72, and + 112 mm2 when engine runs at 500 rpm. If total fluctuation of speed is
not to exceed ± 2% of the mean, find mass of the flywheel of radius 1 m. 10
Ans. Given data : N = 500 rpm

Fluctuation = ± 2%
Radius of flagwheel (K) = 1 m
500
Scale 1 mm = 500 N-m = kg-m = 50.968 kg-m
9.81
p
1 mm = 2° = 2 ´ radian
180
Now N 1 = 505 rpm
N 2 = 495 rpm
Energy at A = e
Energy at B = e + 50 Maximum energy
Energy at C = e - 70
Energy at D = e + 24
Energy at E = e - 120 Minimum energy
Energy at F = e - 40
Energy at G = e - 112
Energy at H = e
Maximum energy = e + 50
Minimum energy = e - 120

Excess energy = (e + 50) - ( e - 120)
= 170 mm2 = 170 ´ mm ´ mm
p
= 170 ´ 50. 968 ´ 2 ´ kg-m
180
= 302.45 kg-m.
2p N 1 2p ´ 505
We know that w1 = = = 52.88 rad/sec.
60 60
2p N 2 2p ´ 495
and w2 = = = 51.84 rad/sec.
60 60
We know that,
Energy of flywheel = Excess energy
WK 2 2
Þ ( w1 - w22 ) = 302 . 45
2g
W(1) 2
Þ {(52.88) 2 - (5184
. ) 2} = 302 . 45
981
Þ W ´ 11.1 = 302 . 45
302 . 45
Þ W= = 27.25 kg.
11.1
\ Mass of the fly wheel (W) = 27.25 kg.
12. A cam is designed for a knife edge follower with the data :
(a) Cam lift is 40 mm during 60° of cam rotation with uniform velocity
(b) Dwell for 30° of cam rotation
(c) Return during next 60° of cam rotation with uniform velocity
(d) Dwell for remaining 210° of cam rotation.
Draw profile of cam when line of stroke of follower is passing through cam centre, Mean radius of
cam is 50 mm. 10
Ans. First of all, the displacement diagram is drawn as discussed in the following steps :
(1) Draw the horizontal line AX = 360° to some suitable scale, on this line, mark AS = 60° to represent out
stroke of the follower, ST = 30° to represent dwell, TP = 60° to represent return stroke and PX = 210°
to represent dwell.
(2) Draw vertical line AY to the stroke of the follower and complete the rectangle.
(3) Divide the angular displacement during out stroke and return stroke into any equal number of even
part and draw vertical lines through each point.
(4) Since the follower moves with uniform velocity during out stroke and return stroke there fore the
displacement diagram consists of straight line. join AG and HP.
(5) The complete displacement diagram is shown by AGHPX.
Profile of the came when line of stroke of follower is passing through cam centre :
It is drawn as discussed in the following steps : First of all, the displacement diagram is drawn as
discussed in the following steps :
(1) Draw a base circle with radius equal to the minimum radius of the cam with O as centre.
(2) Since the axis of the follower passes through the axis of the cam shaft, therefore mark trace point A.
(3) From OA, mark angle AOS = 60° to represent out stroke, angle SOT = 30° to represent dwell and
angle TOP = 60° to represent return stroke.
(4) Divide the angular displacements during out stroke and return stroke
into the same number of equal even part as in displacement diagram.
(5) Join the points, 1, 2, 3, ... etc and 0¢ , 1¢ , 2¢ , 3¢, ... etc with centre O and produce beyond the base circle.
(6) Now set off 1B, 2C, 3D, ... etc and 0¢ H , 1¢ J , ... etc from the displacement diagram.
(7) Join the points A, B, C, ... M, N, P with a smooth curve. AGHPA is the complete profile of the cam.
13. A porter governor has equal arms each 200 mm long and pivoted on the axis of rotation. Each ball
has a mass of 5 kg and mass of central load on sleeve is 30 kg. The radius of rotation of ball is 150 mm
and 200 mm respectively. Find minimum and maximum speeds and range of speed of the governor.
If frictional force is 2.5 kg. 10
Ans. Given data :
Length of arms = 200 mm = 20 cm
Ball weight (w) = 5 kg
Sleeve weight (W) = 30 kg
Radius of rotation at highest point (r1 ) = 200 mm = 20 cm
Radius of rotation at lowest point (r2 ) = 150 mm = 15 cm
Frictional force (F ) = 2.5 kg.
Minimum equilibrium speed at lowest point :
r2
We know that, sin a 2 = sin b 2 =
20
ær ö
\ a 2 = b 2 = sin -1 ç 2 ÷
è 20 ø
= sin -1 æç ö÷ = 48.59°.
15
è 20 ø
We know that
w 2 W
w2 ´ r 2 = w tan a 2 + (tan a 2 + tan b 2 )
g 2
5 30
Þ ´ w22 ´ 15 = 5 tan ( 48 . 59) ° + {tan ( 48 . 59) ° + tan ( 48 . 59) °}
981 2
25 2
Þ w2 = 39 . 69
327
39.69 ´ 327
Þ w22 =
25
39 . 69 ´ 327
Þ w22 = = 22.78 rad /sec.
25
w´ 60 22 . 78 ´ 60
\ N2 = =
2p 2p
= 217.53 » 218
= 218 rpm.
Maximum equilibrium at highest point :

Q Length of arm = radius of rotation at highest point
= 20 cm
It is impossible so, the maximum equilibrium speed at this highest point we can not find.
Range of speed of governor at lowest point (Taken + F)

r 3 = 15 cm
F = 2 . 5 kg
a 3 = b 3 = 48 . 59°.
We know that,
w 2 W +F
g 2
5 2 30 + 2 . 5
Þ w3 ´ 15 = 5 tan ( 48 . 59) ° + {tan ( 48 . 59) ° + tan ( 48 . 59) °}
981 2
25 2
Þ w3 = 42 . 52
327
42 . 52 ´ 327
Þ w23 =
25
42 . 52 ´ 327
Þ w3 = = 23.58 rad/sec
25
w ´ 60 23 . 58 ´ 60
\ N3 = 3 =
2p 2p
= 225.2 » 226
\ N 3 = 226 rpm
Taken – F
r 4 = 15 cm
a 4 = b 4 = 48 . 59°
F = - 2 . 5 kg
We know that,
w 2 W -F
g 2
5 2 30 + 2 . 5
Þ w4 ´ 15 = 5 tan ( 48 . 59) ° + {tan ( 48 . 59) ° + tan ( 48 . 59) °}
981 2
25 2
Þ w4 = 32 . 83
327
32 . 83 ´ 327
Þ w24 =
25
Þ w4 = 20.72 rad/sec
w4 ´ 60 20 . 72 ´ 60
N4 = =
2p 2p
= 197.86 » 198
\ N 4 = 198 rpm.
Hence, the range of speed of governor at lowest point
N 4 - N 3 = 198 - 226 rpm.
o
2009 (A)
2009 (A)

GROUP-A

(i) Which of the following is a lower pair?
(a) Ball and socket (b) Piston cylinder
(c) Cam and follower (d) (a) and (b)
Ans. (b) Piston cylinder
(ii) Simple mechanism has
(a) one link (b) two links
(c) three links (d) four links
Ans. (d) four links
(iii) Crowning on pulleys helps in
(a) increasing velocity ratio
(b) increasing belt and pulley life
(c) automatic adjustment to run centrally
(d) none of these
Ans. (c) automatic adjustment to run centrally
Explanation : The crowning of pulleys helps in automatic adjustment of the belt position so that the belt
runs centrally.
(iv) The moment on pulley which produces rotation is called
(a) inertia (b) momentum
(c) work (d) torque
Ans. (d) Torque
(v) In Gear drive, module is equal to

1 1
(a) (b)
Diametral pitch Circular pitch
Diametral pitch
(c) (d) p
p
1
Ans. (a)
Diametral pitch
(vi) Length of approach in Gear drive is associated to

(a) driven gear (b) driver gear
(c) (a) and (b) (d) none of these
Ans. (c) (a) and (b)

(vii) The function of a governor is to
(a) smoothen the cyclic fluctuations of speed
(b) helps to start the engine
(c) take care of output fluctuations and control the input
accordingly
(d) all of the above
Ans. (c) take care of output fluctuations and control the input accordingly
(viii) Kinetic is associated to
(a) inertial forces (b) torque
(c) force (d) none of these
Ans. (a) inertial forces
(ix) Cam size depends on
Ans. (a) base circle
(x) The radius of Gyration of a disc type flywheel of diameter D is
D
(a) D (b)
2
D 3
(c) (d) D
4 2
3
Ans. (d) D
2
(xi) Porter Governor could be classified as
(a) inertia type (b) pendulum type
(c) centrifugal type (d) dead weight type
Ans. (d) dead weight type
(xii) Quality of governor can be judged by its

(a) stability (b) sensitivity
(c) effort and power (d) all of the above
(xiii) Centrifugal tension in belts
(a) reduces power transmission
(b) Increase power transmission
(d) none of above
Ans. (d) none of above
(xiv) Ratio of number of teeth and Pitch circle diameter is
(a) pitch (b) circular pitch
(c) diametral pitch (d) module
Ans. (c) diametral pitch

(xv) Maximum efficiency of screw jack is
1 + cos j
(a) (b) 1 - tan j
1 - cos j
1 - sin j
(c) (d) all of the above
1 + sin j
1 - sin j
Ans. (c)
1 + sin j
(xvi) Rope and brake dynamometer uses
(a) to measure IHP
(b) to measure BHP of prime mover
(c) for BHP of prime mover for slow speed engine
(d) none of the above
Ans. (v) to measure BHP of prime mover
(xvii) Belt drive is
(a) lower pair (b) cylindrical pair
(c) higher pair (d) all of the above
Ans. (c) higher pair
(xviii) Kinematic pairs are those which have two elements that
(a) have line contact (b) have surface contact
(c) permit relative motion (d) are held together
Ans. (c) permit relative motion
(xix) The surface of the gear tooth below the pitch surface is called
(a) bottom tooth (b) face
(c) flank (d) all of the above
Ans. (c) flank

(xx) Product of circular pitch and diametral pitch is
1
(a) (b) p
p
(c) 2.3 (d) none of the above
Ans. (b) p
GROUP-B

2. Define mechanical advantages and velocity ratio and obtain their expression. 5
Ans. Mechanical advantage : The ratio of the load lifted to the effort applied at the end of lever is known
as mechanical advantage
Let W = load to be lifted

P = effort applied at the screw to lift the load
= W tan ( a + j )
W W
\ M.A. = =
P W tan ( a + j)
1
M.A. =
tan ( a + j)
Velocity ratio : The ratio of the rate of distance moved by the effort to the rate of distance moved by the
load is known as velocity ratio
p d m / time
V.R. =
Pc / time
pd m
=
Pc
1 1 æ Pc ö
= = ççQ = tan a ÷÷
Pc tan a è pd m ø
pd m
1
\ V.R. =
tan a
3. A Porter governor of equal links and arms of 30 cm. For the highest and lowest position of sleeve,
arms are inclined 45° and 30° to vertical. If the arms intersect on the axis of rotation, find the lift of
sleeve. 5
Ans. Given data :

Length of links and arms = 30 cm
At highest point, a 1 = b1 = 45°
At lowest point, a 2 = b 2 = 30°
We know that lift of sleeve, h = 2( h2 - h1 )

= 2 ( 30cos 30° - 30 cos 45° )
= 9.53 cm.
4. Obtain the expression for the length of open belt, if diameters are ‘d1 ’ ‘d2 ’ and centre distance of
pulleys is ‘l’. 5
Ans. Let d1 = diameter of smaller pulleys

d1
\ r1 =
2
and d 2 = diameter of larger pulleys
d
r2 = 2
2
ÐC1O1 B1 = p - 2j
ÐC 2O2 B 2 = p + 2j
and arc C1 P1 B1 = ( p - 2j)r1
arc C 2 P2 B 2 = ( p + 2j)r 2
In O1 A 2O2 , (O1 A 2 ) 2 = (O1O2 ) 2 - ( A 2O2 ) 2
Þ (O1 A 2 ) 2 = (O1O2 ) 2 - (C 2O2 - A 2C 2 ) 2
Þ (O1 A 2 ) 2 = (O1O2 ) 2 - (C 2O2 - C1O1 ) 2
Þ (O1 A 2 ) 2 = l 2 - (r 2 - r1 ) 2
Þ O1 A 2 = l 2 - (r 2 - r1 ) 2 .
Length of open belt
= 2O1 A 2 + arc C1 P1 B1 + arc C 2 P2 B 2
= 2 l 2 - (r 2 - r1 ) 2 + ( p - 2j)r1 + ( p + 2j)r 2
2
æd d ö d d
= 2 l 2 - ç 2 - 1 ÷ + ( p - 2j) 1 + ( p + 2j) 2 Proved.
è 2 2 ø 2 2
5. The turning moment diagram for an engine consists of two isosceles triangles. The maximum height
for each triangle represents turning moment equal to 100 kg-m while the base of the triangle is from
q = 0° to q = 180° and q = 180° to q = 360°. If the engine runs at 300 rpm. Find indicated horse power
of the engine. 5
Ans. Given data :
T = 100 kg-m
q = 2p
Let Tm = mean torque

Speed (N) = 300 rpm
We know that workdone,
W = Tm ´ 2p ... (i)
and from figure workdone,
1
W= ´ p ´ 100 ´ 2
2
Þ W =100 p ... (ii)

Tm ´ 2p = 100 p
Þ Tm = 50 kg-m.
We know that I.P. = Tm ´ w
2p ´ N
= Tm ´
60
2p ´ 300
= 50 ´
60
= 1570.79 kg-m/s = 20.94 H.P.

6. Define vibration and also write different types of vibration. 5
Ans. See Q.No. 15 (a), Group-C of 2010 (Even).

1
7. Define the following terms : 2 ´ 2=5
2
(a) Circular pitch
(b) Module
Ans. (a) Circular pitch : It is the distance measured on the circumference of the pitch. circle from a point
of one tooth to the corresponding point on the next tooth. It is usually Pc .
pD
Pc =
T
where D = diameter of pitch circle

T = number of teeth on the wheel.
(b) Module : It is the ratio of the pitch circle diameter in millimeters to the number of teeth. It is usually
denoted by m.
D
m=
T
GROUP-C

8. The following data refer to an engine working on four stroke cycle IHP = 40, speed = 300 rpm,
permissible fluctuation of speed = ± 3%.
Workdone during power stroke

= 2. 5
Workdone during compression stroke
Assuming that work done during suction and exhaust stroke as negligible and other as triangle
shape, find
(a) energy stored by flywheel
(b) moment of Inertia of flywheel 10
Ans. (a) See Q.No. 13, Group-C of 2010 (Even).
(b) N 1 = 309 rpm
N 2 = 291 rpm
We know that,
K.E. of flywheel = excess energy
1 I
Þ ´ ´ ( w12 - w22 ) = 1711. 25
2 g
I ìï æ 2p ´ 309 ö æ 2p ´ 291 ö üï
2 2
1
Þ ´ íç ÷ ç- ÷ ý = 1711. 25
2 9 . 81 ïî è 60 ø è 60 ø ïþ
Þ I = 283.48 kg-m2.
9. Define isochronous of governor.

In a porter governor each ball weight 2 kg and the central dead weight carried by the sleeve is 20 kg.
The links form an equal sided parallelogram in all positions, and each line is 20 cm long. At what
equilibrium speed must the governor be driven so that balls revolve in a circle of radius 20 cm. 10
Ans. Isochronous of governor : The isochronous governors is defined as the equilibrium speed is
constant for all radii of rotation of the balls within the working range, neglecting friction,
Let r = mean radius
r1 = maximum radius
r2 = minimum radius
i.e., \ N 2 - N 1 = 0
Þ N 2 = N1
\ h1 = h2 which is impossible in case of porter governor.
Given data :
Sleeve weight (W) = 20 kg
Length of link = 20 cm
Radius of rotation of ball = 20 cm.
Here, length of link = radius of rotation of ball = 20 cm
It is impossible, so equilibrium speed at this state we cannot find.
10. A bolt with square threaded screw has mean diameter 2.5 cm and pitch 3 mm. It carries an exial
thrust of 10 KN on the bolt head of 2.5 cm of mean radius, if load rotates with bolt and ‘m’for nut and
screw is 0.12. Find the force applied at the end of 45 cm long spanner in tightening up the bolt. 10
Ans. Given data :
Mean diameter (d m ) = 2.5 cm
Pitch (Pc ) = 3 mm = 0.3 cm
Laid (W) = 10 KN
10000
= 10000 N = kg = 1019.37 kg
9.81
m = 0 .12
r m (collor) = 2.5 cm
Length of spanner (l) = 45 cm.

Let P1 = force applied on spanner.

P
tan a = c
pd m
æ P ö
è p dm ø
æ 0 .3 ö
= tan -1 ç ÷ = 2.187°
è p ´ 2.5 ø
and m = 0 .12
tan j = 0 .12
Þ j = tan -1 ( 0 .12) = 6.84°.
dm
We know that, P1 ´ l = W tan ( a + j) ´
2
2 .5
Þ P1 ´ 45 = 1019 . 37 tan ( 2 .187 + 6 . 84) ´
2
Þ P1 ´ 45 = 202 . 43
202 . 43
Þ P1 = = 4.49 kg.
45
T1
11. Prove that = emq in belt
T2
T2 = tension in slack side
m = coefficient of friction between pulley and bolt
q = contact angle in radian. 10
12. The drum of a band and block brake is 60 cm in diameter and there are 14 blocks each of which
stubtends an angle 15°at the drum centre. One end of the band is attached to the fulcrum of the
brake lever and other to a pin 12.5 cm from the fulcrum. If the torque applied to the drum is to be 300
kg-m. What minimum effort must be applied to lever of 75 cm from the fulcrum? Take m = 0. 2510
Ans. Given data :

d = 60 cm = 0.6 m
r = 0.3 m
h = 14
2q = 15° \ q = 7. 5°
l = 75 cm
m = 0.25
Braking torque = 300 kg-m.

Braking torque = (Tn - To ) r
Þ 300 = (Tn - To ) ´ 0. 3
Þ Tn - To =1000 kg ... (i)
Also we know that,
n
=ç ÷
To è 1 - m tan q ø
14
Tn ì 1 + 0 . 25 tan (7 . 5) ü
Þ =í ý
To î 1 - 0 . 25 tan (7 . 5) þ
Tn
Þ = 2 . 51
To
\ Tn = 2 . 51To .
Substitution this value in equation (i), we get
2.51 To – To = 1000
Þ To = 660 . 47 kg.
Taking moment about fulcrum
To ´ 12 . 5 = P ´ 75
Þ 660.47 ´ 12.5 = P ´ 75
660.47 ´ 12.5
Þ P= = 110 kg.
75
13. The following data refer to a 20° involute pair of spur gears in mesh, in which pinion is driver and
gear ratio = 2.5 and length of arc of approach in terms of module = p. Find the least number of teeth
on driver and driven wheel and addenda on them in terms of module. 10
Ans. Given data :

j = 20°
G = 2. 5
Length of arc of approach = p m
Let t = number of teeth on pinion
T = number of teeth on gear.
We know that,
sin j
Length of arc of approach = r
cos j
Þ pm = r tan j
Þ pm =
mt
tan j éQr = mt ù
2 êë 2 úû
t
Þ tan j = p
2
2p 2p
Þ t= = = 17.26 » 18
tan j tan 20
\ T = 2 . 5t = 2.5 ´ 18 = 45.
\ No. of teeth on pinion (t) = 18.
No. of teeth on gear (T) = 45.
mT m ´ 45
Now, R= = = 22 . 5 m
2 2
mt m ´ 18
and r= = = 9 m.
2 2
We know that,
R sin j = r a2 - r 2 cos 2 j - r sin j
Þ 22 . 5 m sin 20° = r a2 - ( 9 m) 2 cos 2 20° - 9 m sin 20°
Þ 1077 m = r a2 - ( 9 m) 2 cos 2 20°
Squaring both side we get,

116.07 m 2 = r a2 - ( 9 m) 2 cos 2 20°
Þ r a2 = 116.07 m2 + (9 m)2 cos 20°
Þ r a2 = 187.59 m2
Þ r a = 13.69 m.

= ra - r
= 13.69 m – 9 m = 4.69 m.
and we know that,
r sin j = R a2 - R 2 cos 2 j - R sin j
Þ 9 m sin 20° = R a2 - ( 22 . 5 m) 2 cos 2 20° - 22 . 5 m sin 20°
Þ R a2 - ( 22 . 5 m) 2 cos 2 20 ° = 9 m sin 20° + 22 . 5 m sin 20°
Þ R a2 - ( 22 . 5 m) 2 cos 2 20° = 10.77 m

Squaring both side we get,
R a2 - ( 22 . 5 m) 2 cos 2 20° = 116 . 07 m2
Þ R a2 = 116.07 m2 + (22.5 m)2 cos 2 20°
Þ R a2 = 563 .1 m2
Þ R a = 23.73 m.
We know that addendum on gear
= Ra - R
= 23.73 m – 22.5 m
= 1.23 m.
o
THEORY OF MACHINE AND MECHANISM 300
2005 (A)
Answer Q.No.1 and any four form others.

Each questions carry equal marks.
1. Choose correct answers : 2 ´ 8 = 16
(i) A kinematic chain is known as mechanism when
(a) one of the links is fixed
(b) two of the links are fixed
(c) none of the links is fixed
(d) none
Ans. (a) one of the links is fixed
Explanation : When one of the links of a kinematic chain is fixed, the chain is known as mechanism. It
may be used for transmitting or transforming motion. e.g. engine indicators.
(ii) The wheels of a moving car possess
(a) potential energy only
(b) kinetic energy of translation only
(c) kinetic energy of rotation only
(d) kinetic energy of translation and rotation both
Ans. (d) kinetic energy of translation and rotation both
(iii) In a screw jack, the effort ‘P’ required to lift the load W is given by
(a) P = W tan ( a + j) (b) P = W tan ( a - j)
(c) P = W cos ( a + j) (d) none
Ans. (a) P = W tan ( a + j )
(iv) The module is reciprocal of
(a) circular pitch (b) pitch diameter
(c) diametral pitch (d) none
Ans. (c) diametral pitch
(v) When controlling force (Fc ) and radius of rotation (r) for a spring controlled governor is
Fc = ar + b, the governor will be
(a) unstable (b) stable
(c) isochronous (d) none
301 THEORY OF MACHINE AND MECHANISM
Ans. (a) unstable

Explanation : Unstable — Fc = ar + b
Stable — Fc = ar - b
Isochronous — Fc = ar
(vi) The brakes commonly used in railway trains is

(c) band and block brake (d) internal expanding brake
Ans. (a) shoe brake
(vii) For static balancing of a shaft
(a) net dynamic force acting on shaft is zero
(b) net couple due to dynamic forces acting on shaft is zero.
(d) none
Ans. (a) net dynamic force acting on shaft is zero
(viii) The power transmitted by a belt is maximum when maximum tension in the belt T is equal to :
(a) 3Tc (b) 2Tc
(c) Tc (d) none
Ans. (a) 3Tc
2. (a) Prove that for self-locking screw, efficiency is less than 50%. 6
(b) The pitch of 40 mm mean diameter threaded screw Jack is 10 mm, raises a load of 15 KN, If a
force of 120 N is applied at the end of a lever to raise the load, then what should be the length of
the lever used? Take co-efficient of friction as 0.12. State whether the screw is self-locking. 10
Ans. (a) See Q.No. 2, Group-B of 2010 (A).

(b) Given data :
d m = 40 mm = 4 cm
Pc = 10 mm = 1 cm
W = 15 KN = 15000 N
15000
= kg = 1529 kg
9. 81
120
P1 = 120 N = kg
9. 81
= 12.23 kg
m = 0. 12.
We know that,
Pc
tan a =
pd m
æ P ö
Þ a = tan -1 çç c ÷
÷
è pd m ø
æ 1 ö
= tan -1 çç ÷÷ = 4.55°
è p´ 4 ø
and m = 0. 12
tan j = 0. 12
Þ j = tan -1 ( 0. 12)
= 6.84°.
We know that,
dm
P1 ´ l = W tan ( a + j ) ´
2
4
Þ 12. 23 ´ l = 1529 tan ( 4 . 55 + 6. 84 ) ´
2
Þ 12. 23 ´ l = 616. 04
616. 04
Þ l= = 50.37 cm.
12. 23
\ Length of lever (l) = 50.37 cm.

and we know that efficiency of the screw,
tan a
h= ´ 100%
tan ( a + j)
tan 4 . 55
= ´ 100%
tan ( 4 . 55 + 6 . 84)
= 39.5% < 50%
Here, h < 50%.
Therefore this screw is self locking screw.
3. (a) For maximum power transmission by belt drive, prove that

Tc = T/3
where Tc = centrifugal tension in the belt and
T = maximum tension in the belt. 6
(b) Write down the advantages and disadvantages of v-belt drive over flat belt drive. 4
(c) Write down classification of gears. 6
Ans. (a) See Q.No. 6, Group-B of 2011 (Even).

(b) Following are the advantages of and disadvantages of the v-belt drive over flat belt drive.
Advantages :
(i) The v-belt drive gives compact ness due to the small distance between the centres of pulley.
(ii) The drive is positive, because the slip between the belt and pulley groove is negligible.
(iii) Since the v-belts are made endless and there is no joint trouble, therefore the drive is smooth.
(iv) It provides longer life 3 to 5 years.
(v) It can be easily installed and removed
(vi) The operation of the belt and pulley is quist.
(vii) The belt have the ability to cushion the shock when machine are started.
(viii) The high velocity ratio may be obtained.
Disadvantage :
(i) The v-belt drive cannot be used with large centre distance.
(ii) The v-belt are not so durable as flat belts.
(iii) The construction of pulley for v-belt is more complicated than pulley for flat belts.
(iv) Since the v-belts are subjected to certain amount of creep, therefore these are not for constant speed
application such as timing devices.
(v) The belt life is greatly influenced with temperature changes improper belt tension and mismatching of
belt length.
(vi) The centrifugal tension prevents the use of v-belts at speed 5 m/s and above 50 m/s.
(c) The gears may be classified as follows :

(1) According to the position of axes of the shafts :
(i) Parallel :
(a) spur greas
(b) Helical gears
(c) Herring bone gears
(ii) Intersecting :
(a) Bevel gears
(b) Helical bevel gears.
(iii) Non-parallel and non intersecting :
(a) Spiral gears.
(2) According to the peripheral velocity of gears :

(i) Low velocity gears
(ii) Medium velocity gears
(iii) High speed gears.
(3) According to the type of gearing :

(i) External gearing
(ii) Internal gearing
(iii) Rack and pinion.
(4) According to position of teeth on the gear surface :
(i) Straight
(ii) Inclined
(iii) Curved.
4. (a) Write down the advantages and disadvantages of gear drive. 6
(b) Design the spur gear if distance between centres of two shaft runs at 300 and 100 rpm
respectively.
Take circular pitch of gears as 25 mm. 10
Ans. (a) Following are the advantages and disadvantage of the gear drive belt drive.
Advantage :
(i) It transmits exact velocity ratio.
(ii) It may be used to transmit large power
(iii) It has high efficiency.
(iv) It has reliable services
(v) It has compact layout.
Disadvantages :
(i) The manufacture of years require special tools and equipment
(ii) The error in cutting teeth may cause vibrations and noise during operation.
(b) Given data : x = 500 mm

N 1 = 300 rpm
N 2 = 100 rpm
Pc = 25 cm.
Let d1 = pitch circle diameter of the first gear

d 2 = pitch circle diameter of the second gear.
We know that speed ratio,
N1 d2 300
= =
N2 d1 100
Þ d 2 = 3d1 ... (i)
and centre distance between the shaft (x)

1
600 = ( d1 + d 2 )
2
Þ d1 + d 2 = 1000 ... (ii)
From equations (i) and (ii) we find that
d1 = 250 mm
d 2 = 750 mm.
\ Number of teeth on the first gear,
pd1 p ´ 250
T1 = = = 31. 41
Pc 25
and, number of teeth on the second gear,
pd 2 p ´ 750
T2 = = = 94 . 24.
Pc 25
Since the number of teeth on both the gears are to be in complete numbers therefore let us make the
number of teeth on first gear as 32. Therefore for a speed ratio of 3, the number of teeth on the second gear
should as 32 ´ 3 = 96.
Now exact pitch circle diameter of the first gear,
T1 ´ Pc 32 ´ 25
d1¢ = = = 254 . 64 mm
p p
and, the exact pitch circle diameter of the second gear,
T2 ´ Pc 96 ´ 25
d 2¢ = = = 763 . 94
p p
= 763.94 mm.
Exact distance between the two shaft
d1¢ + d ¢2 254.64 + 763.94

x¢ = =
2 2
= 509.29 mm.
Hence the number of teeth on the first and second gear must be 32 and 96 and their pitch circle diameters
must be 254.64 and 763.94 respectively. The exact distance between the two shaft must be 509.29 mm.
5. (a) Define co-efficient of fluctuation of energy of multi-cylinder engine. 4
(b) The turning moment diagram of a multi cylinder engine is drawn to the scale of 1 mm = 500
N-m and 1 mm = 2°. The areas between output torque and mean torque taken in order from
one end are + 50, – 120, + 94, – 144, + 80, – 72 and 112 mm2 when engine runs at 500 rpm. If total
fluctuation of speed is not to exceed + 2% of the mean, find mass of the flywheel of radius 1 m.
12
Ans. (a) Co-efficient of fluctuation of energy : The ratio of the maximum fluctuation of energy to the
work done per cycle.
It is usually denoted by C E .
Maximum fluctuation of energy

\ CE =
Workdone per cycle
We know that,
Workdone per cycle = Tmean ´ q
where, Tmean = mean torque
q = angle turn in one revolution

= 2p, in case of two stroke internal combustion engines
= 4p, in case of four stroke internal combustion engines.
P ´ 60 P
and Tmean = =
2pN w
where, P = power transmitted in watts
N = speed in r.p.m
w = angular speed in rad/s.
(b) See Q.No. 11, Group-C of 2010 (A).
6. (a) Define the terms for a governor, sensitiveness, stability, isochronous, hunting. 4
(b) Deduce the formula for effort and power of a porter governor. 8
(c) Why balancing is necessary for high speed machines? 4
Ans. (a) See Q.No. 5, Group-C of 2010 (A).
(b) Effort of a governor : The effort of a governor is the mean force exerted at the sleeve for a given
Considering the case of a porter governor with the arms and links equal in length and intersecting on the
axis.
r
tan a = tan b = ... (i)
h
We know that,
w 2 W
w ´ r = w tan a + (tan a + tan b)
g 2
w 2
Þ w ´ r = ( w + W ) tan a (Qa = b)
g
w 2 r
Þ w ´ = (w + W ) ´ [Qfrom (i)]
g h
g æw+W ö
Þ h= ç ÷ ... (ii)
w2 è w ø
If the speed increases to x rad/sec and the height of the governor remains the same, the load on the
sleeve increases, to j kg.
g æw+W +Qö
h= ç ÷ ... (iii)
( wx ) è2 w ø
Equating equation (ii) and (iii), we get
g æw+W ö g æw+W + Qö
ç ÷= 2 2 ç ÷
w è
2 w ø w x è w ø
w+W + Q
Þ w+W =
x2
w+W + Q
Þ x2 =
w+W
Q
Þ x 2 =1 +
w+W
Q
Þ = x 2 -1
w+W
Þ Q = ( x 2 - 1) ( w + W ) ... (iv)
Q
We know that effort =
2
1 2
effort = ( x - 1) ( w + W )
2
This is the required result.

Power of governor : The product of mean value of the effort and the distance through which the sleeve
moves.
We know that,
lift = 2 ( h2 - h1 ).
We know that,
Power = effort ´ lift
1 2
= ( x - 1) ( w + W ) ´ 2( h2 - h1 )
2
\ Power = ( x 2 - 1) ( w + W ) ( h2 - h1 )
(c) In high speed machine there are two types of forces acting. statical forces and inertia forces. The
statical forces are due to the working substance and these are always in equilibrium amongst themselves
excepting the weight of the engine acting down wards. The inertia forces are due to acceleration of various
components of the engine.
Such forces may not be in equilibrium, with the result that there exists a resultant force and couple. The
purpose of balancing is to eliminate either partially or completely the effect due to resultant force and couple,
between the engine frame and the foundation. Thus the purpose of balancing is to avoid vibration of the prime
mover by balancing the inertia force and couple.
7. A cam is designed for a knife edge follower with the following data : 16
(b) Dwell for next 30° of cam rotation
(d) Dwell during remaining 210° of cam rotation.
Draw profile of cam when line of stroke of the follower is offset 20 mm from the axis of the cam shaft
is minimum radius of cam is 50 mm.
Ans. First of all, the displacement diagram is drawn as discussed in the following steps :
stroke of the follower, ST = 30° to represent dwell, TP = 60° to represent return stroke and PX = 210°
to represent dwell.
(2) Draw vertical line AY to the stroke of the follower and complete the rectangle.
(4) Since the follower moves with uniform velocity during out stroke and return stroke there fore the
displacement diagram consists of straight line. Join AG and HP.
(5) The complete displacement diagram is shown by AGHPX.
Profile of the cam when line of stroke of the follower is off set 20 mm from the axis of the cam shaft.
It is drawn as discussed in the following steps :
(1) Draw a base circle with radius equal to the minimum radius of the cam with O as centre.
(2) Draw the axis of the follower at a distance of 20 mm from the axis of the cam, which intersects the
base circle at A.
(3) Join AO and draw an off set circle of radius 20 mm with centre O.
(4) From OA, mark angle A OS = 60° to represent out stroke, angle SOT = 30° to represent dwell and
angle TOP = 60° to represent return stroke.
(5) Divide the angular displacements during out stroke and return stroke into the same number of equal
even part as in displacement diagram.
(6) Now from the points 1, 2, 3, ... etc on the base circle, draw tangents to the offset circle and produce
these beyond the base.
(7) Now set off 1B, 2C, 3D, ... etc and 0¢ H , 1¢ J , ... etc from the displacement diagram.
(8) Joint the points A, B, C, ..., M, N, P with a smooth curve. The curve AGHPA is the complete profile of
the cam.
8. Write short notes on any two : 2 ´ 8 = 16
(a) Classification of Kinematic pair

(b) Inversion of mechanism
(c) Types of free vibration
(d) Types of gear train
(e) Static balancing & dynamic balancing.
Ans. (a) Classification of kinematic pair : The kimematic pair may be classified according to the
following considerations :
(1) According to the type of relative motion between the elements :

(i) Sliding pair : When the two elements of a pair are connected in such a way that one can only slide
relative to the other, the pair is known as a sliding pair. The piston and cylinder is example of a sliding
pair.
(ii) Turning pair : When the two elements of a pair are connected in such a way that one can only turn or
revolve about a fixed axis of another link, the pair is known as turning pair. The wheels turning over
their axles is the example a turning pair.
(iii) Rolling pair : When the two elements of pair are connected in such a way that one rolls over another
fixed link. The pair is known as rolling pair. ball and roller bearings is example of rolling pair.
(iv) Screw pair : When the two elements of a pair are connected in such a way that one element can turn
about the other by screw threads, the pair is known as screw pair. The bolt with a nut is example of a
screw pair.
(v) Spherical pair : When two elements of a pair are connected in such a way that one element turns or
swivels about the other fixed element the pair formed is called a spherical pair. The ball and socket
joint is example of spherical pair.
(2) According to the type of contant between the elements :
(i) Lower pair : When the two elements of a pair have a surface contanct when relative motion takes
place and the surface of one element slides over the surface of the other, the pair formed is known as
lower pair.
(ii) Higher pair : When the two elements of a pair have a line or point contact when relative motion takes
place and the motion between the two elements is partly turning and partly sliding, then the pair is
known as higher pair.
(3) According to the type of closure :
(i) Self closed pair : When the two elements of a pair are connected together mechanically in such a way
that only required kind of relative motion occurs, it is then known as self closed pair.
(ii) Forced-closed pair : When the two elements of a pair are not connected mechanically but are kept in
contact by the action of external forces, the pair is said to be a force-closed pair.
(b) Inversion of Mechanism : When one of links is fixed in a kinematic chain, it is called a mechanism,
so, we can obtain as many mechanisms as the number of links in a kinematic chain by fixing, in turn different
links in a kinematic chain, This method of obtaining different mechanisms by fixing different links in a
kinematic chain, is known as inversion of the mechanism. The relative motions between the various links is
not changed in any manner through the process of inversion, but their absolute motion may be changed
drastically.
The part of a mechanism which initially moves with respect to the frame or fixed link is called driver and
that part of the mechanism to which motion is transmitted is called follower.
Most of the mechanisms are reversible, so that same link can play the role of a driver and follower at
different times. For example in a reciprocating steam engine, the piston is the driver and flywheel is a follower
while in a reciprocating air compressor, the flywheel is a driver.
(c) Free vibration : When no external force acts on the body, after giving it an initial displacement, when
the body is said to be under free vibration. It is also called natural vibrations. The frequency of the free
vibrations is called free frequency.
The following three types of free vibrations :

(i) Longitudinal vibrations : When the particles of the shaft or dist moves parallel to the axis of the shaft,
then vibrations are known as longitudinal vibrations.
(ii) Transverse vibrations : When the particles of the shaft or dist move approximately perpendicular to
the axis of the shaft, then the vibrations are known as transverse vibrations.
(iii) Torsional vibrations : When the particles of the shaft or disc move in a circle about the axis of the
shaft, then the vibrations are known as torsional vibrations.
(d) Gear train : Two or more gears are made to mech with each-other to transmit power one shaft to
another. Such a combination is called gear train.
Following are the different types of gear trains, depending upon the arrangement of wheel.
(i) Simple gear train : When there is only one gear on each shaft is known as simple gear train.
(ii) Compound gear train : When there are more than one gear on a shaft is called compound train of
gear.
(iii) Reverted gear train : When the axes of the first gear and the least gear are co-axial then the gear train
is known as reverted gear train.
(iv) Epicyclic gear train : The axis of the shafts, over which the gears are mounted, may move relative to
a fixed axis is known as epicyclic gear train.
(e) Static balancing : The net dynamic force acting on the shaft is equal to zero. This requires that the line
of action of three centrifugal force must be the same. This is the condition for static balancing.
In other words, the centre of the masses of the system must lie on the axis of rotation.
Dynamic balancing :
(i) The net dynamic force acting on the shaft is equal to zero. This requires that the line of action of three
centrifugal force must be the same.
(ii) The net couple due to the dynamic forces acting on the shaft is equal to zero.
The conditions (i) and (ii) together give dynamic balancing.
o
2003 (A)
Answer any five questions

Question No. 1 is compulsory
1. Choose correct answers : 2 ´ 8 = 16
(a) The motion of a piston in the cylinder of an engine is an example of ........... motion.
Ans. Completely constrained

(b) The maximum efficiency of a screw jack is ........... .
1 - sin j
Ans.
1 + sin j
(c) In open belt drive, driving and driven pulley rotate in ........... direction.
Ans. Same
(d) Initial tension in the belt is ........... .
T1 + T2
Ans.
2
(e) Circular pitch of a gear is ........... .
Ans. The distance measured on the circumference of the pitch circle from a point of one tooth to the
corresponding point on the next tooth.
(f) The height of a governor is ........... .
Ans. 895/N2
(g) Brake lining materials should must have ........... heat dissipation capacity.
Ans. high
(h) Hydraulic brake is used in ........... .
Ans. heavy vehicle

2. Can expression for torque required to lower the load screw jack.
Switch of 60 mm mean diameter threaded screw of a v-jack is 15 mm. The co-efficient of friction
between crew and the nut is 0.15 Determine the torque required are screw to raise a load of 30 KN,
assuming the load to rote with the screw. Determine the ratio of the torque sired to raise the load to
the torque required to lower road and also efficiency of the machine. 8 + 8 = 16
Ans. If one complete turn of a screw thread be imagined to be unwound from the body of the screw and
developed, it will from an inclined plane.
Let Pc = pitch of the screw
d m = mean diameter of the screw

a = helix angle
P1 = effort applied at the circumference of the screw to lower the
load.
W = weight to be lowered
H = coefficient of friction between the screw and nut = tan f.
From the geometry of figure we find that
Pc
tan a = ... (i)
pdm
Resolving the force along the plane

P1 cos a = F - W sin a
Þ P1 cos a = mR N - W sin a ... (ii)
Resolving the forces perpendicular to the plane
R N = W cos a - p1 sin a ... (iii)
Substituting this value in (ii), we get

P1 cos a = m (W cos a - P1 sin a ) - W sin a
Þ P1 cos a = mW cos a - mP1 sin a - W sin a

Þ P1 cos a + mP1 sin a = mW cos a - W sin a
Þ P1 (cos a + m sin a ) = mW cos a - W sin a
(m cos a - sin a )
Þ P1 = W ´
(cos a + m sin a )
(tan j × cos a - sin a)
=W ´ [From equation (i)]
(cos a + tan j sin a)
Multiplying the numerator and denominator by cos f
(sin j cos a - sin a cos j)

P1 = W ´
(cos a cos j + sin j sin a
sin ( j - a )
=W ´ = W ´ tan ( j - a ).
cos ( j - a )
\ Torque required to overcome friction between the screw and nut
dm
T = P1 ´
2
dm
\ T = W tan ( j - a ) ´
2
This is required result.
Given data :
Pc = 15 mm = 1.5 cm
d m = 60 mm = 6 cm
W = 30 KN = 30000 N
30000
= kg = 3058 kg.
9 . 81
m = 0. 15
Let a = helix angle
We know that,
Pc
tan a =
pd m
æ P ö
Þ a = tan -1 çç c ÷
÷
è p dm ø
æ 1. 5 ö
= tan -1 çç ÷÷ = 4.54°
è p´ 6 ø
and m = 0. 15
tan j = 0. 15
j = tan -1 ( 0. 15)
= 8. 53°.
Let T1 = torque required to races
T2 = torque required to lower.
We know that,
dm
T1 = W tan ( a + j ) ´
2
6
= 3058 tan ( 4 . 54 + 8. 53) ´
2
= 2129.79 kg-cm
dm
and T2 = W tan ( j - a ) ´
2
6
= 3058 tan ( 8 . 53 - 4 . 54 ) ´
2
= 639.89 kg-cm.
We know that torque ratio,
T1 2129 . 79
= = 3.32.
T2 639 . 89
We know that,
tan a
h mech = ´ 100%
tan( a + j )
tan ( 4 . 54)
= ´ 100%
tan ( 4 . 54 + 6 . 53)
= 34.2 %.
3. Obtain an expression for the length of belt for an open belt drive.
Two parallel shafts 6 metres apart are provided mm and 600 mm diameter pulleys and are conn
means of cross belt. The direction of rotation of the pulley is to be reversed by changing over to an of
drive. How much length of the belt has to be reduce. 8 + 8 = 16
Ans. Expression :
Let d1 = diameter of smaller pulleys

d1
\ r1 =
2
and d 2 = diameter of larger pulleys
d2
r2 =
2
ÐC1O1 B1 = p - 2j
ÐC 2O2 B 2 = p + 2j
and arc C1 P1 B1 = ( p - 2j)r1
arc C 2 P2 B 2 = ( p + 2j)r 2
In O1 A 2O2 , (O1 A 2 ) 2 = (O1O2 ) 2 - ( A 2O2 ) 2
Þ (O1 A 2 ) 2 = (O1O2 ) 2 - (C 2O2 - A 2C 2 ) 2
Þ (O1 A 2 ) 2 = (O1O2 ) 2 - (C 2O2 - C1O1 ) 2
Þ (O1 A 2 ) 2 = l 2 - (r 2 - r1 ) 2
Þ O1 A 2 = l 2 - (r 2 - r1 ) 2
Length of open belt
= 2O1 A 2 + arc C1 P1 B1 + arc C 2 P2 B 2

= 2 l 2 - (r 2 - r1 ) 2 + ( p - 2j)r1 + ( p + 2j)r 2
2
æd d ö d d
= 2 l 2 - çç 2 - 1 ÷÷ + ( p - 2j) 1 + ( p + 2j) 2 Proved.
è 2 2 ø 2 2
Given data :
l =6m
d1 = 300 mm = 0.3 m
\ r1 = 0 .15 m
d 2 = 600 mm = 0.6 m
\ r 2 = 0 . 3 m.
We know that when open belt drive,
r 2 - r1
sin j =
l
ær -r ö
Þ j = sin -1 çç 2 1 ÷÷
è l ø
æ 0. 3 - 0. 15 ö
= sin -1 ç ÷ = 4.43°
è 6 ø
p
= ´ 4.43 = 0.025 rad.
180
Length of open belt = 2 l 2 - ( r2 - r1 ) 2 + ( p - 2j ) r1 + ( p + 2j ) r2
= 2 62 - ( 0. 3 - 0. 15) 2 + ( p - 2 ´ 0. 025) ´ 0. 15 + ( p + 2 ´ 0. 025) ´ 0. 3

= 13.417 m.
We know that when cross belt drive
r 2 + r1 0 . 3 + 0 .15
sin j = =
l 6
æ 0 . 3 + 0 .15 ö
f = sin -1 ç ÷ = 4.3°
è 6 ø
p
= rad = 0.075 rad.
180 ´ 4 . 3
Length of cross belt
= 2 l 2 - (r 2 + r1 ) 2 + ( p + 2j) (r1 + r 2 )
= 2 62 - ( 0. 3 + 0. 15) 2 + ( p + 2 ´ 0. 75) ( 0. 15 + 0. 3)
= 13.447 m.
Reducing length = 13.447 – 13.417
= 0.03 m = 3 cm.
4. What is the function of flywheel? Define coefficient of fluctuation of speed of a flywheel.

The turning moment diagram for a multi cylinder engine has been drawn to a scale of 1 mm = 4500
N-m vertically and 1 mm = 2.4° horizontally. The intercepted areas between output torque curve
and mean resistance line taken in order from one end above and below are 342, 230, 245, 303, 115,
232, 227, 164 mm2 when engine is running at 150 rpm. If the mass of the flywheel is 1000 kg and the
total fluctuation of speed does not exceed 3% of the mean speed. Find the maximum value for the
radius of gyration.6 + 10 = 16
Ans. Function of flywheel : A flywheel used in machines serves as a reservoir, which stores energy
during the period when the requirement of energy is more than the supply. A flywheel controls the speed
variations caused by the fluctuation of the engine turning moment during each cycle of operation.
Coefficient of fluctuation of speed of a fly wheel : The difference between the maximum and minimum
speeds during a cycle is called the maximum fluctuation of speed. The ratio of the maximum fluctuation of
speed to the mean speed is called co-efficient of fluctuation of speed.
Let N 1 = maximum speed in r.p.m during the cycle.
N 2 = minimum speed in r.p.m during the cycle.
N = mean speed in r.p.m.
N1 + N 2
=
2
Coefficient of fluctuation of speed
N1 - N 2 N1 - N 2
Cs = =
N N1 + N 2
2
2 ( N1 - N 2 )
Cs =
N1 + N 2
Given data :
N = 150 rpm
Fluctuation = 3%
Scale : 1 mm = 4500 N-m
4500
= kg-m = 458.72 kg-m
9 . 81
p
1 mm = 2.4° = 2.4 ´ radian
180
Mass of flywheel (W) = 1000 kg

Let K = radius of gyration.
Now, N 0 = 152.25 rpm
N 2 = 147.75 rpm
Energy at A = e
Energy at B = e + 342
Energy at C = e + 112
Energy at D = e + 357 Maximum energy
Energy at E = e + 54
Energy at F = e + 169
Energy at G = e - 63 Minimum energy
Energy at H = e + 164
Energy at I = e
Maximum energy = e + 357
Minimum energy = e - 63
\ Excess energy = (e + 357) - ( e - 63)
= 420 mm2 = 420 ´ mm ´ mm
p
= 420 ´ 458.72 ´ 204 ´ kg-m
180
= 8070.2 kg-m
We know that,
2p N 1 2p ´ 152. 25
w12 = =
60 60
= 15.94 rad/sec.
2p N 2 2p ´ 147.75
and w2 = =
60 60
= 15.47 rad/sec.
We know that,
Energy of flywheel = excess energy
WK 2 2
Þ ( w1 - w22 ) = 8070 . 2
2g
1000 K 2
Þ {(15 . 94) 2 - (15 . 47) 2} = 8070 . 2
2 ´ 9 . 81
82015 2
Þ K = 8070 . 2
109
8070 . 2 ´ 109
Þ K2 =
82015
8070.2 ´ 109
Þ K=
82015
= 3.274 m.
5. Derive an expression for height of a porter governor.

The arms of a porter governor are 300 mm long. The upper arms are pivoted on the axis of rotation
and the lower arms are attached to the sleeve at a distance of 35 mm from the axis of rotation. The
load on the sleeve is 54 kg and mass of each ball is 7 kg. Determine the range of speed when the radius
of rotation of the balls are 225 min and 200 mm. 8 + 8 = 16
Ans. Consider the forces acting on one-half of the governor.
Let W = weight of the central load in

w = weight of the ball
Fc = centrifugal force acting on the ball
h = height of governor
w
We know that Fc = ´ w2 ´ r ... (i)
g
r
and tan a = ... (ii)
h
Now, taking moment about the point I.
W
Fc ´ AB = w ´ IB + ´ IC
2
W
Þ Fc ´ AB = W ´ IB + ( IB + BC)
2
IB W æ IB BC ö
Þ Fc = W ´ + ç + ÷
AB 2 è AB AB ø
W
Þ Fc = w tan a + (tan a + tan b)
2
ì W æ tan b öü
Þ Fc = tan a í w + çç1 + ÷ý
î 2 è tan a ÷øþ
Fc W æ tan b ö
Þ =w+ çç1 + ÷
tan a 2 è tan a ÷ø
Fc W æ tan b ö
Þ =w+ çç1 + ÷ [from equation (ii)]
r/h 2 è tan a ÷ø
h W æ tan b ö
Þ Fc × =w+ çç1 + ÷
r 2 è tan a ÷ø
w 2 h Wæ tan b ö
Þ w r , = w + çç1 + ÷ [from equation (i)]
g r 2è tan a ÷ø
w 2 W æ tan b ö
Þ w ´ h=w+ çç1 + ÷
g 2 è tan a ÷ø
gì W æ tan b öü
Þ h= íw + çç1 + ÷ý
w´ w î 2 2 è tan a ÷øþ
This is required result.
Given data :
Length of arms = 300 mm = 30 cm
Weight of sleeve (W) = 54 kg
Weight of ball (w) = 7 kg

Radius of rotation of highest point (r1 ) = 225 mm = 22.5 cm
Radius of rotation at lowest point (r 2 ) = 200 mm = 20 cm.
22 . 5
We know that, sin a =
30
Maximum speed at highest point
æ 22 . 5 ö
a = sin -1 ç ÷ = 48.59°
è 30 ø
22 . 5 - 3 . 5
and sin b =
30
æ 19 ö
Þ b = sin -1 ç ÷ = 39.29°.
è 30 ø
We know that,
w 2 W
w1 ´ r1 = w tan a 1 + (tan a 1 + tan b 2 )
g 2
7 54
Þ ´ w12 ´ 22. 5 = 7 tan ( 48. 59)° + {tan ( 48. 59)° + tan ( 39. 29)° }
9. 81 2
1750 2
Þ w1 = 60 . 64
109
60 . 64 ´ 109
Þ w1 = = 1.94 rad /sec.
1750
1. 94 ´ 60
\ N1 = = 18.55 » 19
2p
= 19 rpm.
Minimum speed at lowest point.
20
We know that, sin a 2 =
30
æ 20 ö
Þ a 2 = sin -1 ç ÷ = 41.81°
è 30 ø
20 - 3 . 5
and sin b 2 =
30
æ 16. 5 ö
Þ b 2 = sin -1 ç ÷ = 33.36°.
è 30 ø
We know that,
w 2 W
w2 ´ r 2 = w tan a 2 + (tan a 2 + b 2 )
g 2
7 54
Þ w22 ´ 20 = 7 tan ( 41. 81) ° + {tan ( 41. 81) ° + tan (33 . 36) °}
9 . 81 2
14000 2
Þ w2 = 48 .186
981
48186
. ´ 981
Þ w2 = = 1.84 rad/sec
14000
1. 84 ´ 60
\ N2 = = 17.47 » 18 rpm
2p
\ Range of speed of governor
N1 - N 2 = 19 - 18 rpm.
6. Deduce expression for braking torque for band and shoe brake.
A simple band brake is operated by a lever of length 500 mm. The brake drum has a diameter of 500
mm and brake band embraces 5/8 of the circumference. One end of the band is attached to the
fulcrum and other and at 100 mm from the fulcrum. If the effort applied to the end of the lever is 2
KN and the co-efficient of friction is 0.25, find the maximum braking torque on the drum. 5
Ans. Expression : See Q.No. 11, Group-C of 2013 (Even).
Given data :
P1 = 2 KN = 2000 N
2000
= kg = 203.87 kg.
9 . 81
l = 500 mm = 50 cm
d = 500 mm = 50 cm
\ r = 25 cm.
5
q = th of circumference
8
5 5 p
= ´ 360° = ´ 360 ´ rad
8 8 180
= 3.927 rad.
b = 100 cm = 10 cm
m = 0.25
We know that,
T1
= emq = e 0.25 ´ 3.927 = 2.669
T2
\ T1 = 2. 669 T2 ... (i)
Taking moment about fulcrum 0.
T2 ´ b = P1 ´ l
P1 ´ l 203. 87 ´ 50
Þ T2 = = = 1019.35 kg.
b 10
Substituting T2 = 1019 . 35 kg in equation (i), we get
T1 = 2.669 ´ 1019 . 35
= 2720.65 kg.
Braking torque = (T1 - T2 )r
= ( 2720 . 65 - 1019 . 35) ´ 25
= 42532.37 kg-cm
= 425.32 kg-m.
7. A cam is to be designed for a knife edge follower with the following data :
(a) Cam lift = 50 mm during 90° of cam rotation with SHM
(b) Dwell for next 30°
(c) During the next 60° of cam rotation, the follower returns to its original position with SHM.
(d) Dwell during remaining 180°.
Draw the profile of the cam when the line of stroke is offset 20 mm from the axis of the camshaft. The
radius of the base circle of the cam is 40 mm. Determine the maximum velocity and acceleration of
the follower during its outward and return stroke, if the cam rotates at 200 rpm. 16
Ans. Given data :
S = 40 mm = 0.04m
p
q = 90° = rad = 1.57 rad
2
p
q R = 60° = rad = 1.047 rad
3
N = 200 rpm.
First of all, the displacement diagram is drawn as discussed in the following steps :
stroke, SR = 30° to represent dwell, RP = 60° to represent return stroke and PX = 180° to represent
dwell.
(2) Draw vertical line AY = 40 mm to represent the cam lift or stroke of the follower and complete the
rectangle.
(4) Since the follower moves with simple harmonic motion, therefore draw a semicircle with AY as
diameter and divide into six equal parts.
(5) From points a, b, c, ... etc draw horizontal lines intersecting the vertical lines drawn through 1, 2, 3, ...
etc and 0¢ , 1¢ , 2¢ , 3¢, ... etc at B , C , D , ..., M, N, P.
(6) Joint the points A, B, C, ... etc with a smooth curve. This is the required displacement diagram.
Maximum velocity of follower during its out word and return stroke.
We know that angular velocity of cam
2pN 2p ´ 200
w= = = 20.94 rad/s.
60 60
We know that the maximum velocity of the follower during its outward stroke.
pw× S p ´ 20. 94 ´ 0. 04
V0 = =
2q 0 2 ´ 1. 571
= 0.837 m/s.
and maximum velocity of the follower during its return stroke
pw× S p ´ 20 . 94 ´ 0 . 04
VR = =
2q R 2 ´ 1. 047
= 1.26 m/s.
Maximum acceleration of the follower during its outward and return stroke.
We know that the maximum accretion of the follower during its outward stroke.
p 2 w2 × S p 2 ´ ( 20 . 94) 2 ´ 0 . 04
d0 = = = 35.07 m/s2.
2 (q 0 ) 2 2 ´ (1. 047) 2
We know that the maximum acceleration of the follower during its return stroke.
p 2 w2 × S p 2 ´ ( 20. 94 ) 2 ´ 0. 04
aR = = = 78.96 m/s2.
2 (q R )2 2 ´ (1. 047) 2
8. Write short notes on any two of the following : 2 ´ 8 = 16

(a) Types of constrained motion
(b) Comparision between gear drive and belt drive
(c) Effort and power of a porter governor
(d) Classification of brake.
Ans. (a) Following are the types of motion :
(i) Completely constrained motion : It is one in which the motion takes place in a definite direction. The
constrained motion is complete by its own links, e.g. a rectangular bar moving in a rectangular hole.
and a shaft with collars at each and rotating in a round hole.
(ii) Partially constrained motion : When the constrained motion is not completed by itself but by some
other mean, it is known as partially constrained motion It is also known as successfully constrained
motion.
(iii) Incompletely constrained motion : If the link are so connected that motion can take place in more that
on direction, it is called incompletely constrained motion, A difference in the direction of impressed
force generally changes the direction of the relative displacement.
(b) Comparision between gear drive and belt drive : Following are the advantages and disadvantage of
the gear drive belt drive.
Advantage :
(i) It transmits exact velocity ratio.
(ii) It may be used to transmit large power
(iii) It has high efficiency.
(iv) It has reliable services
(v) It has compact layout.
Disadvantages :
(i) The manufacture of years require special tools and equipment
(ii) The error in cutting teeth may cause vibrations and noise during operation.
(c) Effort and power of a porter governor :
Power : the power of a governor is the work done at the sleeve for a given percentage change of speed. it
is the product of the mean value of the effort and the distance through which the sleeve moves
Power = mean effort ´ lift of sleeve
Effort of governor : The effort of a governor is the mean force exerted at the sleeve for a given
When the governor is running steady there is no force at the sleeve. But when the speed changes, there is a
resistance at the sleeve which opposes its motion. This resistance which is equal to the effort, varies uniformly
form a maximum value to zero while the governor moves into its position of equilibrium.
(d) Brake : A brake is a device by mean of which artificial friction resistance in order to retard or stop the
motion of machine.
The brakes, according to the means used for transforming the energy by the braking elements, are
classified as :
(i) Hy draulic brake
(ii) Electric brake
(iii) Mechanical brake.
The mechanical brakes, according to the direction of acting force, may be divided into the following two
groups :
(i) Radial brakes : In these brakes, the force acting on the brake drum is in radial direction.
According to the shape of friction elements :
— Block brake
— Shoe brake
— Band brake
(ii) Axial brakes : In these brakes, the force acting on the brake drum is in axial direction.
— Disc brakes
— Cone brakes.
q
[Model Paper] THEORY OF MACHINE AND MECHANISM 330
Model Paper

[Model Paper-I]
GROUP-A
1. Choose the correct alternative : 1´ 20 = 20
(i) Cross head is used in
(a) steam engine (b) IC engine
(c) turbine (d) none of the above
(ii) Kinetic deals
(a) inertial forces (b) momentum
(c) motion (d) relative motion
(iii) Plane motion is on
(a) single plane (b) double plane
(c) three planes (d) none of the above
(iv) Lower pair has
(a) point contact (b) surface contact
(c) line contact (d) none of the above
(v) Hartnell governor is a
(a) pendulum type governor (b) inertia governor
(c) dead weight governor (d) spring loaded governor
(vi) Maximum efficiency of screw jack is
1 + tan j 1 - cos j
(a) (b)
1 - tan j 1 + cos j
sec j - tan j
(c) (d) 90%
sec j + tan j
331 THEORY OF MACHINE AND MECHANISM [Model Paper]
(vii) Diametral pitch of gear is

D T
(a) (b)
T D
(c) T ´ D (d) none
where, D = pitch circle diameter and T = no of teeth on gear.

(viii) Cam and follower constitute a
(c) both (d) none of the above
(ix) Belt drive is
(a) lower pair (b) cylindrical pair
(c) higher pair (d) all of the above
(x) Cam size depends on
(xi) Porter Governor could be classified as
(a) inertia type (b) pendulum type
(c) centrifugal type (d) dead weight type
(xii) The brakes commonly used in railway train is
(c) band and block brake (d) none of these
(xiii) The wheels of a moving car possess
(a) potential energy only
(b) kinetic energy of translation only
(c) kinetic energy of rotation only
(d) kinetic energy of translation and rotation both
(xiv) Length of approach in gear drive is associated to
(a) driven gear (b) driver gear
(c) (a) and (b) (d) none of these
(xv) Simple mechanism has
(a) one link (b) two links
(c) three links (d) four links
(xvi) Excess energy stored in I.C. engine is in
(a) flywheel (b) connecting rod
(c) cylinder (d) none of these
[Model Paper] THEORY OF MACHINE AND MECHANISM 332
T1
(xvii) Tension ratio is equal to
T2
mq
(a) emq (b) e sin a

(c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of above
(xviii) Size of flywheel in single cylinder engine is
(a) big (b) small
(c) big and heavy (d) none of these
(xix) Block brakes are
(a) radial (b) conical
(c) flat (d) none of these
(xx) Involute teeth is ......... than cycloidal teeth.
(a) weaker (b) stronger
(c) longer (d) smaller
GROUP-B
Answer any four questions for the following : 5 ´ 4 = 20

2. Ascrew jack is double start having pitch 1 cm and mean diameter 5 cm, find helix angle of thread. 5
3. Define angle of repose with figure.
A band brake is lined with 10 wooden blocks each subtends an angle of 18° at the centre of drum. If
coefficient of friction is 0.36. Find the tension ratio. A porter governor has the arms each 30 cm. The
lowest and highest position of sleeve are 30° and 45°. Find lift of sleeve. 5
4. Find the length of an open belt 3 m apart connected by two pulleys of 30 cm and 60 cm diameters
with figure.
A turning moment diagram for engine consists two isosceles triangle. Base of the triangle q = 0° to
q = 180° and q = 180° to q = 360°, then find the energy stored in flywheel for height of triangle is 100
kg-m. 5
5. Prove that for maximum power transmission :
T1 = 2Tc
Tc = centrifugal tension. 5
6. Show that efficiency of self locking screw is less than 50%. 5
333 THEORY OF MACHINE AND MECHANISM [Model Paper]
GROUP-C
Answer any four questions for the following : 10´ 4 = 40

7. In a porter governor, each arm 30 cm long and ball weight is 2.5 kg with central load 25 kg. For the
lowest and highest position of sleeve, the arms are inclined 30° and 40° respectively to the vertical.
Frictional resistance is 2.5 kg. Assuming arms intersect on axis of rotation. Find travel of sleeve. 10
8. In a rope drive transmitted 1200 HP, the flywheel has effective diameter 360 cm and speed 75 rpm.
There 32 ropes running in grooves which have an angle 45° The coefficient of friction between pulley
and rope 0.25, angle of lap 180° and weight per metre length 1.6 kg. Find the greatest tension in each
rope. 10
9. A pain of spur wheel with 14 and 21 teeth are of involute type and pressure angle 16°. Find maximum
addenda of the pinion and gear to avoid interference. If pitch in module 6 mm. 10
10. The turning moment diagram of two isosceles triangles. The maximum height for each triangle is
100 kg-m while the base of the triangle is q = 0° to 180° and q = 180° to 360°. If the engine runs at 200
rpm and total fluctuation of speed is 4%, find :
(a) Indicated power
(b) Energy stored in flywheel. 10
11. A cam is designed for a knife edge follower with the data :
(b) Dwell for 30° of cam rotation
(d) Dwell for remaining 210° of cam rotation.
Draw profile of cam when line of stroke of follower is passing through cam centre, Mean radius of
cam is 50 mm. 10
12. The areas above and below the line of mean resistance taken in order are 3.1, 2.05, 2.2, 2.95, 1.22,
2.44, 2.25 and 1.33 cm 2 of turning moment diagram.
The scale of diagram :
Crank angle 1 cm = 24°
The mean speed is 180 rpm and total fluctuation of speed is 6%, then find energy stored in flywheel.10
o

Theory of Machine and Mechanism (4th Sem)

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Theory of Machine and Mechanism (4th Sem)

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Published by

Foundation Publishing House

I take immense pleasure and happiness in introducing the book "THEORY OF

My Mother Mrs. Pramila Singh

Subject Code No. of Periods Per Week Full Marks : 100

Unit Topic Hrs/Week Marks

1 FUNDAMENTALS AND TYPES OF MECHANISMS 12 14

1.1 Kinematics of Machines: - Definition of Kinematics, Dynamics, Statics,

2 VELOCITY AND ACCELERATION IN MECHANISM 9 9

2.1 Concept of relative velocity and relative acceleration of a point on link,

3 CAMS AND FOLLOWERS 8 8

3.1 Concept, definition and application of Cams and Followers.

5 FLYWHEEL AND GOVERNORS 6 6

6 BRAKES, DYNAMOMETERS, CLUTCHES & BEARINGS 12 14

6.1 Function of brakes and dynamometer, types of brakes and Dynamometers,

7 BALANCING & VIBRATIONS 3 3

7.1 Concept of balancing. Balancing of single rotating mass. Graphical method

Structure: It is an assemblage of a number of resisant bodies (known as members) having no

Square Hole Square Bar

2. Incompletely Constrained Motion: When the motion between two elements of a

Example: Figure shown is an example of an incompletely constrained motion as it may

KINEMATIC PAIR ACCORDING TO NATURE OF CONTACT AS

KINEMATIC PAIR ACCORDING TO NATURE OF MECHANICAL CONSTRAINT

KINEMATIC PAIRS ACCORDING TO NATURE OF RELATIVE MOTION

 Degees of freedom/mobility of a mechanism: It is the number o inputs (number of

Grashof’s law for a four bar mechanism

Crank-rocker Double-rocker Parallelogram linkage

Types of joints in a Chain

The following types of joints are usually found in a chain:

INVERSION OF FOUR BAR CHAIN

2. Coupling Rod of a Locomotive (Double Crank Mechanism)

Coupling Rod of Locomotive

3. Watt’s Indicator Mechanism (Double Lever Mechanism)

Single Slider Crank Chain:

Guides Connecting Rod

Single Slider Crank Chain

2. Second Inversion (Link 2 is fixed [Crank])

3. Third Inversion - Link 3 is Fixed (Connecting Rod)

4. Fourth Inversion - Link 4 is Fixed (Slider)

Inversion of Double Slider Crank Mechanism:

1. First Inversion - link 1 is fixed. Elliptical trammel.

Ackerman Steering Gear Mechanism:

Ackerman Steering Gear

Sol. (a) The linkage has 2 hoops and 5 links.

Sol. (a) Length of the longest link = 12 mm

Sol. (a) Length of the longest link = 9

(b) Length of the longest link = 9

Sol. The mechanism has three sub-chains:

 In the chain ABDE,

Time of working stroke 360   360  

  = 133.3° or /2 = 66.65°

120 = 2AP cos 66.65° = 0.7926 AP

12  cos   sin 2   sin 2

(104.72)2  cos15 sin 2 15 sin 20

O2B = l = 68mm (longest link)

CONCEPT OF ABSOLUTE AND RELATIVE VELOCITY

VELOCITY (MOTION) OF A LINK

(a) (b) (c)

Angular Velocity of Links

1. Angular velocity of BC.

(a) Velocity of C relative to B, Vcb = bc

RELATION BETWEEN LINEAR VELOCITY AND ANGULAR VELOCITY

RELATION BETWEEN ANGULAR ACCELERATION AND LINEAR ACCELERATION

from equation (i) and (ii) we get,